Afpam10 219 v5

Administrative Changes to AFPAM 10-219, Volume 5, Bare Base Conceptual Planning
OPR: AFCESA/CEXX
OPR should be changed to: AFCEC/CX
References to Air Force Civil Engineer Support Agency (AFCESA) should be changed to Air
Force Civil Engineer Center (AFCEC) throughout publication.
References to AFH 10-222V8, Guide to Mobile Aircraft Arresting System Installation, should be
deleted; publication will be rescinded simultaneously with this AC.
References to AFH 10-222V9, Reverse Osmosis Water Purification Unit Set-UP and Operation,
should be deleted; publication will be rescinded simultaneously with this AC.
References to AFH 10-222V6, Guide to Bare Base Facility Erection, should be deleted;
publication will be rescinded simultaneously with this AC.
17 December 2012
BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY AIR FORCE PAMPHLET 10-219,
OF THE AIR FORCE VOLUME 5
30 MARCH 2012
Operations
BARE BASE CONCEPTUAL PLANNING
COMPLIANCE WITH THIS PUBLICATION IS MANDATORY
ACCESSIBILITY: Publications and forms are available on the e-Publishing website at

www.e-Publishing.af.mil for downloading or ordering
RELEASABILITY: There are no releasability restrictions on this publication
OPR: AFCESA/CEXX Certified by: AF/A7CX

(Colonel Darren P. Gibbs)
Supersedes: AFPAM 10-219, Volume 5, Pages: 314
1 June 1996
This pamphlet supports AFI 10-210, Prime Base Engineer Emergency Force (BEEF) Program,
and AFI 10-211, Civil Engineer Contingency Response Planning. This volume describes the Air
Force civil engineer’s role in establishing and operating a bare base. It lists civil engineer tasks
involved in the forward projection of airpower, with emphasis on the use of Basic Expeditionary
Airfield Resources (BEAR). This volume is of particular importance to engineers and mobility
team chiefs responsible for initial beddown planning and execution at bare base and forward
operating locations. The volume makes frequent reference to volumes in the Air Force Handbook
10-222-series and applicable technical orders for additional information. Refer recommended
changes and questions about this publication to the office of primary responsibility using the AF
Form 847, Recommendation for Change of Publication: route AF Form 847s from the field
through the appropriate functional chain of command and Major Command (MAJCOM)
publications/forms managers. Ensure that all records created as a result of processes prescribed
in this publication are maintained according to AFMAN 33-363, Management of Records, and
disposed of in accordance with the Air Force Records Disposition Schedule (RDS) located at
https://www.my.af.mil/afrims/afrims/afrims/rims.cfm. The use of the name or mark of any
specific manufacturer, commercial product, commodity, or service in this publication does not
imply endorsement by the Air Force.
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
This document is substantially revised and should be completely reviewed. Of particular

significance: it replaces legacy (Harvest Eagle/Falcon) assets with BEAR throughout; addresses
recommended water use rates for bare base beddowns; updates ancillary equipment; transitions
2 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
from BEAR to BEAR Order of Battle asset management and equipment configurations; and adds
information on contract force multipliers including the Air Force Contract Augmentation
Program. Also addresses civil engineer (CE) task standards and planning factors such as
manpower, materials and equipment for potential contingency tasks. Additionally, engineer
quick reference sheets were included to provide engineers with bare base planning information
and examples in a quick reference format.
Chapter 1—INTRODUCTION TO BARE BASE PLANNING 11

1.1. Purpose. .................................................................................................................. 11
Figure 1.1. Bare Base Facilities and Equipment ...................................................................... 11
1.2. Scope. ..................................................................................................................... 11
Figure 1.2. Air Force Civil Engineer Publications Hierarchy .................................................. 12
1.3. Background. ........................................................................................................... 12
Figure 1.3. Dozer Clearing an Airfield in World War II .......................................................... 13
Figure 1.4. Prime Power Generators Support Sustained Operations ........................................ 15
1.4. Planning Process. ................................................................................................... 15
Figure 1.5. Medical Personnel Erect Shelters for Medical Support Operations ....................... 17
Figure 1.6. Contract Augmentation and Support ..................................................................... 19
Chapter 2—BARE BASE PLANNING GUIDELINES 21

2.1. Introduction. ........................................................................................................... 21
Figure 2.1. Elements of Bare Base Planning ............................................................................ 21
2.2. Assumptions. .......................................................................................................... 21
2.3. Bare Base Force Module Planning. ....................................................................... 22
Figure 2.2. AETF Force Module Construct ............................................................................. 23
2.4. Bare Base Asset Deployment Planning Guidelines. .............................................. 24
Figure 2.3. Transition from BEAR to BOB Asset Management .............................................. 25
Table 2.1. BOB Multi-Modal Configurations ......................................................................... 26
Figure 2.4. Modular/Scalable UTC to Pax Flow Matrix (expanded capability) ...................... 28
Figure 2.5. BOB Scaled to Support 50-Person Humanitarian Relief Operation ...................... 28
Figure 2.6. BOB with Partial Host Base Support ..................................................................... 29
Figure 2.7. Comparison of BEAR and BOB Asset Management ............................................ 29
2.5. Complementary Systems and Equipment. ............................................................. 29
2.6. Engineer Planning Guidelines. ............................................................................... 30
Figure 2.8. Servicing the Mobile Aircraft Arresting System ................................................... 31
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 3
Figure 2.9. Fuel Berm with Protective Liner Installed ............................................................. 32

Figure 2.10. Civil Engineers Erect Medium Shelter System ...................................................... 33
2.7. Task Priorities. ....................................................................................................... 36
Figure 2.11. Installing Airfield Lighting - Priority 1 Task ......................................................... 36
2.8. Climate and Weather. ............................................................................................ 39
2.9. Manpower. ............................................................................................................. 40
2.10. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning. ........................................................... 41
2.11. Noise Suppression and Lighting. ........................................................................... 41
2.12. Transportation. ....................................................................................................... 41
2.13. Medical Facilities Support. .................................................................................... 42
Figure 2.12. Expeditionary Medical Support (EMEDS) System ............................................... 42
2.14. Chemical, Biological, Radiological, Nuclear, and High-Yield Explosive
(CBRNE) Environment. ......................................................................................... 42
2.15. Camouflage and Concealment. .............................................................................. 43
2.16. Base Defense. ......................................................................................................... 43
Figure 2.13. Engineers Create Physical Barriers Against Terrorist Intrusions .......................... 44
2.17. Base Recovery and Denial. .................................................................................... 44
2.18. Asset Reconstitution. ............................................................................................. 44
Chapter 3—BARE BASE SITING AND CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES 46

3.1. Introduction. ........................................................................................................... 46
3.2. Site Selection and Layout. ..................................................................................... 46
Figure 3.1. Conventional Base Layout ..................................................................................... 47
Figure 3.2. Linear Base Layout ................................................................................................ 47
Figure 3.3. Example 1,100-Person Facility Layout Before Expansion .................................... 48
Figure 3.4. Example 3,300-Person Facility Layout After Expansion ...................................... 48
Table 3.1. Key Facility Group Spacing ................................................................................... 49
Table 3.2. Standoff Distances and Separation for Expeditionary and Temporary Structures . 50
Figure 3.5. Standoff Distances and Separation for Expeditionary and Temporary Structures . 51
Table 3.3. Standoff Distances for New and Existing Buildings ............................................. 52
Figure 3.6. Typical Facility Orientation at Bare Bases ............................................................ 53
Figure 3.7. Dispersed Layout for 3, 6, 9 and 12 Facilities ....................................................... 53
Figure 3.8. Dispersed Layout for 24 Facilities ......................................................................... 54
3.3. Construction Sequence and Task Scheduling. ....................................................... 54
4 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table 3.4. Task Schedule ........................................................................................................ 56

3.4. Theater Construction Standards. ............................................................................ 56
Table 3.5. Contingency Construction Standards in the Theater .............................................. 57
Chapter 4—SITE SPECIFIC PLANNING 60

4.1. Introduction. ........................................................................................................... 60
4.2. Overview. ............................................................................................................... 60
4.3. Data Collection. ..................................................................................................... 60
4.4. Expeditionary Site Planning and Survey Process (ESSP) and Installation
Geospatial Information and Services (IGI&S). ...................................................... 63
4.5. Environmental Impact. ........................................................................................... 64
Figure 4.1. North and South Temperate Zones ........................................................................ 64
Figure 4.2. Tropical Zone ......................................................................................................... 67
Figure 4.3. Frigid Zones ........................................................................................................... 70
Figure 4.4. Special Planning Required for Frigid Zones .......................................................... 71
4.6. Desert Regions. ...................................................................................................... 72
Figure 4.5. Rocky Desert Terrain ............................................................................................. 73
4.7. Existing Facilities and Resources. ......................................................................... 76
4.8. Supplies and Construction Materials. .................................................................... 76
4.9. Host-Nation Support Agreements. ......................................................................... 77
4.10. Hardening Requirements. ...................................................................................... 77
Figure 4.6. Concertainer® Revetment Material ....................................................................... 78
4.11. Camouflage and Concealment Requirements. ....................................................... 78
4.12. Environmental Considerations. .............................................................................. 78
Chapter 5—MANPOWER PLANNING 79

5.1. Introduction. ........................................................................................................... 79
5.2. Overview. ............................................................................................................... 79
5.3. Roles and Mission. ................................................................................................. 79
5.4. Beddown Force Structure. ..................................................................................... 81
Figure 5.1. Engineer Team Assembling a Medium Shelter System ......................................... 81
Figure 5.2. RED HORSE Team Erect Warehouse at Forward Location ................................. 83
Figure 5.3. 49 MMG BEAR Compound at Holloman Air Force Base .................................... 83
5.5. Manpower Requirements. ...................................................................................... 84
Figure 5.4. Defensive Walls Increase Survivability ................................................................. 88
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 5
Chapter 6—AIRFIELD REQUIREMENTS 90

6.1. Introduction. ........................................................................................................... 90
Figure 6.1. C-17 Landing at a Bare Base Airfield .................................................................... 90
6.2. Overview. ............................................................................................................... 90
6.3. Bare Base Mission. ................................................................................................ 90
6.4. Airfield Planning Criteria. ..................................................................................... 90
6.5. Runway Requirements. .......................................................................................... 91
Figure 6.2. Runway End and Clear Zone Details ..................................................................... 91
Figure 6.3. Runway Lateral Clearance Zones .......................................................................... 92
6.6. Taxiway Requirements. ......................................................................................... 93
6.7. Apron Requirements. ............................................................................................. 93
Table 6.1. Fixed-Wing Aircraft Dimensions .......................................................................... 94
Figure 6.4. Typical Aircraft Parking Arrangement .................................................................. 95
Figure 6.5. Fighter Aircraft Parked Diagonally on Apron ....................................................... 96
Figure 6.6. Army Criteria for Type 1 Rotary-Wing Parking Apron (except CH-47) ............... 97
Table 6.2. Rotary-Wing Aircraft Dimensions, Distance, and Taxiway Width ....................... 98
Table 6.3. Unmanned Aircraft Systems Dimensions .............................................................. 98
6.8. Airfield Lights. ....................................................................................................... 99
Figure 6.7. EALS Trailers ........................................................................................................ 99
6.9. Aircraft Arresting Systems. ................................................................................... 99
Figure 6.8. Mobile Aircraft Arresting System (Towed) ........................................................... 100
6.10. Navigational Aids (NAVAIDS). ............................................................................ 100
Figure 6.9. AN/TSW-7 Mobile Control Tower ........................................................................ 101
6.11. Aircraft Revetment. ............................................................................................... 101
Figure 6.10. Typical Revetment Installation at a Bare Base ...................................................... 102
Figure 6.11. Dispersed and Non-dispersed Revetment Cells ..................................................... 102
Figure 6.12. Cluster Arrangements for Aircraft Revetments ..................................................... 103
Figure 6.13. B-1 Revetment Being Assembled .......................................................................... 103
Figure 6.14. B-1 Revetment Being Pinned Together ................................................................. 104
Figure 6.15. Commonly Used Commercial Revetments ............................................................ 104
Chapter 7—ELECTRICAL UTILITY SYSTEMS 105

7.1. Introduction. ........................................................................................................... 105
Figure 7.1. Typical BEAR Low-Voltage Generator ................................................................ 105
6 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
7.2. Overview. ............................................................................................................... 105

7.3. General Guidance. ................................................................................................. 105
Figure 7.2. Generator Positioned to Allow Prevailing Winds to Disperse Heat ...................... 106
Figure 7.3. Electric Distribution for an 1100-Person Camp (Typical) ..................................... 107
Table 7.1. Air Base Commercial Power Supplies ................................................................... 110
7.4. Low Voltage Electrical System. ............................................................................ 110
7.5. High Voltage Electrical System. ............................................................................ 111
Figure 7.6. MEP-012A 750-kW Generator .............................................................................. 112
Figure 7.7. Generators with 10,000-Gallon Fuel Storage Bladder ........................................... 112
Figure 7.8. Interim Power Unit (IPU) ...................................................................................... 113
Figure 7.9. TF-2 Light Carts .................................................................................................... 114
Figure 7.10. Remote Area Lighting System (RALS) ................................................................. 114
Figure 7.11. RALS Deployed ..................................................................................................... 115
7.6. Grounding. ............................................................................................................. 115
7.7. Future BEAR Electrical Power Generation and Distribution System. .................. 115
Chapter 8—WATER UTILITY SYSTEMS 116

8.1. Introduction. ........................................................................................................... 116
8.2. Overview. ............................................................................................................... 116
8.3. Water Sources. ....................................................................................................... 116
Figure 8.1. Dissolved Solids .................................................................................................... 117
Figure 8.2. Surface Freshwater Sources May Contain Infectious Organisms .......................... 118
Figure 8.3. Schistosomes Worms ............................................................................................. 118
8.4. Water Use. ............................................................................................................. 118
Table 8.1. Water Use Planning Factors ................................................................................... 119
8.5. Water Purification. ................................................................................................. 122
Figure 8.4. 600-GPH Reverse Osmosis Water Purification Unit (ROWPU) ........................... 123
Figure 8.5. 1500-GPH ROWPU ............................................................................................... 124
8.6. Water Purification Plants. ...................................................................................... 124
8.7. Water Storage. ....................................................................................................... 124
8.8. Freeze Protection. .................................................................................................. 124
8.9. Wastewater Removal. ............................................................................................ 124
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 7
Figure 8.6. Electric-Driven Pump ............................................................................................ 125

8.10. Water Cooling. ....................................................................................................... 125
Figure 8.7. 400-Gallon ―Water Buffalo‖ Trailer With Chiller Attached .................................. 126
8.11. Ice Plants. ............................................................................................................... 126
Table 8.2. Basic Ice Machine Requirements ........................................................................... 127
Figure 8.8. Typical Ice Machines ............................................................................................. 127
8.12. Water Conservation. .............................................................................................. 127
8.13. Legacy and Future Water Systems. ....................................................................... 128
Chapter 9—WASTE UTILITY SYSTEMS 130

9.1. Introduction. ........................................................................................................... 130
9.2. Overview. ............................................................................................................... 130
9.3. Expedient Human Waste Disposal Methods. ......................................................... 130
Figure 9.1. Typical Expedient Straddle-Trench Latrine with Privacy Screens ........................ 131
Figure 9.2. Wastewater Disposal Trailer .................................................................................. 132
9.4. Expedient Wastewater Disposal Methods. ............................................................. 132
Table 9.1. Wastewater Volumes—Initial Beddown ............................................................... 133
Figure 9.3. Soakage Pit ............................................................................................................ 134
Figure 9.4. Soakage Trench ...................................................................................................... 134
Figure 9.5. Expedient Grease Traps ......................................................................................... 135
Figure 9.6. Construction of Wastewater Collection Pit Boxes ................................................. 136
Table 9.2. Bill of Materials for Wastewater Collection Boxes (1,000 Gallon) ....................... 136
Table 9.3. Bill of Materials for Wastewater Collection Boxes (2,000 Gallon) ....................... 137
9.5. BEAR Wastewater Disposal Methods. .................................................................. 137
Figure 9.7. BEAR 25,000-Gallon Wastewater Collection Tank .............................................. 138
Table 9.4. Wastewater Sources and Estimates ........................................................................ 138
Figure 9.8. Latrine Facility with Sewage Ejector System ........................................................ 139
Figure 9.9. Macerator Pump Lift Station ................................................................................. 139
Figure 9.10. Dual-Pump Lift Station .......................................................................................... 140
Figure 9.11. Total Wastewater Collection Layout (1100-Person Camp) ................................... 141
Figure 9.12. Partial Wastewater Collection Layout (1100-Person Camp) ................................. 142
Figure 9.13. Stabilization Lagoon .............................................................................................. 143
Figure 9.14. Stabilization Lagoon Requirements ....................................................................... 145
Figure 9.15. Stabilization Lagoon Construction Details ............................................................ 146
8 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table 9.5. Evaporation Lagoon Requirements ........................................................................ 146

Figure 9.16. Evaporation Lagoon Area Requirements ............................................................... 147
Table 9.6. Days Required to Fill Evaporation Lagoons .......................................................... 147
Figure 9.17. Evaporation Lagoon Construction Sequence ......................................................... 148
Figure 9.18. Kitchen Facility Grease Traps ............................................................................... 149
9.6. Solid Waste Disposal. ............................................................................................ 149
Figure 9.19. Incinerator Operations ........................................................................................... 150
Figure 9.20. Trench Method Construction of Sanitary Landfill ................................................. 151
Chapter 10—BEAR FACILITIES 152

10.1. Introduction. ........................................................................................................... 152
10.2. Overview. ............................................................................................................... 152
10.3. BEAR Shelters. ...................................................................................................... 152
Figure 10.1. Small Shelter System ............................................................................................. 153
Figure 10.2. Medium Shelter System ......................................................................................... 153
Figure 10.3. Dome Shelter ......................................................................................................... 154
Figure 10.4. ISO 2:1 Shelter ....................................................................................................... 155
Figure 10.5. Expandable Light Air Mobile Shelter .................................................................... 155
Figure 10.6. Large Area Maintenance Shelter ........................................................................... 156
Figure 10.7. RED HORSE Crew Assembling a K-Span Building ............................................. 156
10.4. Legacy Shelters. ..................................................................................................... 157
Figure 10.8. TEMPER Tent ....................................................................................................... 157
Figure 10.9. General Purpose Shelter ......................................................................................... 158
Figure 10.10. Expandable Shelter Container ................................................................................ 158
Figure 10.11. Aircraft Hangar ...................................................................................................... 159
Figure 10.12. Frame Supported Tension Fabric Shelter (FSTFS) ................................................ 160
10.5. Hygiene Facilities. ................................................................................................. 160
Figure 10.13. Shower/Shave Unit ................................................................................................ 160
Figure 10.14. Shave Facility Washstand ...................................................................................... 161
Figure 10.15. Field Deployable Latrine ....................................................................................... 161
10.6. Food Service Facilities. .......................................................................................... 162
10.7. Offloading Facilities at the Bare Base. .................................................................. 162
10.8. Allowance Standards (AS). .................................................................................... 163
10.9. Survivability Considerations. ................................................................................. 163
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 9
Chapter 11—BARE BASE ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT 164

11.1. Introduction. ........................................................................................................... 164
11.2. Overview. ............................................................................................................... 164
11.3. Fuels Mobility Support Equipment (FMSE). ......................................................... 164
Figure 11.1. R-14 Refueling System Readied for Shipment ...................................................... 165
Figure 11.2. Collapsible Fuel Bladders ...................................................................................... 165
Table 11.1. Collapsible Fuel Bladder Details ........................................................................... 166
11.4. Fuels Operational Readiness Capability Equipment (FORCE). ............................ 166
Figure 11.3. New FORCE Refueling System ............................................................................. 166
11.5. Laundry Facility. .................................................................................................... 166
Figure 11.4. Self-Help Laundry Major Components ................................................................. 168
11.6. BEAR 550 Kitchen. ............................................................................................... 168
Figure 11.5. BEAR 550 Kitchen (550-Personnel) ..................................................................... 169
Figure 11.6. BEAR 550 Kitchen (1100-Personnel) ................................................................... 170
11.7. Single Pallet Expeditionary Kitchen (SPEK). ........................................................ 170
Figure 11.7. Single-Pallet Expeditionary Kitchen (SPEK) ........................................................ 171
11.8. M-80 Water Heater. ............................................................................................... 171
Figure 11.8. M-80 Water Heater ................................................................................................ 171
11.9. WH-400 Water Heater. .......................................................................................... 171
Figure 11.9. WH-400 Water Heater ........................................................................................... 172
11.10. 130K Portable Heater. ............................................................................................ 172
Figure 11.10. 130K Portable Heater ............................................................................................. 172
11.11. Environmental Control Units (ECUs). ................................................................... 172
Figure 11.11. Field-Deployable Environmental Control Unit ...................................................... 173
Figure 11.12. A/E32C-39 Environmental Control Unit ............................................................... 174
11.12. Walk-In Refrigeration Units. ................................................................................. 174
Figure 11.13. Advanced Design Refrigerator, 300 Cubic Foot (ADR-300) ................................ 175
Figure 11.14. Inside a 150-Cubic-Foot Refrigeration Unit .......................................................... 175
Figure 11.15. Exterior of 1,200-Cubic Foot Refrigeration Unit ................................................... 176
Figure 11.16. Mechanical Refrigeration Unit on a 150-Cubic-Foot Refrigeration Box .............. 176
Chapter 12—MEDICAL FACILITIES 177

12.1. Introduction. ........................................................................................................... 177
Figure 12.1. Aerial View of Expeditionary Medical Treatment Facility ................................... 177
10 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
12.2. Overview. ............................................................................................................... 177

12.3. Concept of Operations and Deployment Sequence. ............................................... 177
Figure 12.2. Expeditionary Medical Support (EMEDS) SPEARR Facility ............................... 178
12.4. Civil Engineer Support of Medical Facilities. ....................................................... 179
12.5. Support Requirement by Type of EMEDS Facility. .............................................. 180
Figure 12.3. EMEDS Small Shelter System ............................................................................... 180
Table 12.1. EMEDS Airlift Impact ........................................................................................... 180
Table 12.2. Support Required for EMEDS/AFTH ................................................................... 182
12.6. Aeromedical Staging Facilities. ............................................................................. 183
Figure 12.4. Patients Prepared for Aeromedical Evacuation ..................................................... 184
12.7. External Support Requirements. ............................................................................ 184
Table 12.3. lists support required for ASFs. ............................................................................. 185
Table 12.3. Support Required for Aeromedical Staging Facilities ........................................... 185
12.8. Biological/Chemically Contaminated Casualties. .................................................. 186
Attachment 1—GLOSSARY OF REFERENCES AND SUPPORTING INFORMATION 187
Attachment 2—ELECTRICAL CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS IN SOUTHWEST ASIA

(SWA) 201
Attachment 3—EXISTING FACILITIES AND RESOURCES CHECKLIST 207
Attachment 4—CONVERSION FACTORS 227
Attachment 5—FOREIGN WEIGHTS AND MEASURES 229
Attachment 6—CIVIL ENGINEER CONTINGENCY PLANNING FACTORS 235
Attachment 7—CIVIL ENGINEER QUICK REFERENCE SHEETS 250

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 11
Chapter 1
INTRODUCTION TO BARE BASE PLANNING
1.1. Purpose. To support modern air, space and cyberspace operations and meet requirements
for rapid deployment, expeditionary airbase planners must understand and employ sound
planning principles. This volume was developed to provide deployment data and employment
information to engineer and logistic planners, field units and others involved in bare base
activities. A bare base is defined as a base having minimum essential facilities to house, sustain
and support operations to include (if required) a stabilized runway, taxiways, aircraft parking
areas, and have a source of water that can be made potable. Specifically, this volume provides a
comprehensive collection of information and illustrations related to construction, erection,
operations and maintenance of bare base facilities and equipment (Figure 1.1). The intent is to
provide deploying and deployed personnel, particularly planners, the ability to plan for multiple
austere locations and to procure beddown assets.
Figure 1.1. Bare Base Facilities and Equipment
1.2. Scope. The information in this volume supports implementation of Air Force Policy
Directive (AFPD) 10-2, Readiness, and contains tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTPs) for
use by civil engineers in supporting precepts outlined in Air Force Doctrine Document (AFDD)
4-0, Combat Support and AFDD 3-34, Engineer Operations. This relationship is illustrated in the
Air Force CE hierarchy of publications (Figure 1.2). Engineer planners and others may find the
information in this volume is most helpful when used as a starting point for planning a bare base
or supporting austere locations. While each location has its own special requirements and
features, there are commonalities that will not change despite the location. The base and facility
layouts, facility guide matrices, utility layouts and drawings in this volume can be used and
adapted to meet almost any site-specific location. This volume highlights key features and
considerations associated with Air Force bare base planning; provides a concept of employment
and a sequence for bare base construction; and serves as a road map that leads bare base planners
from the initial response phase to the material acquisition phase. It is a checklist to ensure each
crucial action that affects the base’s ability to function effectively is taken. This volume may not
present the final or specific solution to a given problem. It is not expected to anticipate or solve
all problems that might be encountered during beddowns. It simply addresses problems most
12 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
likely encountered and gives guidance so important aspects of the task will not be overlooked.
While this conceptual planning pamphlet was developed for use anywhere in the world, it deals
most heavily with the Southwest Asia (SWA) theater of operations. It primarily addresses bare
base locations that have little to no host nation support.
Figure 1.2. Air Force Civil Engineer Publications Hierarchy
1.3. Background. The shifting global geopolitical dynamics, closure of many main operating
bases (MOB) overseas and the reluctance of many nations to permit permanent military bases on
their soil have limited the basing options for United States (US) forces during contingency
operations. This situation has increased the importance of the bare base concept as a viable
solution to contingency basing shortfalls and requirements.
1.3.1. A bare base must be capable of supporting assigned aircraft and providing mission-
essential resources. These resources include logistical support and service to the
infrastructure composed of people, facilities, equipment and supplies. The bare base concept
requires mobile facilities, utilities and support equipment that can be rapidly deployed and
installed. Bare base equipment can transform undeveloped real estate into an operational air
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 13
base virtually overnight. Fortunately, these kinds of assets have undergone more than five
decades of intense research and development. The search for stronger, lighter-weight, and
more efficient facilities and equipment continues today as new technological advances are
being discovered. These advances will continually move the bare base concept into new areas
unimaginable today. To help guide future actions, it is important to know the history of the
bare base process.
1.3.2. Early requirements for mobile air bases arose with the advent of air warfare during
World War II. This mobility concept specified that ground forces advance in increments by
surface means. The advancing force had to conduct offensive operations while
simultaneously establishing new operating bases (Figure 1.3). The tactical air units moved
from one forward operating base to another in order to keep up with and provide air support
for the advancing troops. These units had two choices—build base facilities as protection
from contingency and environmental elements or erect substandard facilities such as tents
and perform maintenance out in the open. This cycle repeated itself whenever battle zones
changed. Similar challenges were experienced during the Korean Conflict in the 1950s.
Figure 1.3. Dozer Clearing an Airfield in World War II
1.3.3. It was not until the 1950s that military planners developed techniques to prepackage
base support equipment. This World War II equipment consisted mainly of tents and related
accessories, field kitchens, medical facilities, generators and other assorted equipment. It was
bulky, heavy and required excessive labor-hours to layout, assemble and erect. This initial
deployment kit was nicknamed Gray Eagle. In the mid-1960s, more equipment was added.
Some items were redesigned to make them more air transportable, and the name was changed
to Harvest Eagle. Harvest Eagle has been tested many times in worldwide deployments
including Southeast Asia.
1.3.4. A new mobility concept was developed in the late 1960s. Under this concept, all
facilities and equipment would be lightweight, modular and C-130 transportable. Some
shelters would be hardwall and serve as their own shipping containers. Some of the mobility
hardware would interface with weapons systems while other hardware would be developed to
take care of housing, messing, infrastructure support and civil engineer (CE) needs. This
14 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
concept would have everything needed to support a deployed force in the most austere
environment. To test this concept, EXERCISE CORONET BARE was launched in October
1969 to evaluate this new prototype equipment package. In November 1970, a full-scale
deployment exercise successfully tested the bare base mobility concept of being operational
within 72 hours. After successful validation, the program became known as Harvest Bare.
1.3.5. Another iteration of bare base facility history occurred in the early 1980s. To support
the AF portion of the Rapid Deployment Joint Task Force, the forerunner of US Central
Command, the services made a major equipment purchase. Instead of procuring duplicate
Harvest Bare packages, a mix of hard- and soft-walled facilities was obtained. This facility
mix was lighter to airlift and eliminated several facilities that had maintenance problems in
previous deployments. In addition to facility and utility systems, this new bare base package,
nicknamed Harvest Falcon, contained several other major components. Typical of these
components were vehicles, engineer equipment, unique tactical shelters, medical facilities
and equipment and mobile flightline maintenance equipment. These Harvest Falcon packages
provided support for several major multi-national exercises in the 1980s and during the Gulf
War in 1990-91.
1.3.6. Today, the bare base concept for expeditionary airbases is as important as ever. While
many foreign countries resist development of major fixed installations on their soil, they still
possess airfields that could be offered to US forces during contingencies. There are hundreds
of locations in the world that can support air operations, although many have limited and
inadequate infrastructure. The AF must have the capability to deploy to and operate from
available locations regardless of the current infrastructure. The majority of US bare base
assets are prepositioned overseas for SWA support. A small number of assets are available at
Holloman AFB, New Mexico for worldwide support.
1.3.7. The current Air Expeditionary Force (AEF) mobility concept is to deploy an
expeditionary force rapidly, complete with facilities and related equipment, capable of
independently supporting sustained combat operations (Figure 1.4). However, some support
operations may have to exist as austere, because receipt of some support infrastructure may
lag by a month or more. This is usually the case with support of joint forces, such as Army
and Marine units and special operations forces. Expedient facilities provide the means for
operating in initial austere locations. In 2002, deployments to Afghanistan reaffirmed the
versatility of the bare base concept when captured airfields were quickly transformed into
operational locations for use by multi-national forces.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 15
Figure 1.4. Prime Power Generators Support Sustained Operations
1.4. Planning Process. The ambitious expeditionary mobility concept presents problems and
challenges to planners, engineers and field units who have the ultimate responsibility of bare
base development. The challenge is twofold for planners, who must consider both AF
requirements and joint deployment requirements. The implications for joint planning and
integration are discussed in further detail in AFPAM 10-219 Volume 6, Planning and Design of
Expeditionary Airbases. In many cases, a bare base may support or host other US forces, allied
military units and host nation agencies. These co-occupants can present planners with many
challenges, since responsibilities and jurisdictional areas will have to be determined. Factors
such as facility usage, equipment allocation, utilities and labor must also be worked out to the
agreement of all parties. These challenges have an immediate effect on the mission; therefore
planners must address them early in the bare base development process. The challenges could
affect such features as airlift flow of bare base assets, construction sequence, projected use of
local materials and the allocation of mobile facilities.
1.4.1. Additional data should be gathered to supplement this conceptual planning pamphlet
since site-specific characteristics are important factors in the planning process. Existing
facilities, airfield configuration, topography, climate, soil conditions, concept of operations
and indigenous materials and available labor are some of the unknown characteristics that
must be considered. The numbered AEF that deploys either a wing or other support force has
primary responsibility for developing site-specific layouts. For potential bare base locations
named in operational plans (OPLANs), advance echelon (ADVON) teams are responsible for
site-specific planning. ADVONs are deployed ahead of the larger deploying force and may
be included in the time-phased force deployment list (TPFDL). For short-notice deployments
that have not been preplanned except in a concept plan (CONPLAN), the first unit on the
scene is usually responsible for site-specific planning. The CONPLAN is an operation plan in
an abbreviated format that requires considerable expansion or alteration to convert it into an
OPLAN. Planners may have to gather additional site-specific data from intelligence sources
16 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
or first-hand observation prior to laying out their plans. This is important since a well-
planned and executed deployment hinges on the planner’s ability to produce a comprehensive
site layout, complete to the last detail.
1.4.2. One of the first pieces of information that must be gathered is the threat analysis for
the bare base location. This information is normally available through the wing intelligence
office. Planners must know whether the base is in a high-, medium-, or low-threat area. The
reasons are threefold: (1) Aircraft must be able to survive while on the ground. (2) Aircraft
must be able to get airborne to perform their mission during or after an attack. (3) Logistics
infrastructure must survive to sustain air operations. The threat analysis will determine
whether individual facilities and facility groups will be positioned in a dispersed or non-
dispersed layout. It will also determine whether electrical and water plants will be dispersed
or centrally located and whether revetments and airfield damage repair (ADR) sets will be
required. In some of the forward and higher threat areas, it may be necessary to plan for
camouflage, hardening, or even decontamination capabilities.
1.4.3. Topography and weather data should reveal prevailing wind direction and expected
velocity, temperature ranges and humidity, annual rainfall, natural slope of the terrain, soil
characteristics and latitude and longitude of the bare base site. This data is required to
properly site the sewage lagoon downwind, determine heating and air conditioning
requirements, restrict construction in natural water drainage areas during flash flooding,
determine absorption rates of the soil and locate facilities in a way that minimizes shadows
that can be detected through aerial reconnaissance.
1.4.4. It is important to know about the existing facilities and utilities in the preliminary
planning stage. Consequently, any layouts, drawings, aerial photographs, etc., are vitally
needed. Equally important are the lengths and widths of the existing runway(s), taxiways,
ramps and aprons. Does runway lighting exist? If so, is it operational and adequate? Is there a
requirement for an aircraft arresting system? What kinds of water sources are available? Is
the water fresh, brackish, or salt water? Does it come from a well, river, or the ocean? What
is its water temperature and how far away is the source? Is the area flood-prone or in a low-
lying area subject to flooding or high water during heavy rains? There are many more
questions and the more answers we get, the better prepared we are to meet mission
objectives.
1.4.5. Having accumulated as much site data as possible, begin mapping out the specific
details on the base plans. Following guidance in this volume, planners must develop each of
the different elements, keeping in mind that this volume generally discusses the ―worst case‖
scenario. For example, a five-day water supply is required for the base populace. This water
may be pumped from a non-potable source several miles away, purified with reverse osmosis
units and stored in collapsible bladders. If, however, the planner discovers on-site purified
water in sufficient quantities, the requirement for water production equipment decreases
significantly.
1.4.6. Priorities cannot be overemphasized during bare base development. The allocation of
engineering resources must be balanced between mission essential and force beddown
taskings. Thus, commanders of various organizations at all echelons must understand the
importance of establishing clear mission priorities. Increased engineer requirements,
especially during the base erection phase, could spread engineer resources too sparsely. For
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 17
example, this volume recommends that base organizations erect their own shelters with
minimum technical guidance from engineer personnel (Figure 1.5). If this practice is
circumvented by tasking engineers to erect shelters for everyone, it may cause significant
delay in accomplishing other critical tasks and be detrimental to overall mission
accomplishment. Another consideration is quality-of-life taskings that always seem to
surface during deployments. Typical Gulf War examples include repairing swimming pools
and building recreational facilities and gazebos. These conveniences are obviously not too
much to provide people who are risking their lives. However, quality of life tasks alone could
have a drastic effect on civil engineers’ ability to work on mission-essential tasks.
Figure 1.5. Medical Personnel Erect Shelters for Medical Support Operations
1.4.7. This publication highlights a variety of planning factors for particular topics. These
factors are included to show the requirements that must be considered for a location that
transitions from an austere combat contingency location to a short term bare base and then to
a more permanent, long-duration bare base. Bare base equipment packages are frequently
reconfigured to remove antiquated and unserviceable equipment and replace it with new
equipment as technology advances. Successful bare base planning and development must
remain flexible to inevitable changes.
1.4.8. Successfully erecting a bare base within a predetermined time schedule depends on
many factors controlled outside of engineer channels:
1.4.8.1. Mobility assets must arrive in proper quantities and sequence. This is great for
planning, but planners understand that most mobility assets DO NOT arrive in the proper
quantities and sequence. No matter how good the plan or how far in advance notice is
given, it just does not happen. Remain flexible and react to the situation as it develops.
1.4.8.2. Motorized support equipment, such as forklifts and trucks, must be available in
the required quantities. Be prepared to share equipment and take care of it.
1.4.8.3. Craftsmen should be trained to erect, operate and maintain as much of the bare
base equipment as possible. Since craftsmen do not typically work with these assets at
18 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
home station, progress will likely be slow at first. However, as personnel become more
familiar with the equipment their proficiency should increase quite rapidly.
1.4.9. Plan for success. Leadership, high-technology weapons, quality troops, sound
planning and a long lead-time have contributed to US and coalition forces’ successes during
past contingency operations. Planners should review the assessments, after action reports and
lessons learned from previous deployments to plan for the next one. Other factors to consider
when planning engineer operations include: type of construction material available in theater,
the construction standards required and availability of host nation resources and
multinational forces.
1.4.10. Resource Planning Options. Several force multipliers are available to augment civil
engineer, force protection and logistics capabilities during worldwide contingency
operations. These contract tools and reach-back capabilities can provide significant relief to
commanders, particularly over extended periods.
1.4.10.1. Air Force Contract Augmentation Program (AFCAP). Although principally
intended to support contingencies and humanitarian efforts, AFCAP resources may also
be used, to a limited extent, during major combat operations. This cost-plus, award fee
contract offers virtually all capabilities within AF CE, Force Protection and Logistics
functional areas (Figure 1.6). AFCAP has standing agreements with a number of
contractors and vendors to provide specific support and consequently can provide skilled
labor, extensive quantities of equipment and materials under short lead times. AFCAP
support generally includes:
1.4.10.1.1. Base recovery after natural disasters, accidents and terrorist attacks.
1.4.10.1.2. Sustainment operations for all noncombatant operations to include
construction.
1.4.10.1.3. Asset reconstitution at user-level during contingency operations.
1.4.10.1.4. All types of restoration, except those involving major environmental
damage.
1.4.10.1.5. Backfills vacancies for home base forces at equal or greater skill levels
during deployments.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 19
Figure 1.6. Contract Augmentation and Support
1.4.10.2. AFCESA Reach-back Center. Another very valuable force multiplier for
expeditionary and day-to-day operations is the civil engineer Reach-back Center at HQ
AFCESA at Tyndall AFB FL. Since April 2005, the RBC has answered over 25,000
inquiries on contingency, expeditionary and base-level operations. It provides methods,
templates, checklists, criteria, lessons learned and assistance on the agency’s subject
matter expertise. The RBC can be contacted via phone at 888-AFCESA1, stateside DSN
at 523-6995, or international DSN at 312-523-6995. E-mails can be sent to
[email protected], or through AFCESA's website at
http://www.afcesa.af.mil.
1.4.10.3. Other Service Resources. The US Army and US Navy have established contract
augmentation programs similar to AFCAP.
1.4.10.3.1. The Army uses the Logistics Civil Augmentation Program (LOGCAP) to
augment its forces during wartime. LOGCAP provides for preplanned used of global
corporate resources to free up soldiers to perform combat arms missions. With proper
preplanning, coordination and training, it can support other services, federal agencies
and coalition partners. LOGCAP has been used in Iraq, Somalia, Bosnia, Haiti and
East Timor. Army Material Command Pamphlet 700-30, LOGCAP, outlines
procedures for commanders to follow when requesting and implementing these
services.
1.4.10.3.2. The Navy uses the Global Contingency Construction Contract and the
Global Contingency Service Contract to allow contract augmentation to quickly
respond and provide supervision, equipment, materials and labor in response to
natural disasters, humanitarian assistance needs and worldwide conflict. These
programs, and predecessor programs, have been used in operations as diverse as
Djibouti (Africa), Iraq, Guantanamo Bay, California (wildfire response) and New
Orleans (post Hurricane Katrina). For additional information on these resources,
20 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
contact the lead commands: Naval Facilities Engineering Command (NAVFAC)

Atlantic for construction and NAVFAC Pacific for services.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 21
Chapter 2
BARE BASE PLANNING GUIDELINES
2.1. Introduction. Just like a construction project, the bare base planning process requires a
foundation upon which to build the plan. In this case, the foundation consists of key assumptions
and planning guidelines. An assumption is a statement accepted as true without proof or
demonstration. Bare base assumptions are made in order to provide a common point of
discussion. Detailed planning might, in some situations, prove some of these assumptions wrong.
A planning guideline, on the other hand, is a combination of JCS planning factors, Air Staff
guidance, results of expeditionary site planning studies and technical information obtained from
publications and field experience (Figure 2.1). For the most part, the planning guidelines
presented in this chapter assist planners in determining the type and amount of resources
necessary to establish a bare base. Refer to AFI 10-401, Air Force Operations Planning and
Execution, for additional planning guidance.
Figure 2.1. Elements of Bare Base Planning
2.2. Assumptions. The following basic assumptions provide a common departure point for
conducting planning. The items are generally considered valid for a bare base situation.
2.2.1. Runway and taxiways are adequate to support or be repairable to support minimum
weapon system operations.
2.2.2. Minimum (aircraft) on Ground (MOG) 2 - 24 hr Ops (C-17).
2.2.3. Water source that can be made potable.
2.2.4. Jet fuel and ground fuel are available from host nation with limited storage at location.
22 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
2.2.5. General purpose vehicles are available from host nation.

2.2.6. Limited Class IV construction materials are available on local economy.
2.2.7. Munitions storage and build up infrastructure is limited.
2.2.8. Approximate Population Flow:
2.2.8.1. 24 hrs: 150
2.2.8.2. 48 hrs: 550
2.2.8.3. C + 14: 2000
2.2.8.4. C + 30: 3000
2.2.9. Threat level is semi-permissive or uncertain, (i.e. Ground: special ops, sabotage,
limited stand-off capability; localized CBRN attack possibility). See AFDD 3-10, Force
Protection, for definitions of specific threat levels.
2.2.10. Environmental: high desert, mountainous, climate.
2.2.11. Medical Assessment: no unusual endemic diseases, standard immunizations required,
no hazardous flora and fauna.
2.2.12. Host nation will authorize landing and overflight rights.
2.2.13. Host nation has bandwidth spectrum available.
2.2.14. Engineers are organized, trained, and equipped to erect and install mobile assets.
2.2.15. Contractor/HN support used when organic capability not available or used.
2.2.16. WRM/Prepositioned assets stored and maintained at storage and reconstitution sites.
2.2.17. Individual organizations erect their own tents and shelters with limited technical
guidance from CE personnel. RED HORSE or personnel from the 49th Materiel Maintenance
Group (49 MMG) will erect technically complex facilities, such as Aircraft Hangars (ACH),
Dome Shelters, and Large Area Maintenance Shelters (LAMS).
2.3. Bare Base Force Module Planning. Global engagement has transformed the way the AF
views combat support and the requirements to ensure that decisive combat power is readily
available. Key features of the subsequent AF doctrine are agile combat support (ACS) and Air
and Space Expeditionary Task Force (AETF) ―force modules.‖ ACS presents capabilities in a
building block or modular/scalable approach, which prepares assets for quick response and
allows positioning of forces within the required response time. Assets flow incrementally, and
force beddown is effectively established. The AF developed a force module concept that tailors
force packages to specific expeditionary tasks and allows systematic presentation of capabilities
to rapidly open an airfield, generate a certain level of sorties, establish operational capability and
sustain air, space and cyberspace operations.
2.3.1. A force module is a planning and execution tool that provides a means of logically
grouping records, which facilitate planning, analysis and monitoring. Force modules consists
of a ―grouping of combat, combat support and combat service support forces, with their
accompanying supplies and required non-unit resupply and personnel necessary to sustain
forces for a minimum of 30 days.‖ (Joint Pub 1-02). AETF force modules integrate combat
unit type codes (UTC) with combat support UTCs to sustain a base population of
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 23
approximately 3,000 personnel for at least 30 days. The six force modules (Figure 2.2) are
not executed sequentially but rather overlap into a tiered effect that supports combat
operations. The following paragraphs provide a brief description of each module. For in-
depth information on AETF force modules, including the basic assumption made in
developing each module, see AFI 10-401, Air Force Operations Planning and Execution.
Figure 2.2. AETF Force Module Construct
2.3.1.1. Open the Airbase. This module provides the capabilities to open an airbase and
rapidly establish an initial operating capability (IOC), regardless of the mission, in
approximately 24 hours after arrival of its forces. This module will likely deploy before
operations commence (C-Day), and will: protect the forces, plan the reception and
beddown follow-on forces, establish communications, prepare the airfield for initial flight
operations and address host nation issues. The module normally includes one CE officer
and one engineering craftsman who are primarily tasked with assessing the airfield’s
immediate capability to support mobility airlift operations. RED HORSE and Prime
BEEF UTCs may be tasked to augment the Open the Airbase module to expedite use of
the airfield.
2.3.1.2. Command and Control. This module establishes an air expeditionary wing or
group command and control (C2) structure to assume responsibility from the Open the
Airbase module. The C2 module includes initial maintenance group, operations group,
medical group and mission support group leadership and staffs. Secure communications
and intelligence are key capabilities in this module. A field grade CE officer and an
engineering craftsman, both from the Prime BEEF UTC tasked in the Establish the
Airbase module, deploy with the C2 module to provide initial beddown planning and
coordinate with engineers in the Open the Airbase module.
2.3.1.3. Establish the Airbase. This module provides initial base expeditionary combat
support capability to expand base infrastructure, establish round-the-clock operations and
enhance force protection and communications. The module includes the majority of
deploying civil engineers and other expeditionary combat support forces, including
24 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
airfield operations, logistics plans, weather, chaplain and additional medical, security
forces, force protection, supply and transportation elements. Housekeeping (e.g. billeting,
food service, hygiene, environmental control units [ECU], etc), industrial operations and
flightline assets are deployed with this module, along with personnel from the 49 MMG
to assist with erection of technically complex mobile assets.
2.3.1.4. Generate the Mission. This module provides the primary weapon systems and
systems operators and maintainers required to operate the weapon system and its
subsystems. Module elements include maintenance supervision, munitions, intelligence,
weather, operations support, flying squadrons and life support.
2.3.1.5. Operate the Airbase. This force module contains the mission support forces
needed to achieve full operating capability and sustain those forces for up to 30 days. The
module increases force protection, communications, cargo handling and materiel
management and distribution. It also develops robust quality of life activities such as
chaplain, fitness, library, health care, feeding and sheltering and reach-back capabilities
(US mail and military pay).
2.3.1.6. Robust the Airbase. This force module provides additional expeditionary combat
support to strengthen the capabilities already put in place by the previous force modules.
The forces in this module will typically not arrive until 30 days after an operating
location is established.
2.4. Bare Base Asset Deployment Planning Guidelines. Just as the base population is phased
into a bare base, the facility and utility assets required to support the population and aircraft are
also predetermined and incrementally flowed. Without this preplanning and asset sequencing,
engineers would have plane loads of equipment sitting on the ramp waiting to be sorted before
any meaningful beddown or support to combat sorties could be initiated. To meet this challenge,
engineers and logisticians use asset management systems like Basic Expeditionary Airfield
Resources (BEAR) and BEAR Order of Battle (BOB) to manage these critical resources. Assets
in both systems are key enablers for AETFs to open the air base, generate the mission, and
operate the air base. Currently, BEAR equipment sets are being transformed into smaller BOB
packages, therefore BOB will be the main focus of this section.
2.4.1. Basic Expeditionary Airfield Resources (BEAR) Order of Battle (BOB). Similar to the
reconfiguration of ―Harvest‖ sets to lighter, leaner BEAR equipment sets, BOB is an
example of the Air Force’s effort to continue implementing a flexible and responsive system
for deploying BEAR assets. Under BOB, previously addressed BEAR 550-person sets are
being reduced to smaller sizes (e.g. 250-person increments) to increase flexibility and
efficiency and be postured for delivery by multi-modal shipping methods—a mix of air and
surface delivery. It is also likely that units will deploy with equipment and spares in
quantities of less than 30 days (e.g. a 10-day supply). In the same manner as BEAR, BOB
supports the Agile Combat Support CONOPS goals of making the AF lighter, leaner and
more responsive in planning and execution. Historically, beddown locations received
equipment in entire ―sets‖ even though each location had different needs. With order of battle
priority sequencing, planners have a menu of capabilities to choose from because most or all
BOB UTCs will be ―playbook‖ options. The intent is to synchronize posturing of BEAR
assets and give deployed commanders only what they need, exactly when they need it. BOB
will provide a basic capability, but most assets and capabilities will be optional and mission
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 25
specific. The policies that establish these processes are fully outlined in various publications,
including AFI 10-401 and AFI 10-404. Figure 2.3 visually highlights the transition from
BEAR to BOB asset management and the focus on flexibility and effect for the warfighter.
The paragraphs that immediately follow also describe some of the elements of this transition.
Note: the abbreviation ―MTW‖ in the figure refers to major theater war but can also apply to
most major operations.
Figure 2.3. Transition from BEAR to BOB Asset Management
2.4.1.1. Capability-Based Planning and Force Presentation. AF planners recognized

inefficiencies in the architecture that presents forces on plan-based or theater-based
requirements. When forces and assets are presented based on large modules, it usually
creates the need for trimming or tailoring personnel and materiel to meet the actual need
on the ground. To avoid this inevitable extra step, planners have transformed to a
planning and execution process that allows delivery of a capability and an ―effect‖ to
combatant commanders. Presentation of capabilities in this manner helps reduce the
overall engineer and logistics footprint compared to previous legacy and BEAR sets.
Commanders can now employ only those capabilities required to meet the mission.
2.4.1.2. Dynamic Positioning Strategy. This capability involves planning that expedites
placement and movement of assets to meet combatant commander requirements. Inherent
in this strategy is the ability to gain/retain access to bases and infrastructure and move
assets overtly and covertly. BEAR assets can be strategically and globally positioned to
support not only AF requirements but international, joint service and coalition efforts.
2.4.1.3. Multi-Modal Configuration. One of the major challenges for legacy assets is the
heavy dependence on limited airlift resources. With BOB, planners have a multi-modal
and flexible transportation configuration and assets are efficiently packaged, transported
and delivered by a range of air, land and sea options. With the exception of the BEAR
150, which because of the need for its rapid deployment has an exclusive airlift
configuration, all other BOB UTCs can be configured for air or surface delivery.
Currently about 30% of BEAR assets are configured for transportation by air and
26 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
approximately 70% are planned to deploy via surface. Table 2.1 lists the major BOB
UTCs as currently configured. Note: surface includes commercial rail, ground and sealift.
Table 2.1. BOB Multi-Modal Configurations

Air Surface
Configured ASSET Configured
UTC UTC
Combat Air Forces (CAF) Initial (8 Medium/8 Small
XFA14 XFS14
Shelters)
XFA16 Low Voltage Industrial (2 Ea. 60kW MEP-806's) XFS16
XFA17 Water Distribution Initial XFS17
XFA18 Water Distribution Follow-On XFS18
XFA19 Engineering Management (2 Small Shelters) XFS19
XFA21 Power Pro/CE Sup/Elect (3 Small Shelters) XFS21
XFA23 TF-2 Lightcart (2 TF-2's) XFS23
Mobility Air Forces (MAF) Initial (6 Medium/8 Small
XFA3C XFS3C
Shelters)
XFAAB 4K Dome (1 Shelter) XFSAB
Field-Deployable Environmental Control Unit (FDECU),
XFAAC XFSAC
12 Ea.
XFAAD 8K Dome (1 Shelter) XFSAD
XFAAM AM2 Matting (6 Bundles) XFSAM
XFABL Billeting (12 Small Shelters) XFSBL
XFAC6 CAF Add-On (2 Medium/1 Small Shelter) XFSC6
XFACB CAF Follow-On (4 Small Shelters) XFSCB
XFACC Tactical Exchange (1 Small Shelter) XFSCC
XFACD Entomology (No Facility) XFSCD
XFACF Fire Ops/Crash Rescue (4 Small Shelters) XFSCF
Advanced Design Refrigerator, 300 CF (ADR-300), 1
XFACH XFSCH
Ea.
XFACJ Large Area Maintenance Shelter (LAMS) 1 Ea. XFSCJ
XFACL Barrier Facility (1 Medium Shelter) XFSCL
XFACW Cold Weather (12 Heaters) XFSCW
XFACX CE Maintenance (1 Small Shelter) XFSCX
XFAEC CE Industrial (1 Small Shelter) XFSEC
XFAEG Power Distribution (2 Cable Reel Pallet Assembly) XFSEG
XFAGC Chaplain (1 Small Shelter) XFSGC
XFAHL High Line Dock (1 HLD) XFSHL
XFAKC Kitchen XFSKC
XFALC Shower/Shave/Latrine (2 Small Shelters) XFSLC
XFALS Self Help Laundry XFSLS
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 27
Water Production, 1500-GPH Reverse Osmosis Water

XFAMP XFSMP
Purification Unit (ROWPU), 2 Ea.
XFAMS Water Source Run XFSMS
XFAMU Munitions (1 Medium/1 Small Shelter) XFSMU
XFAMX Water Extension XFSMX
XFANC Camouflage Netting, 200 Ea. XFSNC
XFAND Water Production, 600-GPH ROWPU, 3 Ea. XFSND
High Volt Power (2 MEP-12's; 2 10K Fuel Bladders; 1
XFAPH Primary Switching Center (PSC); 1 Operating Remote XFSPH
Terminal (ORT)
XFAPL Low Voltage Housekeeping (5 MEP-806's; 3 MEP-805's) XFSPL
XFAPS Postal (1 Medium Shelter; 1 FDECU) XFSPs
XFAR4 Mobile Aircraft Arresting System (MAAS), 1 Ea. XFSR4
XFARB Packing/Crating (No Facility) XFSRB
XFASC Combat Supply (4 Small Shelter) XFSSC
XFASD Secondary Distribution Center (SDC's), 2 Ea. XFSSD
XFATF Single-Pallet Expeditionary Kitchen (SPEK) Messing XFSTF
XFAVC Vehicle Maintenance/Operations (1 Small Shelter) XFSVC
XFAWC Admin (4 Small Shelters) XFSWC
XFAWR Concertina Wire (480 Rolls) XFSWR
XFAXN Mortuary (1 Small Shelter) XFSXN
XFAYC Expeditionary Airfield Lighting System (EALS), 1 Ea. XFSYC
XFAZC Remote Area Lighting System (RALS), 2 Ea. XFSZC
XFB1A Swift BEAR
Note: Water freeze protection UTCs are still under development.
2.4.1.4. Modular/Scalable UTCs. UTCs that do not require tailoring is an important order
of battle feature. BOB builds the smallest viable structure of personnel and equipment to
provide a baseline level of capability for all deployment locations. The baseline can then
be incrementally increased to meet location/mission specific requirements. The goal is to
define right-sized UTCs that can operate across a wide range of operations, locations and
environments and rapidly link to other UTCs in a building block manner when necessary.
This is key to a flexible expeditionary capability and the cornerstone of BOB. Figure 2.4
through Figure 2.6 provide visual representation of how BOB is flexible and scalable to
meet the specific situation and location. Shaded portions of the tables indicate capability
not yet needed for that particular operation. Figure 2.7 further demonstrates the BOB
capability. An obvious contrast is that while BEAR sets were based on increments of 550
personnel, BOB assets are scaled to 250 personnel or down to the desired capability. And
while legacy systems have very large UTCs with heavy airlift requirements, BOB has
smaller, modular UTCs with flexible transportation modes.
28 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 2.4. Modular/Scalable UTC to Pax Flow Matrix (expanded capability)
Figure 2.5. BOB Scaled to Support 50-Person Humanitarian Relief Operation

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 29
Figure 2.6. BOB with Partial Host Base Support
Figure 2.7. Comparison of BEAR and BOB Asset Management
2.5. Complementary Systems and Equipment. Although BEAR contain many facilities and
utility support systems, a bare base cannot operate in a mission-responsive posture using only
BEAR assets. Several complementary programs exist which engineers must be aware of since
30 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
some of these programs will require engineer support or directly assist engineer forces in
accomplishing bare base taskings. Typically these other systems and equipment include:
2.5.1. Mobile Flightline Maintenance Equipment. For the most part, this equipment
represents the powered and non-powered AGE used for aircraft maintenance purposes.
2.5.2. User Unique Tactical Shelters. Many other types of tactical shelters not directly
associated with BEAR provide unique facility support for bare base users. The majority of
these are aircraft-related maintenance shops dedicated to specific types of aircraft.
2.5.3. Vehicles. Vehicle packages, which provide a bare base with general and special
purpose transportation equipment, are major support items.
2.5.4. Mobile Hospital/Clinics and Equipment. Expeditionary medical support facilities and
related systems discussed in more detail in Chapter 12, fall in this category.
2.5.5. Communications Equipment. This grouping of facilities includes base communication
networks and navigational aids (NAVAIDS) packages.
2.5.6. CE Construction Equipment. Typical of this category is airfield damage repair (ADR)
additives to the base vehicle fleet.
2.5.7. Fuels Mobility Support Equipment (FMSE) and Fuels Operational Readiness
Capability Equipment (FORCE). These include fuel bladders, air transportable hydrant
refueling systems, pumps, filters and other equipment needed to store and distribute ground
and aviation fuels in an expeditionary environment.
2.5.8. Unique Equipment from Other Functional Areas. This includes a myriad of equipment
items that individually may not be major, but in total, represent a considerable weight and
cube requirement for airlift movement.
2.5.9. In pursuit of lighter, leaner capability, the AF will continue to test and develop other
rapidly deployable systems and components. The requirement to be prepared to respond to
unpredictable situations and small-scale contingencies fuel much of this effort. However,
lessons learned, individual initiative, suggestions and innovation are also factors. Air Force
Special Operations Command (AFSOC), for instance, adopted the Air Rapid Response Kit
(AARK) to meet the unique needs of special operations forces. This system uses a hybrid of
lightweight military and commercial-off-the-shelf (COTS) components to provide various
levels of basic shelter and hygiene for 10 to 100 persons for a limited period of time.
2.6. Engineer Planning Guidelines. The following guidelines reflect planning criteria for
various major BEAR facility and utility requirement areas.
2.6.1. Airfield.
2.6.1.1. If pre-existing aircraft arresting systems are operational and adequate in number,
they will require operational checks and maintenance. When inoperative, or where none
exist, a mobile aircraft arresting system (MAAS) must be installed (Figure 2.8). Note:
AF personnel can only perform checks and maintenance on US-owned aircraft arresting
systems. They cannot certify systems constructed by other countries.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 31
Figure 2.8. Servicing the Mobile Aircraft Arresting System
2.6.1.2. As a minimum, runway edge and approach lights are required. Distance-to-go
and aircraft arresting system marker lights are required on runways supporting jet aircraft
operations. The lights are also recommended for runways supporting propeller-type
aircraft operations.
2.6.1.3. NAVAIDS are required. Communications and CE personnel will accomplish
installation jointly.
2.6.1.4. An aircraft parking plan is required.
2.6.1.5. Aircraft revetments, when required, will be constructed 16 feet high on ramps,
aprons, matting, or hardstands.
2.6.1.6. If additive aircraft parking surfaces are required to support surge, dispersal, or
overcrowding conditions, stabilized areas will be required. If available, AM-2 matting
should be the primary material considered. If using AM-2 matting, ensure the required
technical expertise is available to install and evaluate AM-2 matting to withstand the
rigors of aircraft movements. The U.S. Navy and Marine Corps has extensive experience
in AM-2 matting installation. If needed, consider consulting with their experts at the
Naval Air Systems Command (NAVAIR), Lakehurst, New Jersey for advice and
assistance.
2.6.2. Site Preparation and Layout.
2.6.2.1. The site should have relatively flat terrain with minimal grading, brush, or tree
removal required.
2.6.2.2. Blasting or large rock removal should not be required.
2.6.2.3. Major soil stabilization work should not be required.
2.6.2.4. The site will require expedient soil testing and surveying to establish base lines,
major functional areas and specific areas using field expedient survey methods, when
possible.
32 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
2.6.2.5. Petroleum, Oil and Lubricants (POL) site preparation consists of siting, grading,
berming and furnishing and installing a 3-inch dike drain pipe and gate valve. All fuel
bladders, regardless of size and content, will be bermed; all fuel bladder dikes will be
fitted with a protective liner to prevent environmental damage and contamination (Figure
2.9). Bladders, headers, adapters, fill stands and associated attachments will be furnished
and installed by base supply fuels operations personnel.
Figure 2.9. Fuel Berm with Protective Liner Installed
2.6.2.6. The munitions storage site preparation consists of siting, grading, berming and
sandbagging. Construction of storage bunkers should begin as soon as possible after other
more essential tasks are completed. In the interim period, munitions should be stored in
temporary bermed, sandbagged areas if sandbags are available. Also, plan on providing a
grounding system for the munitions area consisting of ground rods and a connecting grid
system.
2.6.2.7. Medical unit site preparation consists of siting and grading approximately 0.9
acre for the 25-bed facility, 1.15 acres for the 50-bed Air Force Theater Hospital (AFTH)
and 2.5 acres for the 114-bed AFTH. Medical units should be sited in lower threat areas
of the base but as near as practical to force support facilities such as billeting, showers
and laundry.
2.6.3. Facilities Siting and Construction.
2.6.3.1. Use existing structures and facilities as much as possible, consistent with
operational economy and functional requirements.
2.6.3.2. Use locally-available construction materials and use temporary construction
methods unless more permanent structures are required due to operational demands or
cost factors.
2.6.3.3. Civil engineers are responsible for siting and locating all facility groups and for
siting, locating and erecting all utility plants and systems.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 33
2.6.3.4. Consider base defense requirements up front. Base layout should comply with
theater-specific requirements and minimum antiterrorism standards (including hardening,
standoff and separation distances) prescribed in UFC 4-010-01, DOD Minimum
Antiterrorism Standards for Building, Appendix D, and UFC 4-020-01, DOD Security
Engineering Facilities Planning Manual.
2.6.3.5. Comply with Quantity-Distance criteria for inhabited building according to
AFMAN 91-201, Explosives Safety Standards.
2.6.3.6. Facility separation distances may be minimized to improve functional
relationships and save on utility system costs, as long as minimum standoff, facility
separation, and quantity-distance criteria is met.
2.6.3.7. Civil engineers erect their own facilities and furnish a minimum cadre of
personnel to provide technical assistance to other base functions erecting their own
facilities (Figure 2.10).
2.6.3.8. The contingency troop housing planning factor of 50 SF per person can be used
for the bare base. Soft-walled shelters can be used for personnel billeting. Refer to AFI
34-246, Air Force Lodging, for additional planning factors during emergency/wartime
conditions.
Figure 2.10. Civil Engineers Erect Medium Shelter System
2.6.4. Electrical Power.

2.6.4.1. Electrical power requirements should be based on 4.5 kilowatts (kW) per tent for
the cantonment area. When an industrial capability is added, the planning factor may
increase. These requirements should be used at contingency locations and during the
initial bare base development stage. However, for longer term bare base locations,
anticipate an increase in electrical power production to support quality of life
requirements.
34 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
2.6.4.2. Even though centrally located high-voltage generators offer the most
advantageous primary distribution system, they should be dispersed in a high-threat area
between prime and slave power plant locations to improve survivability. Multiple power
plants and primary distribution loops that interconnect these plants are especially critical
in high-threat locations. If a power plant becomes inoperative for any reason, the
electrical grid can be energized from the remaining power plant(s).
2.6.4.3. MEP generators (30-kW and 60-kW) can be dispersed throughout the base to
satisfy initial power requirements for priority facilities until the base electrical
distribution system (750-kW units) becomes fully operational. At that time, the MEP
generators will become a backup source of mission-essential power for critical bare base
functions.
2.6.4.4. RALS should be installed around POL, liquid oxygen (LOX), flightlines,
medical units and munitions storage. Primary and secondary distribution systems should
be extended to these areas to provide power for RALSs.
2.6.4.5. Since the total connected load will not be operating continuously, a
diversification factor of seven-tenths (0.7) should be applied to all loads except air
conditioning or unique loads which require full demand at all times.
2.6.5. Water.
2.6.5.1. Water treatment plants must be installed at base sites where water is nonpotable.
A ROWPU is required for water desalinization, removal of suspended solids from fresh
water and chlorination control of bacteria. Water use planning factors are in Chapter 8 of
this volume.
2.6.5.2. If available, one chilled fountain can be provided for approximately every 65
people. Due to the limited number available, chillers should be allocated to areas with the
greater population densities such as the flightline, base operations, cantonment area and
similar functional groups. Additionally, three chilled water fountains are required for
each AFTH (one in each ward and one in outpatient area). These requirements are based
on a chilled water fountain that produces 15 gph of 60-degree water when the input water
temperature is 120 degrees Fahrenheit. Chilled water fountains should be strategically
located in shower/latrine and functional areas where water is already available. Water
lines should not normally be run to functional areas for the sole purpose of providing
drinking water. Chilled water fountains must be of the type with a downward water flow,
allowing containers to be filled without excessive waste.
2.6.5.3. In SWA, temperatures range from a daytime high of 130 degrees Fahrenheit to a
nighttime low of 30 degrees Fahrenheit. Where possible, pipes should be buried to a
depth of 18 inches or more to provide mechanical protection to the system and to prevent
heat gain from high ambient temperatures.
2.6.5.4. Demineralized water may be required for some medical operations. Verify this
requirement by location to determine the total amount of storage needed. When the
requirement for demineralized water exists but exact quantities are unknown, allow one
20,000-gallon bladder for this purpose.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 35
2.6.5.5. Where total dissolved solids content of water used for showers and laundry
exceeds 500 ppm, soaps and detergents designed for ―salt water use‖ should be used.
2.6.6. Waste Disposal.
2.6.6.1. Approximately 70 percent of all potable water will likely become wastewater
that enters the sewer system for treatment at wastewater lagoons. The remaining 30
percent of potable water will be lost through leaks, perspiration, evaporation and food
preparation.
2.6.6.2. When modular latrine units (field deployable latrine system) are used, the
sanitary system treatment facilities should be sized to accept all human waste. When the
field deployable latrine is used without piped sewage disposal, latrine holding tanks must
be emptied periodically and the human waste transported to wastewater lagoons. Typical
housing layouts contain a minimum of four deployable latrines; each latrine set has
twelve toilets and two urinal troughs.
2.6.6.3. Depending on the salinity of the raw water source, for every gallon of potable
water produced, up to two gallons of brine water can be produced. Provisions for the
disposal of brine water must be made (e.g. dust control). Where feasible, brine water can
be returned to the source. The lagoons discussed later in this pamphlet have not been
sized to accept brine water since the salt content of the brine water would upset the
biological treatment and evaporation processes.
2.6.6.4. Biodegradable soaps, paper and detergents should be used in an effort to
eliminate unnecessary wastewater problems.
2.6.6.5. A combination of gravity flow and a force main sewer system is part of the
BEAR wastewater distribution system. Grinders are used in the force main portion of the
sewage ahead of lift pumps to grind waste material to slurry thereby reducing the power
requirements and workload of the pumps.
2.6.6.6. Solid waste from dining halls should be buried or incinerated. A kitchen usually
produces one-half to one pound of garbage per person per day. Kitchen grease traps
should be maintained daily by Force Support personnel and inspected weekly by civil
engineers.
2.6.6.7. Disposal of hazardous waste at expeditionary contingency bases must comply
with DOD policy and guidance, Operations Plans and applicable international
agreements. Usually, biological waste requires that an incineration site be established in a
remote area of the base. Where incineration is not possible, a pit about 4 to 6 feet deep
(depending on the water table) can sometimes be used to bury biological waste. Consult
with base bioenvironmental (BEE) personnel for guidance and assistance on the handling
and disposing of hazardous waste.
2.6.7. Fuels.
2.6.7.1. One 10,000-gallon fuel bladder should be provided for every two 750-kW diesel
generators collocated at power plants. At full load each 750-kW diesel generator
consumes approximately 55 gph of fuel.
2.6.7.2. At full load each 30-kW MEP generator consumes about 3 gph of diesel fuel and
each 60-kW unit about 5 gph.
36 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
2.6.7.3. Internal tanks normally fuel MEP generators. Base supply fuels personnel are
responsible for central storage and resupply of fuel for MEP generators.
2.7. Task Priorities. Many engineering tasks must be completed to establish an operational
bare base at a fully mission capable level within desired time limits. Some tasks can be
performed concurrently, others sequentially, and some may be dependent on BEAR asset flow
and availability. A recommended order for bare base tasking accomplishment is provided in the
priority taskings below. The priority of taskings reflects four stages of bare base development:
initial, intermediate, follow-on and sustainment. See AFH 10-222 Volume 1, Civil Engineer
Bare Base Development, for further information on the stages of bare base development.
2.7.1. Priority 1 Taskings (Initial Stage).
2.7.1.1. Runway Preparation. Consists of inspection, cleaning and striping of runways, as
required. Also includes placement of appropriate airfield markers, e.g., distance-to-go,
aircraft arresting system, taxiway, etc.
2.7.1.2. Runway Edge and Approach Lights. Required when night combat operations are
necessary, during inclement weather (e.g. rain, fog, low visibility) and during periods of
sustained logistics buildup (Figure 2.11). Runway edge lights must be installed by
nightfall of day one.
Figure 2.11. Installing Airfield Lighting - Priority 1 Task
2.7.1.3. Navigational Aids. Involves site preparation to position NAVAIDS on clear and
level surfaces.
2.7.1.4. MAAS. Installation of a MAAS is required where permanent or expedient
aircraft arresting systems are inoperable or nonexistent. Perform operational checks of
these systems prior to the arrival of fighter aircraft.
2.7.1.5. Emergency Pavement Repairs. Perform a runway condition survey to determine
the scope of this task. Other considerations may include early expansion requirements
and threat of attack.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 37
2.7.1.6. Water Point. Requires clearance of an access route to a water point or source
when installation of the water system is blocked by obstructions.
2.7.1.7. Water Treatment Plant(s). Install water plants so potable water is available.
2.7.1.8. Functional Groups and Facilities. Use survey stakes or other expedient marking
devices to mark the location of functional groups and facilities.
2.7.1.9. Water Distribution System. Install pipes, pumps and storage tanks. Also install
fill stands for firefighting and domestic fill points.
2.7.1.10. MEP. Install MEP generators to provide temporary power to mission-essential
functions.
2.7.1.11. Primary Power. Involves installation and operation of the primary generation
and distribution system.
2.7.1.12. Latrines. Requires establishment of expedient latrine facilities or erection of
field deployable units.
2.7.1.13. Dining Facility (DFAC). Provide electrical power and water to food service
facilities and construct flooring.
2.7.1.14. Control Center. Erect the CE control center shelter using personnel not
performing other Priority 1 tasks.
2.7.1.15. Medical Treatment Facilities. Assist with erection of medical shelters (when
requirement exceeds medical unit’s organic capabilities) and connect medical facilities to
bare base utility systems.
2.7.1.16. Fire Protection. Provide fire emergency services.
2.7.1.17. Warning System/Giant Voice Systems. Provide electrical power services.
Support Communications Squadron in the installation and maintenance of base alerting
system.
2.7.1.18. Unexploded Ordnance. Perform a survey of the entire beddown area to identify
the presence of surface and subsurface unexploded ordnance.
2.7.1.19. Ammunition Storage. Complete site clearance and leveling and start berm
construction in preparation for arrival of munitions.
2.7.2. Priority 2 Taskings (Intermediate Stage).
2.7.2.1. Airfield Clear Zones. Remove major obstructions that endanger safe landing,
taxiing and takeoff.
2.7.2.2. Aircraft Ramps and Aprons. Sweep, clean and repair aircraft ramps and parking
areas.
2.7.2.3. POL Storage. Level fuel bladder sites and construct protective earth berms and
dikes.
2.7.2.4. Static grounds. Install static grounds and tie-downs at fueling points, munitions
arm and dearm pads, hot cargo (munitions and hazardous materials) off-loading pads and
parking areas.
38 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
2.7.2.5. Showers. Install personnel showers and temporary wastewater drains.

2.7.2.6. Facilities. Erect engineer shops and billets and provide technical guidance for
shelter erection to other base functions using personnel not assigned to Priority 1 work.
2.7.2.7. Expedient Runway Repair. Accomplish expedient runway repairs to the extent
required to support flying operations.
2.7.2.8. Expedient Aircraft Ramp Extensions. Construct additional aircraft pavements,
ramps and aprons, when required; start early to prevent delay of logistical buildup
mission. Use expedient paving materials such as AM-2 matting, etc. When AM-2 matting
is used, remember that the Navy’s Expeditionary Airfield Systems Team at Naval Air
Systems Command (NAVAIR), Lakehurst, New Jersey, may be consulted for technical
expertise if needed.
2.7.2.9. Aircraft Revetment. Construct revetments to protect tactical and strategic
aircraft.
2.7.2.10. Security Fences and Anti-Vehicular Obstacles. Construct and Install perimeter
and access way security features.
2.7.2.11. Pest Management. Provide entomological services to rid an installation of pests
and maintain a sanitary environment under austere conditions.
2.7.2.12. Environmental Quality and Control/Disposal of Hazardous Materials. Clean up
hazardous materials found upon arrival at an installation and maintain proper control of
any such materials generated during base buildup and operations.
2.7.3. Priority 3 Taskings (Follow-on Stage).
2.7.3.1. Electrical Service. Extend the electrical service to all base facilities and install
MEP generators for emergency backup.
2.7.3.2. Base Roads. Maintain roads to permit an unimpeded flow of facilities and
logistic materials from the off-load ramp to the buildup sites.
2.7.3.3. Sanitary Fill. Construct trenches and burn pits for the disposal of solid wastes
according to local requirements.
2.7.3.4. Wastewater Lagoons. Construct wastewater lagoons when required by
environmental conditions.
2.7.3.5. Sewage Collection Systems. Install pipes, sump pumps, lift stations and other
components of the sewage collection system; provide bare base site drainage; and
connect showers and latrines to the sewage collection system.
2.7.3.6. Flooring. Construct flooring for noncritical facilities that was omitted during
initial erection of these shelters.
2.7.3.7. Grease Pits, Septic Tanks and Leaching Fields. Construct grease traps at
kitchens and required shops; install septic tanks and leaching fields for facilities that
require wastewater disposal but are not tied into the sewage collection system.
2.7.3.8. Wash rack. Construct wash rack to meet aircraft maintenance requirements.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 39
2.7.3.9. Facility Hardening. Use expedient methods (sandbags, protective earth berms,
revetment, digging-in) to harden critical facilities.
2.7.3.10. Camouflage and Concealment. Apply these measures (primarily netting) to
counter the enemy threat.
2.7.3.11. Air Base Defense. Construct defensive fighting positions for air base defense
when threat conditions dictate their preparation as a Priority 3 task.
2.7.3.12. Emergency Disposal Range. Prepare a land area to be used by EOD personnel
for munitions destruction.
2.7.4. Priority 4 Taskings (Sustainment Stage).
2.7.4.1. Operations and Maintenance. Continue to provide operation and maintenance of
bare base and existing facilities, utilities, roads, pavements and similar bare base
infrastructure.
2.7.4.2. Contingency Response Plans. Develop and update contingency plans to include
recovery operations and natural disaster responses.
2.7.4.3. Training. Provide training and rehearse contingency tasks to include security
measures, base recovery and base denial.
2.7.4.4. Quality of Life Improvements. As time permits, improve facilities and utilities
(i.e., increased square footage, more access points, hot water, air conditioning).
2.7.4.5. Recreation Support. Construct basic recreation facilities and fields; provide
utilities to these facilities as necessary.
2.7.4.6. Resource Accountability. Establish controls over materials, equipment and
vehicles to preclude loss, damage or unauthorized use. This includes inventory,
assignment of responsibility and providing protective features such as fencing, shelters,
lighting, etc.
2.8. Climate and Weather. Planning guidelines for the effects of climate and weather vary
with the location of the bare base. For example, close to the equator all seasons are nearly alike,
with rain throughout the year. Farther from the equator, in areas such as Central America and
Southeast Asia, there are distinct wet (monsoon) and dry seasons. Both regions have high
temperatures, heavy rainfall and high humidity. All these climatic phenomena impact bare base
operations in the tropics. Conversely, the common characteristics of all desert areas are their
aridity. Rainfall has virtually never been recorded in some parts of the Atacama Desert in Chile,
for example, but rain does fall in deserts. When it does occur, the rainfall may consist of a single
violent storm in a year with high surface water run-off that, from a planning perspective, makes
such rainfall a liability rather than an asset. While each climatic region confronts the bare base
planner with its unique problems, none is as problematic as the arid desert environment.
Extremely high daytime heat combines with near freezing temperatures at night (in the inland
Sinai Desert, for example, day to night temperature can fluctuate as much as 72 degrees
Fahrenheit), imposing an unusual strain on personnel and BEAR equipment. Consequently,
climatic planning guidelines for the arid Southwest Asian environment receive prominent
treatment in the following paragraphs of this chapter. The effects of climate and weather on bare
bases located in other climatic zones are discussed throughout this volume.
40 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
2.8.1. SWA. Since SWA receives little rain, precipitation is not considered as a significant
factor. But, as mentioned earlier, sudden and intense rains that occur several hundred miles
away from the bare base may eventually cause flash flooding at the bare base. Construction
in areas where there is a likelihood of ponding should be avoided. A thorough terrain analysis
should reveal natural drainage swales subject to flash flooding.
2.8.2. Winds in SWA can achieve almost hurricane force, and dust and sand suspended
within them can make life almost intolerable, make any type of activity difficult and restrict
visibility to a few yards. Strong winds are invariably followed by rapid changes in
temperature.
2.8.3. Burial of utility lines and shading of fuel bladders, generators and vehicles will be
required to reduce the effects of intense sunlight emitted from a cloudless sky.
2.9. Manpower. The number of civil engineers required during the establish the base phase
will not change radically at lower base populations because the tasks of preparing the runways
and taxiways, installing runway lights, constructing POL and ammunition areas and installing
utility systems remain relatively constant regardless of base population.
2.9.1. The maximum manpower requirement for heavy equipment operator, electrical, water
and fuels systems maintenance and engineering personnel will exist during the establish the
base phase of the force beddown. Maximum manpower requirements for power production
and heating/air-conditioning personnel will exist during the longer-term operate the airbase
and robust the airbase phases of the deployment. During the initial establish the airbase
phase of the deployment, technicians in pest management, operations management, and
structures can be used to assist electrical, utilities and engineering crews to erect civil
engineer facilities and utilities. Additionally, specially trained personnel from any of these
Air Force Specialties (AFSs) can be used to supervise other crews of base personnel in
erection of base facilities.
2.9.2. Although this publication makes no allowances for temperature extremes in its time
and labor estimates, each bare base location imposes its own set of constraints that translates
into ―additives.‖ Allowances must be made for acclimatization, reduced working hours
during extreme heat or intense cold and the difficulties of handling materials under severe
climatic conditions. Again, the arid desert environment imposes the worst set of working
conditions and is therefore singled out under the following recommendations and guidelines
(guidance for manpower planning in less demanding climates is discussed in Chapter 5).
2.9.2.1. A period of approximately two weeks should be allowed for acclimatization,
with progressive degrees of heat exposure and physical exertion.
2.9.2.2. When it is not possible for combat forces and combat support forces to become
fully acclimatized before being required to perform heavy labor, personnel should work
in shifts, strenuous work should be reduced during the hottest part of the day or limited to
the cooler hours and personnel should be allowed to rest more frequently than normal.
2.9.2.3. The prevention of heat injuries, generally considered an individual responsibility
in most situations, becomes a matter of command concern in an environment that is
especially harsh to the inexperienced. Proper wear of clothing (loose-fitting, allowing
plenty of ventilation), periodic intake of water, frequent rest breaks and any other
measures necessary to preserve the war fighting capability of people are critical factors.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 41
2.10. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning. Heating should be provided in all personnel
shelters that are used for detail work or occupied for extended periods of time in order to
maintain an interior dry bulb temperature above 50 degrees Fahrenheit. Within permanent and
semi-permanent facilities, an effective temperature of 65 degrees Fahrenheit should be
maintained unless dictated otherwise by workload or extremely heavy clothing. Heating systems
should be installed, when possible, so that hot air is not discharged directly on people.
2.10.1. A minimum of 20 cubic feet of air per minute of outside air per person should be
introduced into any personnel enclosure to provide adequate ventilation. Air should be
circulated within the space to prevent stratification or stagnation and delivered within the
occupied zone (past a person) at a velocity less than 100 feet per minute. Under chemical,
biological, radiological, nuclear and high-yield explosive (CBRNE) conditions, ventilation
requirements should be modified as required. Ventilation or other protective measures must
be provided to keep gases, vapors, dust and fumes within safe limits. Intakes for ventilation
systems must be located to minimize the introduction of engine exhaust emissions or other
contaminated air.
2.10.2. Air conditioning has been designed for use in all facilities except storage and those
with little or no occupancy. Utility systems are designed to accept a total air conditioning
package. Air conditioning should be installed so that cold air is not discharged directly onto
people.
2.10.3. Humidity should be approximately 30-65 percent at 70 degrees Fahrenheit. Humidity
should decrease with rising temperatures, but should be above 15 percent to prevent irritation
and drying of the eyes, skin and respiratory tract. It is also important that the temperature of
enclosed areas be held relatively uniform. The temperature at floor level and at head level
should not differ by more than 10 degrees Fahrenheit.
2.11. Noise Suppression and Lighting. Personnel should be protected from noise levels that
cause injury, interfere with voice or any other communications, cause fatigue, or in any other
way degrade overall effectiveness.
2.11.1. Equipment such as diesel generators, which generate noise in excess of maximum
allowable levels, should be placed sufficient distances away from facilities where people
work or billet so as not to cause personal injury. If sufficient distances cannot be achieved,
noise barriers or baffles should be installed. Concrete ―Bitburg‖ type revetments have also
proven effective in this regard. Workspace noise should be reduced to levels that allow the
required degree of person-to-person and telephone communications, as well as an acceptable
work environment.
2.11.2. Where equipment is to be used in enclosures and is not subject to blackout or special
low-level lighting requirements, illumination should be distributed to reduce glare and
reflection. Adequate illumination should be provided for maintenance tasks. General and
supplementary lighting should be used, as appropriate, to ensure that illumination is
compatible with each task situation. Portable lights should be provided for people performing
visual tasks in areas where fixed illumination is not provided.
2.12. Transportation. Special and general-purpose vehicles will be required to erect BEAR
assets and to improve and maintain the bare base site. Aerial port personnel will normally offload
BEAR equipage brought into an installation by airlift onto a cargo-holding apron. Transportation
42 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
personnel are responsible for moving cargo from the ramp to the point of use. Due to a limited
number of vehicles, joint usage of vehicles by transportation and civil engineers may be required.
Coordination is necessary between engineers and transportation during movement and placement
of BEAR facilities, utilities and support items. To meet operational deadlines, engineers should
be prepared to move BEAR assets from the holding area to sites of intended use without
assistance from other organizations. This means having enough engineers licensed to operate
material handling equipment such as forklifts and tractor trailers.
2.13. Medical Facilities Support. The Expeditionary Medical Support/Air Force Theater
Hospital (EMEDS/AFTH) systems provide the entire spectrum of AF health care in a theater of
operations (Figure 2.12). This system and facilities provide modular and tiered medical
capability driven by mission, airlift availability and population at risk. The EMEDS/AFTH
system was developed from the need for an easily transported and ready medical care platform
closer to expeditionary and combat forces. The older Air Transportable Hospital (ATH) was
deemed too large and was normally located miles from front line forces (to reduce possible battle
damage), delaying access to immediate care. EMEDS is smaller and can be expanded in a
component fashion. The EMEDS/AFTH systems must attain operational capability within 24
hours after employment. Further discussion of the capabilities and requirements of this system is
found in Chapter 12 of this volume and AFI 41-106, Medical Readiness Program Management.
Figure 2.12. Expeditionary Medical Support (EMEDS) System
2.14. Chemical, Biological, Radiological, Nuclear, and High-Yield Explosive (CBRNE)

Environment. The threat of CBRNE materials being used against a bare base, either during or
after construction, is ever present. CE emergency management personnel must determine
decontamination procedures and siting of decontamination stations. Provisions must be made for
the disposal of contaminated water from the decontamination processes. This publication
presents no specific planning guidelines for CBRNE threats; however, AFMAN 10-2503,
Operations in a Chemical, Biological, Radiological, Nuclear, and High-Yield Explosive
(CBRNE) Environment, addresses this area. It provides explanations and procedures for the AF
shelter program, contamination control measures, mission-oriented protective postures (MOPP)
and wartime attack actions for each level of command. The impact of CBRNE attacks on bare
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 43
base operations should be considered in the BCE Contingency Response Plan and during training
exercises. Planners should recognize that time estimates for facility erection and completion of
bare base tasks will be affected by MOPP conditions, even with well-trained, fully equipped CE
crews.
2.15. Camouflage and Concealment. The fact that the bare base exists will be difficult to
conceal from the enemy. Planning for concealment must therefore concentrate on decreasing the
range of target acquisition by delaying recognition of targets and by concealing valuable BEAR
assets, thus making precision bombing difficult.
2.15.1. Planning for concealment should be coordinated with bare base construction
planning from the outset; it is much easier and less costly in time, manpower and camouflage
materials to apply camouflage during the setup phase than to add camouflage as an after-the-
fact effort. Early planning for camouflage increases the awareness in all personnel and helps
eliminate unnecessary ground and terrain disturbances that would otherwise defeat the
purpose of camouflage or require additional effort to conceal the disturbance.
2.15.2. Where natural cover and concealment are inadequate or absent, BEAR camouflage
sets can be used to screen and conceal assets. These camouflage sets includes 200 desert-
colored, lightweight radar scattering nets and 70 support systems to provide camouflage
screening and shade for facilities and equipment. Each net is capable of covering
approximately 200 square feet and the set can be configured to cover single or multiple
structures.
2.15.3. Recognizing that camouflaging all assets on the bare base with nets would be
logistically difficult to support, the planner must make every effort to reduce net
requirements by taking maximum advantage of the natural concealment of existing terrain,
by clustering several facilities or equipment items together and erecting a net over the entire
group, or by placing nets only on the side of structures which contain the shadow.
2.15.4. Coordinated concealment planning will require compromises among the need for
camouflage and dispersion, the efficiency of access, the maintenance security, the allocation
of scarce resources and a number of similar considerations that depend on aspects unique to
each bare base location and its mission. Additional camouflage and concealment planning
factors are contained in AFH 10-222, Volume 10, Civil Engineer Camouflage, Concealment
& Deception Measures.
2.16. Base Defense. While accomplishing their bare base mission, engineers generally rely on
security forces to shield and extricate them from hostile action. In some situations (during the
early stages of a deployment, for example), availability of security forces may be limited. In such
a situation, engineers must employ their individual weapons, body armor, cover and concealment
and defensive fighting positions for security and survival.
2.16.1. For the bare base planner, CE involvement in air base defense should be anticipated
in these areas: design and construction of defensive fighting positions, vehicle fighting
positions and entry control points; removal of foliage around critical resources (to establish
clear zones); assistance in establishing sector command posts and the base defense operations
center (to include electrical power hook-up); establishment of an armory and other storage
facilities; and assistance in setting up sensor equipment and mounting thermal imagers. In
addition, the bare base planner should anticipate, when ordered to do so by the wing
44 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
commander, the integration of the engineer unit into the air base defense force to defend
against enemy threats to the bare base.
2.16.2. The threat of terrorist activity directed against deployed forces must be assumed to
exist anytime and anywhere a bare base is being established. In addition to the obvious
requirement for an enhanced security posture of the CE force, the bare base planner must
support base-wide antiterrorist measures. As the only unit on base that can create physical
means to deter or impede a terrorist intrusion, civil engineers must be prepared to fabricate,
install or emplace a variety of barriers, obstacles and fortifications (Figure 2.13). Volume 2
of this publication series contains instructions and guidance on how to support these types of
construction efforts and participate as a member of the air base defense force.
Figure 2.13. Engineers Create Physical Barriers Against Terrorist Intrusions
2.17. Base Recovery and Denial. Bare base development and growth are evolutionary
processes. Early efforts are concerned with the flying mission and protection of the base’s
inhabitants from the elements. As the base grows, place more emphasis on contingency training
and planning to include base recovery and base denial. From a base recovery aspect, give serious
up-front thought to such wartime-related features as equipment and material dispersal locations,
access ways for response vehicles, personnel shelter locations, communication capability
between facilities, utility system redundancy and facility dispersal and hardening. Base denial
planning should consider not only the more common tactics of asset destruction, but also, and
perhaps more importantly, address the removal and transport of BEAR assets away from the land
battle area. Even though these initiatives come later in the bare base development cycle, they
require early planning to ensure air base survivability and that materials and equipment are
available, when required.
2.18. Asset Reconstitution. At the conclusion of a bare base deployment, the mobility assets
used are normally placed back into storage to await future requirements and taskings. This part
of the bare base operation often does not receive the proper degree of attention. A key step in this
retrograde process is refurbishing and reconstituting worn out or damaged assets over the course
of the deployment. The 49 MMG has primary responsibility for repair and maintenance of
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 45
BEAR mobility assets. At the end of contingency deployments, this organization normally
receives these assets back at storage locations and subsequently proceeds to conduct inventories,
identify component shortages, repair damaged or worn items and repackage assets for storage.
Reconstitution is complex and time consuming since personnel must handle hundreds, if not
thousands, of individual assets. To speed up this process and help prolong the product life of
mobility assets, facility users and, in particular, engineers should take several actions.
2.18.1. Disassembly. Disassembly and tear down of mobile facility and utility assets should
be carefully and properly accomplished. Follow technical order instructions and guidance
provided by people who are familiar with the assets.
2.18.2. Inventory and inspection. In conjunction with a bare base systems quality assurance
evaluator, inventory and inspect all BEAR assets and components. Identify those pieces that
are missing, broken, or non-functional and ensure a written list of these deficiencies is
included with the asset being redeployed. Determine specific requirements that must be met
in order for the deployed civil engineer unit to be released from custodial accountability in
accordance with AFI 25-101, War Reserve Materiel (WRM) Program Guidance and
Procedures.
2.18.3. Cleaning. Ensure the asset is as clean as possible and free from any foreign material
that might cause damage or contamination during shipment. Keep in mind that aircraft and
customs inspections will have to be passed.
2.18.4. Packaging. Take care to properly put the asset in its shipping configuration or
package the asset correctly in its shipping container. Again, follow the technical order
instructions and the advice of people who know what to do. Make sure the deficiency list
mentioned above is included in the shipping container or firmly attached to the asset itself if
a container is not used.
46 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Chapter 3
BARE BASE SITING AND CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES
3.1. Introduction. For a bare base to withstand a harsh environment and to keep occupants
reasonably comfortable, the location of a facility or utility should be determined by analyzing the
constraints and features of the area. Overall siting analysis should include the climatic constraints
of solar radiation, temperature, precipitation and prevailing wind. It should also include natural
terrain features such as topography, ground cover and drainage patterns. Follow-on construction
should be initiated during the early stages of bare base erection to address primary concerns:
preparation of the airfield for its operational mission, establishment water treatment plants, and
beddown and protection of inhabitants from the elements. As the base develops and its
operational mission is assured, more emphasis can then be placed on base support functions such
as administrative offices, personnel, finance, dining facilities and quality of life items. Work
priorities and schedules should be established to ensure prudent use of CE manpower during the
first 72 hours of employment. This increases the chance for a limited CE combat support force to
accomplish all the essential tasks on time and helps ensure aircraft are launched and recovered as
schedule. This chapter starts with a discussion of the basic principles involved in proper site
selection and layout, including structure separation, standoff distances, and dispersed facility
layouts. Then addresses construction sequence and task scheduling during the erection phase of
bare base development followed by a brief review of theater construction standards. See AFH
10-222, Volume 1, for more information on bare base siting and construction.
3.2. Site Selection and Layout. The siting and layout of bare base facilities is influenced by the
topography, climatic conditions, the principle of grouping related facilities to improve efficiency
and the contrary principle of dispersing facilities to limit damage from enemy attack. Facility
hardening, camouflage and concealment also increase protection from attack. Site-specific
planning guidelines that take into account the many variables in topography and weather for the
major climatic regions of the world are presented in Chapter 4. However, with a master bare
base plan, facility siting tends to follow the pattern of existing roads and facilities. This may
work out fine in some situations, but an overall siting plan which zones the base into functional
areas with room for expansion helps manage orderly growth, boosts operational efficiency and
conserves scarce resources.
3.2.1. Layout and Functional Grouping. The available real estate and configuration within
the base defense boundary influences the layout and functional grouping of beddown
facilities for expeditionary airbases. Figure 3.1 illustrates a conventional site layout where
support facilities, billeting, and force protection functions are sited farther away from the
flightline than the industrial support functions. However, if the base is long and narrow, a
more linear layout may be appropriate (Figure 3.2). In addition to real estate configurations,
the functional relationships between base activities are also a key concern. For example,
certain aircraft maintenance activities must be on the flightline to expedite on-board aircraft
maintenance; however, some need not be. If space is limited, activities such as avionics and
parachute shops do not necessarily require direct access to the aircraft and may be sited off
the flightline. Also, instead of placing supply facilities in one area, consider siting each
facility where they are needed most. Locate some warehouses near aircraft maintenance
facilities to improve response times to the primary supply customers. Place the civil engineer
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 47
and vehicle maintenance functions near one another since a large vehicle fleet is involved.
Put the main dining hall near the lodging area to better serve base personnel. Regardless of
the layout selected, review the structure separation and standoff distances and dispersed
layout guidance in paragraph 3.3 when planning layouts for facilities and groups. Also be
very cognizant of the airfield clear/land use zones when planning facility layout. See UFC 2-
260-01 and Chapter 6 in this pamphlet for additional details.
Figure 3.1. Conventional Base Layout
Figure 3.2. Linear Base Layout
3.2.2. Space for Expansion. Always plan for future expansion and growth requirements—
including utilities and base defense requirements. Figure 3.3 and Figure 3.4 illustrate how a
base layout plan can be structured to accommodate initial mission requirements while
allowing for expansion due to mission changes. The first example is a 1100-person facility
layout before expansion, the second is a 3300-person facility after a growth in mission and
personnel. In the initial layout, planners included additional space in area requirements
estimates to allow for expansion due to mission changes. Particularly for functions that could
require numerous facility increases, such as billeting and supply warehousing and storage.
Consider an additional buffer around munitions storage areas so that increased munitions
levels do not expand or shift explosive clear zones into areas where personnel live or work,
48 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
thereby creating a violation of quantity-distance criteria. Allow sufficient space around utility
plants so capacity can be increased without significant modification. Area requirements for a
facility should also include space for attendant facilities. For example, aircraft parking ramps
should have enough space to park the aircraft plus sufficient additional area to add
revetments.
Figure 3.3. Example 1,100-Person Facility Layout Before Expansion
Figure 3.4. Example 3,300-Person Facility Layout After Expansion

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 49
3.2.3. Structure Separation, Standoff Distances and Dispersal Guidance. When making site
layouts plans, the structure separation, standoff, and dispersal distances are key force
protection measures that affect facility siting decisions. These measures help minimize the
vulnerability of facilities and reduce the risk to personnel from a variety of threats. The
minimum standoff distances and separation standards for new and existing facilities as well
as expeditionary and temporary structures are contained in Unified Facility Criteria (UFC) 4-
010-01, DOD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings and UFC 4-010-02, DOD
Minimum Antiterrorism Standoff Distances for Buildings (FOUO). Planners may also consult
AFTTP 3-2.68 IP, Multi-service Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Airfield Opening,
for additional guidance.
3.2.4. Facility Group Spacing. A major consideration when developing a base layout plan is
the location and spacing of key facilities and essential areas. The data in Table 3.1 provides
general planning guidance for spacing key facility groups when opening an airfield. See
specific requirements for munitions areas in AFMAN 91-201, Explosives Safety Standards.
Table 3.1. Key Facility Group Spacing
Distance Between Facility Groups (feet) (Source: AFTTP 3-2.68 IP)
Base
Aerial Trans-
Facility/Group Billeting MX Ops/ Munitions LOX POL Medical
Port portation
FES
Billeting 1600 1600 1600 3160 1600 2640 900 200
MX 1600 1000 1600 3160 1600 2640 200 1600
Base Ops/FES 1600 1000 200 3160 1600 2640 1600 1600
Aerial Port 1600 1600 200 3160 1600 2640 1600 1600
Munitions 3160 3160 3160 3160 3160 1800 3160 3160
LOX 1600 1600 1600 1600 3160 2640 1600 1600
POL 2640 2640 2640 2640 1800 2640 2640 2640
Transportation 900 200 1600 1600 3160 1600 2640 200
Medical 200 1600 1600 1600 3160 1600 2640 200
3.2.5. Structure Separation and Standoff Distances. Structure separation requirements are
established to minimize the possibility that an attack on one structure causes injuries or
fatalities in adjacent structures. The separation distance is predicated on the potential use of
indirect fire weapons. Standoff distances are used to minimize the accessibility and
vulnerability of a facility. These distance are critical when siting a facility and can effectively
mitigate indirect fire and Improvised Explosive Device (IED) attacks. Standoff distances and
separation for expeditionary and temporary structures are listed in Table 3.2 and illustrated
in Figure 3.5. For container structures and pre-engineered buildings, the stand-off guidance
for new and existing buildings listed in Table 3.3 apply. Always refer to UFC 4-010-01 and
theater construction standards for specific requirements.
50 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table 3.2. Standoff Distances and Separation for Expeditionary and Temporary
Structures
Standoff Distance or Separation Requirements

Applicable
Structure Other
Location Applicable Fabric Explosive
Category Expeditionary
Level of Covered Weight
and Temporary
Protection Structures (1) (1)(2) (TNT)
Structures (3)
Controlled 31 m 71 m
Billeting Low I
Perimeter (102 ft.) (233 ft.)
or Primary Gathering 31 m 71 m
Parking and Low I
Structure (102 ft.) (233 ft.)
Roadways
without a 24 m 47 m
Controlled Inhabited Structure Very Low I
(79 ft.) (154 ft.)
Perimeter
14 m 32 m
Parking and Billeting Low II
(46 ft.) (105 ft.)
Roadways
Primary Gathering 14 m 32 m
within a Low II
Controlled
Perimeter 10 m 23 m
Inhabited Structure Very Low II
(33 ft.) (75 ft.)
14 m 32 m
Billeting Low II
(46 ft.) (105 ft.)
Trash Primary Gathering 14 m 32 m
Low II
Containers Structure (46 ft.) (105 ft.)
10 m 23 m
(33 ft.) (75 ft.)
Separation between 18 m 18 m
Low III(5)
Structure Groups (59 ft.) (59 ft.)
Structure Separation between 9m 9m
Low III(5)
Separation(4) Structure Rows (30 ft.) (30 ft.)
Separation between 3.5 m 3.5 m
Very Low III(5)
Structures in a Row (12 ft.) (12 ft.)
(1) See Attachment 1 for a complete definition of these structure types.
(2) For container structures, Table 3.3. applies.
(3) See UFC 4-010-02, for the specific explosive weights (kg/pounds of TNT) associated with
designations – I, II, III. UFC 4-010-02 is For Official Use Only (FOUO)
(4) Applies to Billeting and Primary Gathering Structures only. No minimum separation
distances for other inhabited structures.
(5) Explosive for building separation is an indirect fire (mortar) round at a standoff distance of
half the separation distance.
Source: UFC 4-010-01
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 51
Figure 3.5. Standoff Distances and Separation for Expeditionary and Temporary
Structures
52 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table 3.3. Standoff Distances for New and Existing Buildings
Standoff Distance Requirements

Building Conventional Applicable
Location Applicable Minimum
Category Construction Explosive
Level of Standoff
Standoff Weight
Protection Distance(1) (2)
Distance
Controlled Billeting and High
45 m (3) 25 m (3)
Perimeter Occupancy Family Low I
(148 ft.) (82 ft.)
or Housing
Parking and Primary Gathering 45 m (3) 25 m (3) (4)
Roadways Low I
Building (148 ft.) (82 ft.)
without a
Controlled 25 m (3) 10 m (3)
Inhabited Building Very Low I
Billeting and High
25 m (3) 10 m (3)
Parking and Occupancy Family Low II
(82 ft.) (33 ft.)
Roadways Housing
within a Primary Gathering 25 m (3) 10 m (3) (4)
Controlled Low II
Perimeter
10 m (3) 10 m (3)
Inhabited Building Very Low II
(33 ft.) (33 ft.)
Billeting and High
25 m (3) 10 m
Occupancy Family Low II
(82 ft.) (33 ft.)
Housing
Trash
Primary Gathering 25 m (3) 10 m
Containers Low II
10 m 10 m
Inhabited Building Very Low II
(33 ft.) (33 ft.)
(1) Even with analysis, standoff distances less than those in this column are not allowed for
new buildings, but are allowed for existing buildings if constructed/retro-fitted to provide the
required level of protection at the reduced standoff distance.
(2) See UFC 4-010-02, for the specific explosive weights (kg/pounds of TNT) associated with
designations – I and II. UFC 4-010-02 is For Official Use Only (FOUO)
(3) For existing buildings, see UFC 4-010-01, paragraph B-1.1.2.2 for additional options.
(4) For existing family housing, see UFC 4-010-01, paragraph B-1.1.2.2.3 for additional
options.
3.2.6. Dispersed Facilities. Facility orientation is generally by rows and columns as shown in
Figure 3.6. However in high-threat areas, facilities are usually hardened, dispersed, or both.
If facilities are staggered or sited in irregular locations to maximize passive defense, ensure
dispersed locations are within the limitations of the utility systems. The same principle
applies to the different area locations. Use extreme caution when staggering facilities to
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 53
avoid infringement upon utility routings. Latitude and longitude should also be considered in
orienting facilities in order to minimize shadows, solar radiation and winds. Figure 3.7
depicts typical dispersed layouts that can be used to build all facility groups, except billeting.
By simply combining the appropriate number of groupings, planners can lay out an entire
facility group in a short period of time. Use Figure 3.8 for billeting areas. Similarly, by
combining this type of grouping, planners will be able to lay out an entire billeting group.
Figure 3.6. Typical Facility Orientation at Bare Bases
Figure 3.7. Dispersed Layout for 3, 6, 9 and 12 Facilities

54 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 3.8. Dispersed Layout for 24 Facilities
3.3. Construction Sequence and Task Scheduling.

3.3.1. Construction Sequence. In general, bare base facilities and utilities should be
constructed in the following sequence (for priority of the different construction jobs, see
Chapter 2, Task Priorities). Many of these tasks can be accomplished simultaneously.
3.3.1.1. Runway preparation (sweeping, painting, etc.).
3.3.1.2. Runway edge and approach lights.
3.3.1.3. Water treatment plants.
3.3.1.4. Mission essential power (MEP).
3.3.1.5. Expedient sanitary latrine facilities.
3.3.1.6. Direct operational support functions.
3.3.1.7. Aircraft maintenance operational support functions.
3.3.1.8. Temporary munitions storage.
3.3.1.9. POL systems.
3.3.1.10. Medical treatment facilities.
3.3.1.11. Decontamination facilities.
3.3.1.12. Electrical distribution system.
3.3.1.13. Water distribution system.
3.3.1.14. Indirect operational support facilities (kitchen, dining hall, etc.).
3.3.1.15. Waste utility system.
3.3.1.16. General billeting.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 55
3.3.1.17. Camouflage, concealment and personnel shelters.

3.3.1.18. Recreation.
3.3.2. Task Schedule. Major tasks listed in Table 3.4 are to be accomplished during base
erection. This list is not intended to be all-inclusive, but to serve merely as a guide. This
schedule is predicated on launching the first aircraft within 72 hours after arrival at the bare
base. There could be situations that would require altering this construction schedule so this
deadline can be met. This 72-hour requirement does not imply that the base will be
completed but that the minimum requirements of the runway, taxiway, water,
communications, barriers, turn-around capability, fueling and arming capabilities and parking
ramp are available. It is important to note that the construction schedule does not reflect the
phases of operation when installing the utility systems. For example, before the main
generating plants and primary distribution cables are installed, it is necessary to hook up the
MEP generators, secondary cables and secondary distribution centers (SDC) relevant to
providing electric power to all direct operational support requirements. Once this is complete,
the remaining elements of the electrical distribution system can be constructed. The same
approach applies to the water and waste utility systems. In other words, the water treatment
and storage tanks are established before distribution lines are laid, and operational latrines are
constructed ahead of the waste disposal system.
56 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table 3.4. Task Schedule
Time (D + X)
Major Task Definition
Requirement
Develop BEAR assets, locate NAVAIDS
Site Survey 1 – 5 Days
and lay out base.
Clear land, establish access to raw water,
construct gravel roads, establish drainage
Site Preparation 1 – 10 Days
and construct POL and munitions
revetments.
Set up Expeditionary Airfield Lighting
Airfield Lighting D + 2 Days
System (EALS).
Barriers D + 30 Days Install and maintain aircraft barriers.
Utility Lines and
D + 5 Days Stake facility locations.
Shelter Locations
Install high-voltage cables, connect PSC (or
Electrical
D + 10 Days PDC) & SDC and provide electric power to
Distribution
shelters.
Set up MEP-12 generators/Interim BEAR
Power Production D + 2 Days
Power Unit.
Water Treatment and Lay water lines; develop water and waste
D + 10 Days
Distribution program.
Erect CE shops, office and billets. Provide
Civil Engineer
4 Days technical assistance to other functional
Shelters
areas.
Static Grounds 4 Days Locate/establish static grounds.
Paint Striping D + 2 Days Mark taxiways and runways.
3.4. Theater Construction Standards. Standards of construction in a theater of operations are

specified by the Combatant Commander (CCDR) in coordination with the Service components
and Force Support. This includes determining the location, types of materials, labor and
construction techniques to be used. Theater construction standards provide criteria which
minimize engineer effort while providing the quality of facilities consistent with mission
requirements, personnel health and safety and the expected availability of construction resources.
Keep in mind that construction standards are only guidelines; engineers must consider other
factors during planning. There are generally two types of theater construction—contingency and
enduring.
3.4.1. Contingency Construction. Contingency construction covers construction of facilities
for initial beddown with a planned life expectancy of up to two years. The standards for
contingency construction include organic, initial and temporary facilities (Table 3.5).
3.4.1.1. Organic construction uses host nation or unit organic equipment, facilities and
labor to support deployments intended to last up to 90 days but may be used up to six
months. Since construction is time consuming and often costly, the intent is to seek an
alternative to new construction and use a minimum amount of labor and resources, until
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 57
the arrival of the full engineer capability. Minimal or no land grading or site work, tents
and pit latrines are examples of this standard. Although intended for use for up to 90
days, organic construction may be used for up to six months.
3.4.1.2. Initial construction is also characterized by relatively austere facilities and
utilities that require minimal engineer effort. This construction is intended for use during
the first six months of a contingency. Most of the expeditionary equipment assets
described in this volume—wood framed tents with flooring, latrines with sewage lift
stations, tactical generators for electrical distribution and portable refrigeration—are
examples of this standard.
3.4.1.3. Temporary construction is characterized by facilities and utilities of a more
substantial nature. It is used to increase efficiency and sustain operations for at least 24
months and with upgrades for up to 5 years. Wood frame buildings, bathhouses,
commercial electric power and paved roads are examples of the temporary standard.
Table 3.5. Contingency Construction Standards in the Theater

Organic Standard
1. Support on expedient basis with no external engineer support
1. Uses unit organic equipment and systems and/or host nation resources
1. Mission duration typically 1-90 days
1. Provides for initial force presence and maneuver activities until force flow supports arrival of
engineer resources
Initial Standard
1. Characterized by austere facilities and utilities requiring minimal engineer effort
1. Intended for immediate operational use by units upon arrival for a limited time ranging up to 6
months
1. May require replacement by more durable facilities during the course of operations
Temporary Standard
1. Characterized by austere facilities and utilities requiring additional engineer effort above that
required for initial standard facilities
1. Intended to increase efficiency of operations for use up to 24 months
1. Provides for sustained operations
1. Replaces initial standard in some cases where mission requirements dictate. The temporary
standard may be used initially if so directed by the combatant commander
Type of Organic Temporary
Initial Standard
Construction Standard Standard
Engineered site
Clearing and grading for facilities including prep, paved
Minimal to no site
including revetments of drainage, surfaces for vehicle
work; maximized
Site Work oils, petroleum, and ammo traffic and aircraft
use of existing
lubricants, storage and aircraft parking, building
facilities
parking; soil stabilization foundations, and
concrete floor slabs
Wood framed
Tents (may have wood frames and
Troop Housing Unit tents structures, relocatable
flooring)
structures and modular
58 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
building systems
Tactical generators: high and low Non-tactical or
Unit tactical
Electricity voltage distribution commercial power and
generators
high or low voltage
Limited pressurized
water distribution
Water points, wells and/or potable
Water points and systems that support
Water water production and pressurized
bladders hospitals, dining halls,
water distribution systems
firefighting and other
major users
Portable refrigeration with freezer Refrigeration installed
Contracted or unit
Cold Storage units for medical, food and inside temporary
purchased
maintenance storage structures
Waterborne to austere
treatment facilities -
Organic equipment, pit or burnout
priorities are dining
Unit field sanitation latrines, evaporative ponds,
Sanitation facilities, hospitals,
kits, pit latrines lagoons for hospitals and sewage
decontamination sites,
lift stations
bathhouses and other
high volume users
Tactical surfacing, including
Airfield Conventional
matting, aggregate, soil
Pavement* pavements
stabilization and concrete pads
Bladders and steel
Fuel storage Bladders Bladders
tanks
* The type of airfield surfacing used will be based on soil conditions and the expected weight and
number of aircraft involved in operations.
3.4.2. Enduring Construction. Enduring construction covers design, award and

management of construction for facilities with a life expectancy of more than two years.
Planning for the enduring phase, if necessary, usually begins not later than 90 days into a
deployment. Planning for the enduring phase should include early involvement of the
servicing Contracting Officer, Finance Officer and Staff Judge Advocate. The standards for
enduring construction include semi-permanent and permanent facilities.
3.4.2.1. Semi-Permanent facilities are designed and constructed with finishes, materials
and systems that provide at least moderate energy efficiency, maintenance, and life-cycle
cost. Life expectancy for semi-permanent facilities is more than two years but less than
ten years.
3.4.2.2. Permanent facilities are designed and constructed with finishes, materials and
systems selected for high energy efficiency and low maintenance and life-cycle costs.
Life expectancy for permanent standard construction is more than 10 years.
3.4.3. Construction standards need not be stepped through in succession. For instance if local
factors make it more prudent, temporary standard (two year) facilities and systems may be
used from the start of an operation. This is particularly relevant if the use of local labor and
materials make it more cost effective to build an infrastructure that provides a higher quality
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 59
of life from the start of a deployment. Also remember that while mobile facilities (e.g. tents
and shelters) are considered to be initial construction standard, this does not mean the
facilities and utilities will be totally replaced after just six months. It simply means these
systems are used at the initial onset of a conflict. It is quite possible that some initial standard
assets will last several years before needing replacement. For additional information on
construction standards see Joint Publication (JP) 3-34, Joint Engineer Operations.
60 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Chapter 4
SITE SPECIFIC PLANNING
4.1. Introduction. The guidelines and planning factors presented in the preceding chapters
were mostly generic in nature. When directed at a particular geographic application, such as
SWA, these special considerations were prompted by the worst case conditions imposed by a
desert environment. In preparing a comprehensive bare base development plan, nothing should
be taken for granted. Consider the plight of military engineers in two vastly different regions of
the world. During an exercise deployment to SWA, engineers disembarked at a desert air base to
find that the only drinkable water immediately available was that carried in their canteens. Army
engineers, deployed to a Central American airfield expecting to find a lush, tropical environment
with an abundance of water, but instead found a barren area engulfed in layers of dust—a
common situation during the dry season, even in the tropics. The lesson learned here is that
surface water conditions can change between the pre-deployment site survey and the time of the
mission, and can have significant impact on the project or mission. Obviously, the information
generally available about a given deployment area and bare base site should not be taken at face
value; it must be supplemented with up-to-date planning data that takes into account specific
characteristics such as airfield configuration, topography, climate, existing facilities and other
similar factors.
4.2. Overview. The focus of this chapter is on providing information that assists the bare base
planner and engineer in using a step-by-step approach to developing a comprehensive base
development plan. General and specific planning considerations dictated by the climate and
topography of a given area, should serve as a checklist to ensure the planner identifies questions
that need to be answered about a specific site. Keep in mind that the planning considerations
provided are not solely to determine use of BEAR assets, but rather are meant to address
situations where no specific facility packages are identified. The intent is to give the planner and
engineer advice, normally gleaned from experience, applicable to specific regional areas.
4.3. Data Collection. The importance of effective data collection was addressed briefly in
Chapter 1. This section further defines the data collection process and suggests sources that may
be tapped for current information. Although, much of the data highlighted in this section can be
collected independently, most of it is available as byproducts of the Expeditionary Site Planning
and Survey Process (ESSP) and the Installation Geospatial Information and Services (IGI&S)
program referred to in paragraph 4.4.
4.3.1. Mission Analysis. As with any military task, a thorough analysis of the mission is the
keystone to effective bare base planning. What will be the primary mission of the bare base?
Will the base support fighters, fighter-bombers, reconnaissance, or a combination of these
weapons systems? Will the bare base serve as an aerial port supporting tactical aircraft, C-
130s, C-17, or strategic airlift involving commercial wide-body transports? The answers to
these questions will drive all subsequent planning steps. Equally important to mission
analysis is determining what level of aircraft maintenance is planned at the base. The number
of aircraft and level of maintenance are key determinants of the number and type of
operational support facilities. Another mission data item of vital interest to the bare base
planner is the size of the population required to support the deploying aircraft. Once the
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 61
mission has been analyzed and an initial estimate of the expected base population is
determined, the next step should be an analysis of the threat.
4.3.2. Threat Analysis. Threat analysis will determine (1) whether facilities and utility plants
will be dispersed or non-dispersed, (2) whether revetment and airfield damage repair sets will
be required and (3) the level of effort to be expended on defensive fighting positions,
hardening, and camouflage. It could also indicate the degree of convoying, resource dispersal
and work party security activities that might be necessary, all of which normally translate
into longer construction times.
4.3.2.1. The prudent planner will make an allowance for the potential of chemical
weapons being used against the bare base by, as a minimum, identifying the additional
resources needed to provide the base with a decontamination capability.
4.3.2.2. During previous major modern conflicts, the vulnerability of a theater air base
was largely determined by its proximity to the forward edge of the battle area. In today’s
major conflicts, the distinction between forward and rear areas has become blurred and
predicting a base’s vulnerability is more difficult. Consequently, the air threat against a
particular bare base should be officially assessed and defined through AF intelligence
channels. Office of Special Investigations (OSI) and intelligence organizations can assess
ground threats.
4.3.3. Site Specific Data Analysis. This analysis involves gathering as much data as possible
about a bare base location and then using it as a guide during the actual planning and layout
of the base. Typical data to be collected include basic terrain features, soil condition and
topography, weather and climatic factors from maps, atlases, aerial photos, drawings,
layouts, climatic records and other similar sources. Additionally, information on existing
facilities, utilities and pavement should be obtained. Planners can also gather information on
supporting resources such as indigenous labor and contractor availability; assured host-nation
support and supply; and construction material sources. Once all available data have been
obtained, it must be studied and combined to predict the influence on site layout; installation
of facilities, utilities, camouflage and defense positions; and the operation and maintenance
of the base.
4.3.3.1. Site Visit. If an advance visit is possible, capable individuals should be
dispatched to contact their local counterparts, if any, and to investigate those aspects of
existing facilities and available resources that relate to their jobs. For example, send a
qualified engineer to collect soil samples and assess airfield pavement capabilities and
condition, power and water specialists to learn the local systems, engineer technicians to
obtain or make base layout drawings; and logisticians to investigate supply procedures
and materials at hand (an example of a checklist to use during a site visit is shown in
Attachment 3). The senior engineer should personally contact the host-base engineer (or
equivalent) to discuss engineer missions, operational procedures and mutual support. If
significant host-nation support discussions are anticipated, consider including the
servicing Contracting Officer and Staff Judge Advocate on the site visit.
4.3.3.2. Sources of Information. If a site visit and ground reconnaissance is not feasible,
planners can still use the following sources to gather a considerable amount of essential
data:
62 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
4.3.3.2.1. Flight Information Pamphlets. Carried by aircrews, these publications give

nominal runway lengths and load capacities and are normally available at airfield
management operations.
4.3.3.2.2. Airfield Database. The National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency (NGA)
maintains information on every high-interest airfield in the world. The database
provides information on airfield pavements, utilities, facilities, fuel and off-base
support. Database extracts are available from MAJCOMs through the Global
Command and Control System (GCCS). Another good source for airfield information
is Headquarters Air Mobility Command (AMC). The AMC Operations Directorate
(AMC/A3) does recurring site visits/assessments of airfields worldwide as part of
their enroute and bare base mobility mission. Additionally, tri-service Pavement-
Transportation Computer Assisted Structural Engineering (PCASE) project provides
contingency airfield and road/railroad design, airfield parking planning software,
access to unified facilities criteria and electronic versions of joint service handbooks
on paved airfields.
4.3.3.2.3. Pavement Evaluation Reports. HQ AFCESA has compiled pavement data
for many allied bases worldwide. Additionally, AFCESA can provide support when
using Micro Paver, an automated pavement management system for developing
maintenance and repair plans for airfields, roads and parking areas. Contact HQ
AFCESA/CEO at Tyndall AFB, FL for additional information.
4.3.3.2.4. Air Navigation Charts (ANC). ANCs provide detailed information for
airfields longer than 4,000 feet for most countries in the world. Published by NGA,
these charts are described in the NGA catalog and should be available at airfield
management operations. If map requirements (base names/locations) are identified,
base operations personnel can order these products from NGA.
4.3.3.2.5. Topographic Maps. The NGA catalog of maps, charts and related products,
has six volumes, each dealing with a portion of the world. The standard tactical maps
listed in this extensive catalog are generally used for ground navigation and provide
topographic information for a detailed terrain analysis of the bare base site and its
surrounding areas. These topographic products can also be ordered through airfield
management operations.
4.3.3.2.6. Climatic Data. The 14th Weather Squadron (formerly the Air Force
Combat Climatology Center) should be able to provide all the climatic data required
for planning worldwide military operations. For additional information on obtaining
support, visit the squadron’s web site at: https://notus2.afccc.af.mil/SCISPublic/.
Furnish 14 WS a concise statement of requirements in terms of the environmental
factors involved or the climatic information desired. In many instances, the data can
be downloaded directly from the website.
4.3.3.2.7. Commercial/Government Literature. Another source of general foreign
country information is brochures and publications written by the countries
themselves. Contact the respective US Embassy or Consulate for such data.
4.3.3.3. Weather and Terrain. It is essential that terrain limitations and opportunities be
recognized early in the planning process. Since most terrain factors are affected by the
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 63
weather, it is equally important to understand what these relationships are in the climatic
region where the bare base site will be located. Paragraphs 4.5 through 4.8 present some
specific planning considerations related to four major climatic zones—temperate, tropic,
frigid and desert (the Arctic has been excluded from consideration). Use these
considerations as a checklist.
4.3.3.4. Internet. A good portion of the information planners need can be found by
―surfing‖ the worldwide web, where information is readily available on climatic
conditions, communications, maps, transportation networks and airports. When combined
with official DOD sources, this public information can help planners prepare for
deployments. It is better to have too much information, when deploying to an unknown
location, than to not have enough.
4.3.4. Unpublished joint support plans (JSP). Keep in mind that even bases without formal
JSPs might have been surveyed by a site development or assessment team, particularly if the
base supports a combatant command OPLAN. Results of an advance assessment should be
available at the MAJCOM level. The local logistics plans or operations plans shop should
know which bases are part of an OPLAN.
4.4. Expeditionary Site Planning and Survey Process (ESSP) and Installation Geospatial
Information and Services (IGI&S).
4.4.1. Expeditionary Site Planning and Survey Process. The ESSP is a critical source of site
data for planners. It identifies potential contingency beddown locations and collects site data
to support decision-making about those locations. MAJCOMs and other organizations
(AFCESA, RED HORSE, etc) support this effort by providing resources to participate in site
surveys as directed. Three expeditionary site planning resources engineer planners should
become familiar with are the Base Support & Expeditionary (BaS&E) Planning Tool,
GeoReach and Expeditionary Basing, and Geospatial Expeditionary Planning Tool
(GeoExPT). These resources are briefly described below, but for additional information on
the ESSP process and major roles and responsibilities see AFI 10-404, Base Support and
Expeditionary (BAS&E) Site Planning.
4.4.1.1. BaS&E Planning Tool is a versatile, web-enabled application delivering the
capability to collect and centrally store military value data to support beddown planning.
This expedient identification of resources and critical combat support enables rapid
assessment for potential beddown locations around the world. Contains access to imaging
and command surveys and reports, including previous airfield, pavements, threat, and
initial beddown assessments.
4.4.1.2. GeoReach and Expeditionary Basing provides a Common Installation Picture
(CIP) using information acquired from intelligence sources and assists with various
planning aspects such as aircraft parking, munitions storage, and other beddown force
requirements.
4.4.1.3. GeoExPT is an advanced expeditionary base planning tool that provides
automated support for contingency beddown planning and sustainment operations. It uses
geospatial source data and imagery from MAJCOM GeoReach cells and other national
geospatial information sources.
64 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
4.4.2. Installation Geospatial Information and Services. IGI&S (formerly called GeoBase) is
a program that uses Geographic Information System (GIS) technology to capture, store,
maintain, display and analyze geospatial databases. It is a response to mapping processes
being decentralized across US installations. While the geospatial structure includes
information, imagery and imagery intelligence that facilitate planning, decision and action it
also includes people, processes and resources. IGI&S attempts to deliver situational
awareness by viewing a single digital map of the installation. Commanders, planners, and
combat support personnel need access to a common installation picture (CIP) for mission
success. The CIP is a high-quality picture that allows viewers to see complex, built-up
infrastructures from desktop computers using point and click steps. When fully developed
and integrated into planning, the system will include a worldwide database on geography,
environmental science, geology and ecology. The IGI&S vision is ―One installation, one
map‖ to eliminate functional stovepipes and provide an authoritative CIP on demand. IGI&S
enables users to visualize mission assets in a shared, intuitive, cross-functional manner,
allowing a reduction in the time required for making decisions. IGI&S is currently comprised
of four unique decision support environments: Expeditionary GeoBase; Garrison GeoBase;
Strategic GeoBase; and GeoReach. For additional information on these systems and on
IGI&S, see AFI 32-10112, Installation Geospatial Information and Services (Installation
GI&S).
4.5. Environmental Impact. Unfamiliar environmental conditions can severely affect civil
engineer operations. Environmental extremes usually require specialized techniques, procedures
and equipment. Since there are over 1,200 potential bare base locations scattered throughout the
world, this discussion on environmental considerations is limited to those that are deemed most
essential to support planning efforts.
4.5.1. Temperate Zones. Temperate zones (Figure 4.1) extends throughout the world and
includes the variable climates of the middle latitudes, between the extremes of the tropical
and frigid climates.
Figure 4.1. North and South Temperate Zones

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 65
4.5.1.1. Intermediate Hot-Dry Regions. Intermediate hot-dry climates are prevalent in

parts of the North American continent, Europe, Southern Spain, Africa, Asia and
Australia. Operational conditions could include an ambient air temperature of 105 to 110
degrees Fahrenheit, a maximum ground temperature of 130 degrees Fahrenheit and a
wind velocity of 5 to 10 knots. A rainfall of 9.5 inches (maximum intensity: 0.45 in/min)
during a 12-hour period is possible. Rains may be accompanied by intermittent wind
velocity of 35 knots. Sites may be subject to winds of 45 knots for a 5-minute period;
gusts may reach 65 knots. Snow and icing conditions are not uncommon in parts of the
area designated intermediate hot-dry.
4.5.1.2. Intermediate Cold Regions. The intermediate cold regions of the temperate zone
are located in the middle latitudes which encompass Iceland, Central Europe, parts of
Asia (including the Korean peninsula) and some of the higher latitude coasts, including
the southern coast of Alaska, where maritime effects prevent the occurrence of extremely
low temperatures. The intermediate cold region of the temperate zone encompasses much
of NATO’s Allied Command Europe, which is best characterized by the cold and wet
environment of Germany. Although there are warm, sunny days in summer and snow is
common in winter, low overcast skies with rain prevails much of the year. During fall,
winter and early spring, the fog frequently does not lift until midday. For one third of fall
and winter mornings, visibility is less than one mile. The cloud layer over Western
Europe is typically low with easterly movement; ceilings are 1,000 feet or less during
December-February. In the winter, the ambient temperature may drop to -25 degrees
Fahrenheit for six continuous hours. Infrequent wind velocities greater than 10 knots can
be expected when temperatures are that low. Winds are generally less than 10 knots and
solar radiation is negligible.
4.5.1.2.1. The urbanization of Central Europe, particularly Germany, has a major
impact on military operations. Hundreds of towns and cities have populations over
50,000. Small villages have grown together and often surround air bases. The
boundaries of these air bases were fixed 40 to 50 years ago and have not been
expanded even though each year new missions and buildings were added.
Additionally, some missions have been consolidated and relocated (e.g. operations at
Rhein-Main AB moved to Ramstein AB) and have a major impact on space and
infrastructure at the new location. The positioning of facilities during deployments to
such crowded bases largely depends on availability of open space.
4.5.1.2.2. The Korean peninsula is a rugged, mountainous area with short, hot and
humid summers and long, cold winters. The heavy rains that occur from June to
September often cause damaging floods. Similar to Western Europe, air bases in
Korea are crowded and surrounded by urban growth or extensive rice paddy
agriculture.
4.5.1.3. Planning Considerations for the Temperate Zone.
4.5.1.3.1. Site Access. Avoid dense brush, timberland and rolling terrain requiring
heavy clearing or grading. During terrain analysis, study slopes, drainage, vegetation,
soil characteristics, flood-prone areas and any other unusual conditions affecting site
development.
66 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
4.5.1.3.2. Soils. The free-draining, coarse-grained soil, which predominates in most

regions of the temperate zone, makes the best subgrade and subbase materials and
exhibits almost no tendency toward high compressibility or expansion.
4.5.1.3.3. Roads. Roads should be located on soil composed of grained, non-frost-
susceptible material in regions of temperate zones which are prone to frost heave.
Where drifting snow is expected, roads should generally be higher than the prevailing
ground elevation and should not be constructed where existing vegetation or planned
facility locations could block snow removal.
4.5.1.3.4. Solar Orientation. Plan to locate facilities so that energy consumption will
be minimized without violating the concepts of functional grouping and dispersal. In
the intermediate hot-dry environment of the temperate zone, orienting the facility’s
longer side along an east-west axis should minimize shelter wall exposure to the sun.
In intermediate cold regions, orient facilities so the longer sides of the shelters are
along a north-south axis to provide maximum solar radiation on walls.
4.5.1.3.5. Wind Orientation. The velocity varies with each particular area and season.
Maximum wind speed occurs during periods of changing temperatures, and
prolonged velocities above 90 knots have been recorded. Snow and silt begin drifting
with winds above 8 knots.
4.5.1.3.6. Site Drainage. Grade the soil away from exterior walls by use of drainage
swales. Fill the low spots or grade to drain.
4.5.1.3.7. Water Supply Requirements. The water use planning factor for the
temperate zone is 50 gallons per person per day.
4.5.1.3.8. Water Sources. In temperate zones, the best water source is surface
freshwater from lakes and streams. Other sources include the host-nation water
system, fresh groundwater (wells, springs and well points), seawater in coastal areas
and brackish water from swamps, ponds or wells.
4.5.1.3.9. Water Treatment. The ROWPU is the primary equipment used to produce
potable water from seawater and brackish ground and surface water.
4.5.1.3.10. Water Storage. Provide 50 percent reserve for peak loads and
emergencies. In the intermediate cold regions, make provisions for freeze protection
(see Chapter 8). Immediately consider reducing water consumption (rationing) if
more serious, longer-term problems arise such as major equipment breakdown or
battle damage occurs.
4.5.1.3.11. Water Distribution. Use pressure class 150 polyvinyl chloride pipe. If
pressure and temperature exceed 150 pounds per square inch, gauge (psig) and 140
degrees Fahrenheit, respectively, select steel or reinforced concrete piping. Position
the pipe below the frost line. Above-ground piping should be electric traced or
insulated to prevent freezing. Use metal pipe where heat tracing is required.
4.5.1.3.12. Sanitary Systems. Install sewer lines below the frost level.
4.5.1.3.13. Foundation Requirements. Spread or strip footings are most common for
moderate loads. Carry depth below the frost line. Allowable bearing values vary due
to varying soil and subsurface conditions. Use a thickened edge slab with lightweight
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 67
structures where some slab cracking is permissible. Thicken edge slabs should only
be used on coarse-grained soils. Use treated wood or concrete for foundations. Use
treated wood, steel, or concrete piling where loads and low-bearing soil dictate.
4.5.1.3.14. Concrete Placement. In cold weather below 50 degrees Fahrenheit, use
type III air entrained cement, or use richer mixes. Enclose the site with tents or use
space heaters to keep the concrete warm. Keep concrete forms on longer and insulate
in cold weather. Speed up strength gain by using calcium chloride (2 percent by
weight of the concrete).
4.5.2. Tropical Zone. Wet-warm regions in the tropical zone (Figure 4.2) coincide with the
major tropical rain forest areas of the world. In the western hemisphere, this area extends
from the southern tip of Mexico through Central America to South America. Wet-warm
conditions also prevail in the heavily jungled areas of Central and East Africa, Southeast
Asia, the Asian Islands and the northern coast of Australia. Wet-hot conditions, characterized
by high temperature and humidity and intense solar radiation, are found in the open tropical
areas where rain forest gives way to deciduous and secondary forests and tropical savannas.
The discomforts of tropical climates are often exaggerated, but it is true that the heat is more
persistent. Many people experienced in the tropics feel that the heat and discomfort in some
US cities in the summertime are worse than the climate in the jungle. Strange as it may seem,
there may be more suffering from cold in the tropics than from the heat. Of course, low
temperatures do not occur, but chilly days and nights are common. In some tropical areas, in
winter months (the reverse season below the equator), the nights are cold enough to require a
wool blanket for sleeping. Rainfall in many parts of the tropics is much greater than that in
most areas of the temperate zones. Tropical downpours usually are followed by clear skies,
and in most places the rain is predictable at certain times of the day. Except in those areas
where rainfall may be continuous during the rainy season (for example, in Southeast Asia
and Asian Islands), there are not many days when the sun does not shine at least part of the
time.
Figure 4.2. Tropical Zone

68 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
4.5.2.1. Site Selection. Proper site selection for bare base development is the most
important element in the tropical zone. Subgrade soil characteristics, groundwater and
surface drainage are prime considerations for the planners.
4.5.2.2. Site Improvements. Site improvements at a bare base located in the tropics will
generally involve construction and maintenance of taxiways, parking aprons, roads and
protective revetments and shelters. The dense vegetation, gullies, cliffs, steep slopes and
streams often found in the proximity of airfields complicate construction in the tropics.
The heavy rainfall imposes a drainage problem of major concern. Groundwater is usually
found a few inches below the surface, requiring special attention to subgrade drainage.
Because of the ponding potential of surface water, parking aprons should be located on
the runway’s downhill side. It is advisable to cut the right-of-way of roads much wider
than normal so that the sun can dry the roadbeds. Good fill material is often difficult to
locate in the tropical environments. Most tropical soils have high clay content, will not
drain well and are difficult to compact. Bare base roads constructed of such materials fail
under heavy traffic when wet. Good drainage is vital when these types of soils are used.
4.5.2.3. Solar Orientation. Despite the availability of air conditioning equipment,
adequate protection from the sun should be provided to maintain a comfortable internal
temperature for facilities (particularly BEAR shelters). Tree cover, man-made screening,
camouflage netting, or a combination of these methods can produce the desired effect.
When the bare base site features rolling or hilly terrain on its environs, shelters can be
placed on the shaded slope (north slope in the northern hemisphere, south slope in the
southern hemisphere) to reduce exposure to solar radiation. On flat terrain, shelters
should be sited in an east-west direction, which minimizes wall area exposure to the low
angles of early morning and late afternoon sun. Reflected radiation also poses a problem
in the tropics. Avoid siting shelters near large paved areas or bodies of water.
4.5.2.4. Wind Orientation. Wet regions in the tropical zone are characterized by mild
trade winds blowing in the same direction for most of the year. High velocity winds occur
from several directions during the monsoon season. Effective use of breezes sometimes
provides the only relief to oppressive heat; nevertheless, solar orientation of facilities and
shelters should take precedence over wind orientation.
4.5.2.5. Water Supply Requirements. Use a water planning factor of 50 gallons per
person per day in the tropical zone.
4.5.2.6. Water Treatment. The ROWPU system will be the primary equipment used to
produce potable water from seawater and brackish ground and surface water.
4.5.2.7. Water Storage. Provide a 50 percent reserve and install screens to protect storage
facilities from insects and animals. Use bladder pillow tanks where feasible for initial and
elevated storage for temporary construction.
4.5.2.8. Water Distribution. Protect buried water distribution lines from movement
caused by expansive soils. Use inert sand or gravel base for bedding and backfill.
Aboveground piping should be insulated and protected with a mold-resistant covering.
4.5.2.9. Electrical Power Generation. Advance planning should provide for generators to
be conditioned for operation in a high-humidity, fungus-promoting atmosphere.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 69
4.5.2.10. Interior Electrical. Electrical equipment used in the tropics must be specifically
designed for use in this zone.
4.5.2.10.1. Use circuit breakers with bimetallic thermal elements treated to prevent
corrosion or galvanic action, or replace them with suitably sealed or protected solid
state tripping devices.
4.5.2.10.2. Use porcelain or fungus- and corrosion-resistant plastic switches and
receptacles.
4.5.2.10.3. Equip motors larger than 1 horsepower, and generators rated above 10-
kW, with heaters that are energized when the units are not running.
4.5.2.11. Exterior Electrical. The following special requirements must be considered.
4.5.2.11.1. Request salt spray test certification for equipment used in a salt-ladened
atmosphere.
4.5.2.11.2. Use oil-filled transformers that are hermetically sealed or equipped with
inert gas provided by a nitrogen cylinder.
4.5.2.11.3. Use silicon bronze, copper, aluminum encased steel, or hot dipped
galvanized steel hardware.
4.5.2.11.4. Use jute protected, double-type armored cables when directly buried in
coral backfill.
4.5.2.11.5. When buried, use cable that is resistant to roach, termite and microbial
attack. Ensure all splices are waterproof.
4.5.2.12. Foundation Requirements. The raised-point foundation is the best solution for
the tropics. This type of foundation absorbs much less of the stored heat from the ground,
allows the floor system to be cooled by natural ventilation and separates the structure
from the high moisture content of the ground. Slab-on grade systems do work in tropical
areas, but moisture problems result and heat is absorbed from the ground.
4.5.2.13. Concrete Placement. The following procedures are recommended when the
temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit:
4.5.2.13.1. Keep all materials cool and store cement in the shade.
4.5.2.13.2. Spray the gravel with water and, if necessary, use ice water in the mix.
4.5.2.13.3. Set up windbreaks to prevent rapid water evaporation.
4.5.2.13.4. Work at night when temperatures are lower.
4.5.2.14. Unique Structural Considerations.
4.5.2.14.1. Treated lumber should be used where wood is in contact with soil or
concrete.
4.5.2.14.2. Where field painting is required, structural steel surfaces should be
cleaned and primed using red lead or zinc chromatic paint.
70 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
4.5.2.14.3. Aluminum alloys are excellent for use in the tropics. When in contact
with concrete, mortar, or plaster, aluminum gives better service if coated with
synthetic or rubber-based paint.
4.5.2.14.4. Use galvanized steel fasteners. Plain steel corrodes rapidly and promotes
wood decay.
4.5.2.14.5. Use only paints, primers and enamels containing a fungicide to inhibit
mold growth.
4.5.3. Frigid Zones. Frigid zones are generally the coldest parts of the earth and are usually
covered with ice and snow. Frigid zone conditions exist in the northern hemisphere in
Alaska, Canada, Greenland, northern Scandinavia and northern parts of Russia (Figure 4.3).
The entire continent of Antarctica fills the southern hemisphere’s frigid zone. Consider the
following factors when planning operations in frigid zones:
Figure 4.3. Frigid Zones
4.5.3.1. Deep snow, permafrost, seasonally frozen ground, frozen lakes and rivers,
glaciers and extreme cold temperatures characterize frigid zones (Figure 4.4). Besides
climatic effects, the vast distances and isolation influence bare base operations in these
areas. Frequent high winds and either very short or very long periods of daylight prevail.
Seasonably frozen ground may exist to depths as great as 12 feet. Special lubricants,
antifreeze, protective covers and warming equipment will likely be required. Cold
temperatures make even simple tasks difficult. During the summer, this zone may be
characterized by numerous and extensive swamps, lakes and rivers, abundant insects and,
at times, continuous daylight. Spring hazards include flash floods from snow and ice
melt. Freeze-thaw cycles occur frequently. Engineers accustomed to operating in warm
weather should be prepared for frigid conditions by proper training that should include
operation of special-purpose equipment such as snow removal machinery and portable
duct heaters. This training should also include winterization of standard BEAR assets.
Operation and maintenance of vehicles, power equipment and utility systems in very low
temperatures are difficult. Extreme cold may result in rapid deterioration of metal, plastic
and other materials. Special lubricants may be required as well as antifreeze, protective
covers and warming equipment.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 71
Figure 4.4. Special Planning Required for Frigid Zones
4.5.3.2. Temperatures. While temperatures vary considerably between locations during

the winter season, six continuous hours with an ambient temperature of -50 degrees
Fahrenheit can be expected in the extreme parts of the frozen zone. Summer maximum
temperature expectancy is +95 degrees Fahrenheit well inland.
4.5.3.3. Winds. The velocity varies with the particular area and season. Maximum wind
speed occurs during periods of changing temperature and prolonged velocities above 90
knots have been recorded. Snow and silt begin drifting with winds above 8 knots. High
winds combined with heavy snow can produce whiteouts capable of bringing movement
to a standstill.
4.5.3.4. Icing Phenomena. Ice fog occurs mainly at temperatures below +20 degrees
Fahrenheit. At temperatures below -35 degrees Fahrenheit, ice fog may be quite dense
and could limit visibility to a few feet.
4.5.3.5. Site Access. Plan to use trees, shrubs, snow fences, or even structures to keep
drifting snow from reaching the site proper. In a non-dispersed layout, leave enough
space between shelters to permit snow removal and locate structures in rows
perpendicular to the wind. Dispersed shelters should be oriented with their longest axis
parallel to the wind. During site planning, provide for snow-dumping areas downwind to
eliminate large piles of snow and windrows in the camp area.
4.5.3.5.1. Locate major heat-producing facilities, including heated shelters and shops,
downhill and downwind from the runway to guard against ice fog.
4.5.3.5.2. At least 150 feet should remain open between the near edges of parallel
runways and taxiways to provide dumping space for removed snow.
4.5.3.5.3. Parking aprons should be a minimum width to facilitate snow removal and
should permit maximum access to planned hangar locations, taking into account the
prevailing winds. Locate parking aprons on the uphill side of the runway because of
72 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
the ponding potential of the surface water. Parking aprons should be placed alongside
– not upwind or downwind – of hangars and maintenance facilities.
4.5.3.5.4. Locate priority facilities toward the downwind end of the bare base where
they are afforded protection by less important upwind shelters.
4.5.3.5.5. When planning to locate a facility, such as a ROWPU near a stream or
river, be sure to check topographic data for the region to determine the maximum
high-water level resulting from spring thaws, ice jams and similar conditions.
4.5.3.6. Road Construction. Mobility on the bare base may vary considerably during the
winter season in the Frigid Zone. On frozen ground with minimal snow cover,
maneuverability is generally excellent. Marginally frozen soil, tundra and thin frozen
crust rapidly break down under the heavy traffic that can be expected at the deployment
site. Where no permafrost is found, road construction design and procedures are generally
the same for a frigid area as for a temperate climate. In permafrost regions where both
wooded and open areas are available for road locations, it is better to cut through the
wooded section for the additional protection trees offer against degradation of permafrost
by radiant heat. Trees also protect against strong winds and snow drifts. Roadway grades
should not exceed 3 to 5 percent to provide adequate vehicular wheel traction. Wheeled-
vehicle mobility in deep snow can be improved by reducing tire inflation pressure up to
50 percent. Roads require a crown for surface drainage in summer and a flat crown for
maximum traction and safety in the winter. Spring and fall grading operations for
unpaved roads should be an expected requirement. Shoulder slopes of 5:1 should be used
to prevent snowdrifts in open areas. Slopes may be a conventional 1-1/2:1 in protected
areas. For longitudinal elevations, avoid cut sections where possible. Fill sections with
minimum slopes of 4:1 should be used.
4.5.3.7. Solar Orientation. In subarctic areas, the long axis of shelters should be an east-
west direction to take advantage of the maximum solar exposure. However, since the
solar radiation received is small, the direction of prevailing winds should be the deciding
siting factor.
4.5.3.8. Utility Systems. Adequate planning will be required to provide the necessary
freeze protection. For water storage and distribution, preheating the water at the source,
using the M-80 water heater, should be one of the first considerations. Where feasible,
use electric trace and insulated lines.
4.5.3.9. Field Sanitation. Maintaining proper field sanitation in a frigid climate presents
some unique problems. Edible garbage should be burned to avoid attracting roving
animals, bears in particular. Get the pest managers involved in planning to control the rats
and mice, which are commonly found in great numbers in most of the habitable cold
regions of the world.
4.6. Desert Regions. Desert regions, for the purpose of this discussion, is described as two
different climate subzones: the hot-humid coastal desert and the hot-dry interior desert.
Characteristics common to both desert subzones are an arid, barren environment with stark
contrasts of temperature, terrain, vegetation and weather. Temperatures vary according to
latitude and season, from over 136 degrees Fahrenheit in Mexico and Libya to the bitter cold of
winter in the Gobi desert in East Asia. In some desert areas, day to night temperature fluctuations
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 73
can exceed 70 degrees Fahrenheit. Annual rainfall may vary from zero to 10 inches and is often
totally unpredictable. Desert terrain also varies from place to place, the sole common
denominator being lack of water with its consequent environmental effects (Figure 4.5).
4.6.1. Coastal Desert. Hot-humid conditions are limited to the immediate coast of bodies of
water having a high surface temperature, such as the Persian Gulf and the Red Sea. These
areas experience the highest water vapor in the world. In these coastal desert regions,
relatively high temperatures (about 100 degrees Fahrenheit) often combine with large
amounts of water vapor in the surface air. Higher temperatures occur occasionally, but
humidity levels will not be as extreme. The reverse season daytime minimum temperature is
32 degrees Fahrenheit. Nighttime temperatures are moderate: 60 to 80 degrees Fahrenheit in
the summer and 30 to 50 degrees Fahrenheit in the winter.
4.6.1.1. Expect a one-hour rainfall of 4 inches with a maximum intensity of 0.45 inches
per minute and an intermittent wind velocity of 35 knots. Although annual total and
frequency of rainfall are much less in hot-humid and hot-dry desert climates than in
tropical and intermediate climates, when rainfall occurs it is often a quick, violent deluge
causing flash flooding.
Figure 4.5. Rocky Desert Terrain
4.6.1.2. Bare base sites will be subject to winds of 45 knots for a 5-minute period with
gusts to 65 knots. Prevailing winds blow from northwest or southeast almost exclusively.
4.6.2. Hot-Dry Subzone. Hot-dry conditions are found in the deserts of Northern Africa, the
Middle East, Pakistan, India, Southwest United States, Northern Mexico and Australia.
During the hottest month in a normal year, the temperature may be above the intermediate
hot-dry extreme of 100 degrees Fahrenheit for more than 10 percent of that month. In
Northern Africa temperatures exceed 120 degrees Fahrenheit as much as one percent of the
hottest month. Substantial desert areas on all continents have long periods with temperatures
above 100 degrees Fahrenheit in the hottest month. The temperatures cited are shelter/shade
temperatures taken 4 to 6 feet above the ground. Note: Equipment operating in direct
sunshine will be exposed to temperatures 30 to 50 degrees higher than the shade temperature.
74 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
4.6.2.1. Humidity in the hot-dry desert subzone is low, ranging from 5 to 20 percent.
During the reverse season, expect a minimum temperature of about 25 degrees
Fahrenheit.
4.6.2.2. A one-hour rainfall of 4 inches with a maximum intensity of 0.45 inches per
minute and an intermittent wind velocity of 35 knots can be expected. Temperatures
during heavy rainfall will be lower than 80 degrees Fahrenheit.
4.6.2.3. Sites are subject to winds of 45 knots for a 5-minute period with gusts to 65
knots. Prevailing winds blow from northwest or southwest almost exclusively.
4.6.3. Planning Considerations for the Desert Zone.
4.6.3.1. Site Access. Of the several landforms found in the desert zone, the Piedmont,
Coastal Plain and Mesa are the most suitable for site development and are the ones most
likely to have water sources nearby. An increase in elevation in the Piedmont and Mesa
regions causes the temperatures and the relative humidity to decrease. Wind ventilation is
also greatly improved. The Piedmont area slopes down from the mountains. Slopes facing
away from the equator are preferable because they receive less solar radiation and have
lower temperatures. Coastal plains slope toward the sea and suffer from high humidity. If
the planned site will be located in this area, water availability and wind circulation will be
more important planning considerations.
4.6.3.2. Trafficability. In the desert, rainfall and drainage seldom present problems. Soil
is normally trafficable to all-wheel drive vehicles. After prolonged traffic, dust and
blowing sand will become bothersome. Dust control can be achieved with minimal
compaction and expedient grading effort followed by sprinkling with an asphalt
emulsion, diesel or fuel oil, or even crude oil. Saltwater is a good treatment for unpaved
roads at the bare base site. For additional guidance on mitigating dust at contingency
locations see Engineering Technical Letter (ETL) 09-3, Chemical Dust Control for
Contingency Roads, Base Camps, Helipads, and Airfields.
4.6.3.3. Solar Orientation. Plan to locate bare base facilities with their long axis in an
east-west orientation to minimize exposure to the low-angled sun and to reduce the
creation of shadows.
4.6.3.4. Wind Orientation. Winds in desert areas are practically unceasing and can
achieve almost hurricane force. Because the wind moves great amounts of hot dry air, it
has severe dehydrating effects. The wind carries fine soil particles, which clog
mechanical systems, accumulate on every surface and can restrict visibility to a few
yards. The Sahara ―Khamseen‖ for example, can last for days at a time, although it
normally only occurs in the spring and summer. Khamseen means ―fifty‖ in Arabic and
refers to the wind blowing for 50 days. The deserts of Iran are equally well known for the
―wind of 120 days,‖ with sand blowing almost constantly from the north with wind
velocities up to 75 miles per hour. At the bare base the wind can be lifted, deflected and
guided with a perimeter berm to shelter height, particularly on the prevailing wind side.
Also consider placing the long side of shelters perpendicular to the prevailing wind.
Experience has shown this orientation helps keep sand out of the tents.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 75
4.6.3.5. Site Drainage. During site layout, avoid low-lying areas or ―wadis,‖ in the
desert. Sudden and intense rains may cause flash flooding. Rainfall generally occurs
during the winter season.
4.6.3.6. Water Planning Factor. In a true bare base environment, the scarcity of water in
a desert zone makes proper water planning, conservation and discipline critical issues. Do
not exceed the water use planning factor of 30 gallons per person per day.
4.6.3.7. Water Sources and Treatment. Plan to use ROWPUs to produce potable water
from seawater and brackish ground and surface water sources. Resupply aircraft, tanker
trucks, water trailers and bulk containers or pillow tanks strapped to flatbed trucks are
additional water sources. Well water is available at various depths under most deserts;
however, such water is seldom of potable quality without employing a ROWPU process.
4.6.3.8. Water Storage. In the desert, every effort should be made to store drinking water
at a temperature of 70 degrees Fahrenheit. Earth cooling and night radiation could be
used for cooling if mechanical cooling units are not available. Make provisions to use
water chillers with water trailers or alternate bulk storage containers to provide small
quantities of cool water reserved for human consumption only.
4.6.3.9. Water Distribution. Exposed water distribution lines (flexible hose type) must be
insulated to prevent freezing.
4.6.3.10. Electrical Power Generation. Plan on installing sunscreens to protect the
equipment from the intense solar radiation. Enclosures are not practical due to the
excessive heat buildup. Equally important will be efforts to provide additional generator
cooling capacity, using add-on radiators to allow generators to operate above their rated
ambient temperature, normally 125 degrees Fahrenheit. Since the expected generator
failure rate is above normal, plan on maintaining an adequate stock of replacement parts.
4.6.3.11. Electrical System Operation. Generator output is somewhat degraded in desert
conditions. Units will continue to operate until one of its safety devices triggers, alerting
to one of the following: high water temperature, high oil temperature, low fuel level, low
oil pressure, or high alternator temperature. Some safety cutoffs can be manually
overridden in critical situations. However, low oil pressure and high alternator
temperature should never be overridden.
4.6.3.11.1. Underground or on-the-ground power distribution is recommended in the
desert zone. On-the-ground cable should be protected from sunlight and blowing
sands as much as practical. When crossing a road, the cable should be underground
and protected by PVC conduit.
4.6.3.12. Sanitary Systems. Expect a minimal sewage flow due to water scarcity. In areas
with acute water shortage, consider recycling wastewater from showers and laundry for
nonpotable purposes such as dust abatement, concrete mixing, firefighting and aircraft
and vehicle washing.
4.6.3.13. Shelter Foundation Requirements. Sand, when confined and compacted, makes
an excellent base or foundation for BEAR shelter facilities. Wind erosion, particularly at
the corners of the shelters, can be prevented by gravel backfill or chemical stabilization.
Drifting sand can be controlled by placing snow fences at critical locations.
76 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
4.6.3.14. Ventilation Considerations. Take advantage of winds for ventilation. Hot, dry
daytime winds must be lifted, deflected, or guided away from shelters. In low humidity
regions with large variations between day and night air temperatures, ventilation should
be as high as possible at night to cool down the interior walls. During the day, the
ventilation should be as low as possible so that hot air will not raise the temperature of
interior surfaces. In high humidity (coast desert) regions with little change between day
and night air temperatures, there should always be ventilation for facilities not served by
air conditioning.
4.7. Existing Facilities and Resources. Time is usually a critical factor in bare base
deployments. Given all the possible contingency scenarios that may constrain the airlift of BEAR
assets, an imaginative and prompt approach to planning the use of existing resources will be a
key determinant of success or failure of the engineer support mission. Working and living space
provided by mobile facility assets will only meet minimum essential requirements. Do not turn
down any reasonable opportunity to use existing facilities to cover facility space shortfalls,
improve working and living conditions, or supplement mobile assets.
4.8. Supplies and Construction Materials. Providing bare base upgrades, expansions, or
repairs requires large quantities of materials. However, there are many potential sources of
supplies and construction materials overseas. The challenge is to locate the needed materials,
then determine how to acquire them. Sources may be on base, in the local area, in-theater, or in
CONUS.
4.8.1. Base Supply. The first place to check is the official source, the standard base supply
system. In some overseas locations, USAF main operating bases support deployment sites by
processing requisitions. Bare base planners can expedite requisitioning by providing base
supply the current stock numbers of common engineering materials. The nomenclature of
AM-2 mat and accessories, sandbags and lumber may mean little to a supply specialist while
valid stock numbers mean everything. Materials not in stock locally will be backordered
from CONUS by base supply and shipped in by air or sea, depending on the priority. In a
large contingency, airlift will be severely constrained, and it is not reasonable to expect that
construction materials will preempt more important cargo.
4.8.2. Headquarters Staff. The staffs at numbered air force, MAJCOM headquarters, and
combatant command theater staffs are an important source of material support. These staffs
are generally aware of in-theater assets—either prepositioned WRM or stockpiles of
deployed materials not in the standard supply system. Depending on other in-theater
priorities, these assets may be available to support the bare base mission. Working through
these headquarters elements, particularly those that might be in-theater or deployed forward,
often produces more responsive results than standard requisitioning methods. The important
point is: to ask for help and keep asking because headquarters staffs are there to assist.
4.8.3. Other Engineer Units. If certain materials are either not available or carry an
unacceptable long lead-time, other local military units should be considered as a potential
source. These include the host-nation base engineer, nearby host-nation, US Army combat
engineer units or US Navy ―Seabees.‖
4.8.4. Local Purchase. Another possible source of material is the local economy. This is
especially appropriate for bulky materials (cement, crushed stone, select fill, asphalt and
lumber), which require significant airlift if shipped from a CONUS source. Local purchases
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 77
require assistance from contracting, finance, an interpreter and a competent civil engineer to
identify the right materials. Several common tools and factors for quickly converting lengths,
volumes and measurements are included in Attachment 4 and Attachment 5 of this volume.
Additionally, various internet sites provide free use of conversion applications and
calculators. Some of the more popular ones include: http://www.onlineconversion.com;
http://www.metricconversion.ws; and
http://www.infoplease.com/pages/unitconversion.html. Also the ―Google©‖ search engine
will provide a conversion tool just by entering the conversion factors in the search box (for
example enter ―convert dollars to euros‖). Local construction contractors are familiar with
nearby sources of engineering materials. Experience has shown that blanket purchase
agreements with local suppliers work well during contingencies where response and delivery
are critical. Cultural differences have a definite effect on local purchase procedures. In many
SWA countries for example, small businesses are accustomed to working strictly on a verbal,
cash basis. They may regard written contracts and invoices as unnecessary or even as an
insult to their integrity. Prices are generally not fixed, but are established by bartering.
Sensitivity to local customs is recommended even if planners cannot always follow them.
4.9. Host-Nation Support Agreements. Air Force units deployed in past expeditionary
operations were often tenants on bases belonging to the host nation. As tenants, Air Force civil
engineers frequently relied on the host base engineers for assistance. The Air Force paid for
much of this support. Even with reimbursement, good working relationships were important to
the progress of base development. At many of these bases, joint support plans or country-to-
country agreements defined the responsibilities for both the tenant and the host. Future
deployments will also benefit from good host relationships. Some installations in Europe and
joint-use bases in Korea are covered by JSPs, which list the facilities the host nation has agreed
to share with, or turn over entirely to US forces upon deployment. In locations such as SWA, the
US funds construction of facilities on host-nation bases for US use. For a base without a JSP or
similar agreement executed prior to deployment, mutually acceptable arrangements for facility
use, maintenance, work approval and reimbursement may have to be worked out informally and
then approved by appropriate US and host-nation authorities. In these scenarios, early
coordination with the servicing Staff Judge Advocate is strongly advised.
4.10. Hardening Requirements. Hardening requirements have to be addressed if the base is
situated in a high threat area. The simplest style of hardening is to use sandbags, revetments,
soil-filled steel bins, or soil-filled containers of any type that can be stacked and fastened
together to form a wall (Figure 4.6). Testing has shown that for expedient revetments a
thickness-to-height ratio no less than 40 percent provides reasonable stability against tipping
over from a blast. While hardening effectively counters the threat from conventional munitions,
it consumes great amounts of scarce manpower, materials and time. Revetment construction
should be planned according to the priority of the resources to be protected. Aircraft come first,
followed by command post, communications, functional control centers, billeting shelters, water
pumps and treatment plants, fire vehicles, remaining working areas and so on as threat levels and
other work dictate. Revetment descriptions are contained in Chapter 6 of this volume.
Construction details are included in Volume 2 of this pamphlet series.
78 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 4.6. Concertainer® Revetment Material
4.11. Camouflage and Concealment Requirements. Camouflage and concealment measures

are almost as costly as facility hardening in terms of manpower, materials and time. Camouflage
and concealment refers to the capability to reduce the effectiveness of attacking air and ground
forces and reconnaissance assets. The nature of the threat, the importance of the base mission
and the vulnerability of the base all affect the requirement and priority for establishing
camouflage and concealment measures. To be practical, these measures must concentrate on
decreasing the range of target acquisition by delaying recognition of targets and by concealing or
decoying valuable assets within target areas, thus hampering precision bombing. Camouflage
and concealment includes the principles of hide, blend, disguise and decoy to protect friendly
assets and aim points with materials and equipment that alter or obscure part or all of their
multispectral signatures. Camouflage net systems are an optional BEAR equipment item. See
AFH10-222, Volume 10, Civil Engineer Camouflage, Concealment, & Deception (CCD)
Measures for more information on this topic.
4.12. Environmental Considerations. The USAF is committed to achieving and maintaining
environmental quality to ensure long-term access to the air, land and water needed to protect US
interests. Maintaining a high level of environmental awareness and compliance during
contingency operations presents a difficult challenge. All personnel involved in these operations
have a role to play in protecting the environment. The goals of the AF Environmental Quality
Program during contingency operations are to minimize risks to human health and the
environment while maintaining readiness and accomplishing the mission. These goals are
divided into five areas: protection of personnel; pollution prevention; planning for hazards;
managing environmental functions; and mitigation and restoration policies. For additional
information on the duties and responsibilities of engineers with respect to environmental
programs during contingencies, see AFH 10-222, Volume 4, Environmental Guide for
Contingency Operations Overseas.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 79
Chapter 5
MANPOWER PLANNING
5.1. Introduction. Operational commands require its civil engineers to provide the flexibility to
employ weapons systems without dependence on other command organizations. Civil engineers
are located at most major AF bases and are totally integrated into the bases’ peacetime force
structure. These engineers are organized as Prime BEEF teams and accompany each flying
squadron deployed to a bare base. The support they provide encompasses everything from force
beddown and routine O&M to emergency and follow-on damage repair of the airbase. Each bare
base will have a different airfield layout, site conditions and other criteria that will dictate the
degree of engineering effort needed to prepare the site and sustain the base. A typical bare base
could be a commercial airport or allied military airfield, of which the AF is given use, along with
a water source and an area to erect BEAR facilities. In some cases, there may be facilities and
services that can be used in lieu of BEAR assets. For example, an allied military airfield may
have adequate airfield lighting, aircraft arresting systems and fire protection services to support
the deploying flying mission. In some cases, billeting or similar support may also be available
and would negate the need for certain BEAR facilities. Likewise, electrical power, water and
waste systems may be available without further augmentation or development. Factors such as
these dictate the overall level of effort needed to establish, operate and recover a bare base. The
responsibility for identifying the specific engineer support requirements belongs with planners
from both the overseas theaters and gaining commands. To aid in this endeavor, this chapter
assumes a worst-case scenario—that there is no host-nation beddown support and no facilities,
utilities or services other than those provided in BEAR support packages. Under this scenario,
bare base operations will depend largely upon Prime BEEF and RED HORSE resources.
5.2. Overview. This chapter describes the Prime BEEF beddown force structure; phases of
beddown operation; typical beddown, operation and maintenance and base recovery tasks; and
factors which affect the productivity of the engineer force. Planners should review the entire CE
UTC structure in AFI 10-210 for manpower and equipment force packaging (MEFPAK)
guidance.
5.3. Roles and Mission. While deterring nuclear attack will remain the US’s national defense
priority, deterrence using conventional forces remains essential in addressing conflicts that could
threaten US interests and allies. Deterrence requires that US forces be flexible, rapidly
responding, precise and lethal with global reach. USAF activities during Operations
ENDURING FREEDOM and IRAQI FREEDOM are examples of this conventional deterrent in
practice. In all cases where a mobile response was required, emphasis was placed on accelerated
force projection and rapid initial beddown. Prime BEEF forces played key roles in these
situations, assisting in the beddown and support of combat and air mobility forces and enabling
operational commanders to display US national resolve and intent. Prime BEEF personnel must
be able to mobilize and deploy at least as fast as the flying squadrons they support; able to
provide immediate beddown, FES, EM and EOD support regardless of location; capable of
performing base recovery quickly and effectively; and able to sustain base operations
irrespective of the age, condition, or type of facilities.
5.3.1. Engineer Employment Concept. The primary mission of AF engineers is to provide
force beddown and aircraft beddown. Prime BEEF teams install deployable facilities and
80 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
utilities, conduct light repair and rehabilitation of existing bare base facilities and utilities and
accomplish other contingency general engineering work required to make the bare base ready
to conduct flying operations. Prime BEEF personnel have the responsibility for bare base
operations and maintenance, sustainment of the AEF wing, squadron or group mission or
support for joint operational units. This includes operating and maintaining USAF aircraft
arresting systems, airfield lighting, utilities and facilities and providing engineering support
such as FES, EOD, Pest Management and environmental support and waste collection and
disposal. Prime BEEF forces are also responsible for emergency repair and recovery
operations if the bare base is damaged. Prime BEEF forces are deployed by UTCs and
identified as teams or individuals.
5.3.1.1. While team components and UTC designations may change, most Prime BEEF
deployment operations follow traditional roles of civil engineer deployment teams. Prime
BEEF teams deploy with the necessary command and control, individual protective
equipment and clothing, weapons and ammo establish a beddown location, beddown
incoming forces and support flying operations. Additionally, separate engineer UTCs
provide FES; chemical, biological, radiological and nuclear (CBRN) passive defense and
emergency management; EOD support; RED HORSE support; and staff augmentation.
Additionally, two UTCs are provided by HQ AFCESA (airfield pavement evaluations
and civil engineer maintenance, inspection and repair).
5.3.1.2. Additional engineer UTCs are brought in as the size and mission requirements of
the bare base increase. Additional EM and EOD UTCs may be brought in based on threat
and local operational support conditions.
5.3.1.3. Prime BEEF team members bring individual protective clothing, hand tools and
selective team equipment. Separate UTCs for most construction equipment, special
vehicles and bulk supplies are deployed to support personnel UTCs. Supporting UTCs
and other programs provide specialized equipment/systems, O&M and sustainment
support above the requirements in the basic engineer and augmentation UTCs. These
include BEAR assets, WRM, personnel and equipment UTCs from 49 MMG, and
AFCAP.
5.3.1.4. Tailored UTCs are used to adjust resources to the realities of operations
requirements, timing and force capabilities. Adjustment often occurs when follow-on
forces deploy to an AEF location and sustainment operations are required rather than
beddown-buildup. Also, tailored UTCs may be used when special requirements are
needed to support an operation or mission. In some cases, the tailored civil engineer force
is included in a MAJCOM-unique team UTC, such as an AMC first-in operation or
AFSOC mission. However, any AEF base with qualified personnel could be tasked to
provide a tailored UTC for this type support.
5.3.2. Logistic Support. It is essential that a logistical support relationship be established
when Prime BEEF teams are deployed to a theater of operation. Full logistic responsibility
must rest with the theater MAJCOM being supported. This responsibility should include but
is not limited to intelligence, communications, coordination and liaison with other agencies,
personnel replacement, medical evacuation, transportation and vehicle maintenance support,
rations, ammunition, beddown and construction materials, POL, maps, blueprints, charts and
resupply. If engineer resources cannot reasonably be expected during the early phases of
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 81
deployment and employment, the responsible theater MAJCOM must pursue other avenues
to support the engineer teams; for example, individual mobilization augmentees (IMA), host-
nation support and contract support. Engineer teams at each beddown location will provide
their own capability to set up internal supply operations to include determining requirements
and requesting, receiving, storing and distributing items necessary to fill engineer needs.
5.4. Beddown Force Structure. Engineer forces deploying from a single or possibly several
different CONUS and theater locations will develop the bare base site, facilities and utilities
(Figure 5.1). There can be several types of these forces; sometimes working alone, sometimes in
combination.
Figure 5.1. Engineer Team Assembling a Medium Shelter System
5.4.1. Prime BEEF. From a bare base perspective, the Prime BEEF UTCs are the basic
engineer manpower components. Historically, these UTCs were sized to support a squadron
of aircraft and a standard 1,100-person deployed base population. In order to provide
flexibility, particularly for joint missions, a CE transformation initiative has created a 26-
person basic engineer team (BET) UTC. The BET represents the basic CE capability,
regardless of mission, and is rounded-out by support UTCs. It must be remembered,
however, that Prime BEEF teams are not heavily equipped and only have basic toolboxes and
rudimentary team kits. The exception is EOD, which has a drive-on/drive-off capability as
well as all the necessary equipment and explosives to operate. Vehicles, major shop
machinery and all materials must be provided by separate UTC support packages, as
prepositioned assets or via local contract support. See Attachment 6 for a list of Prime BEEF
and other engineer manpower planning factors that may be tasked to participate in beddown
activities.
5.4.1.1. Engineering and Operations. Responsibilities include bare base operations,
maintenance and sustainment of airfields for AF and joint beddown. Capabilities include
maintaining airfield lighting, arresting systems, airfield surfaces, roads and BEAR
82 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
facilities. Also performs pest management, environmental and contract support, base
recovery after attack and light horizontal/vertical construction.
5.4.1.2. Emergency Management. Responsible for effective CBRN defense planning and
swift disaster response operations. Capabilities include developing plans, training and
equipment to respond to major accidents, natural and manmade disasters, HAZMAT and
CBRN attack or terrorist use of CBRNE.
5.4.1.3. EOD. Responsible for locating, identifying, disarming, and disposing of
hazardous explosives and ordnance. Capabilities include aircraft emergency recovery,
force protection, recovery of airfields denied by ordnance, range clearance, counter-mine
operations and support to organizations providing protection to US and foreign
dignitaries.
5.4.1.4. FES. Responsible for aircraft rescue firefighting, emergency medical support
and fire prevention education. Other capabilities include protecting life and property and
HAZMAT mitigation.
5.4.1.5. Staff Augmentation. These ―S-teams‖ provide C2 for CE at MAJCOM level.
Capabilities include expertise in construction management, technical design and
expeditionary site planning.
5.4.2. RED HORSE. RED HORSE is a self-sufficient, mobile heavy construction squadron
capable of rapid response and independent operations in a Level 1 threat environment (see
AFDD 3-10 for definitions of the different threat levels). RED HORSE supports force
beddown requirements, siting and installation of air transportable facilities and equipment,
well-drilling, aircraft arresting system installation and can repair enemy-inflicted damage or
damage by friendly forces (Figure 5.2). RED HORSE teams have the internal capability for
its own housing, medical, food service, vehicle maintenance, logistics planning, contracting
and (limited) security. These forces are deployed with their own heavy construction
equipment, tools and a limited amount of rations. Yet, it may take up to 30 days for all the
equipment to join up with the deploying forces. Therefore, during the first 30 days of any
anticipated bare base operation involving RED HORSE, prepositioned or indigenous
equipment will be required. Bare base planners, however, must remember RED HORSE
squadrons are a limited resource. Even with Air Reserve Component (ARC) forces fully
mobilized, only a few RED HORSE squadrons are available. If major concurrent
construction activities must be performed at several bare base locations, rigid prioritization of
projects must be maintained to avoid diluting and fragmenting RED HORSE efforts.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 83
Figure 5.2. RED HORSE Team Erect Warehouse at Forward Location
5.4.3. The 49th Materiel Maintenance Group (49 MMG). The 49 MMG is a cadre of
personnel possessing in-depth knowledge and unique expertise on BEAR equipment. Under
normal operations, the 49 MMG is manned for storage, supply accountability, maintenance,
training and logistics planning responsibilities for mobility assets stored at Holloman AFB,
New Mexico (Figure 5.3), or at forward storage and maintenance locations. During bare base
contingency operations, the 49 MMG plays a major role in the preparation for shipment,
installation, erection and on-site maintenance of BEAR facilities.
Figure 5.3. 49 MMG BEAR Compound at Holloman Air Force Base
5.4.4. Other Engineers. Other heavy construction support, such as Army engineer
construction forces, Navy Seabees, or local contractors, should be considered for special
tasks, such as airfield resurfacing, ramp and apron expansions, installation of aircraft
84 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
arresting systems, well drilling, large earth moving projects and follow-on war damage
repair.
5.4.5. Local Nationals (LN). A potentially large source of manpower is the hiring of LNs.
Also known as indigenous labor, these are citizens of the host nation. During the Korean and
Vietnamese conflicts, LNs provided a major part of the work force to construct, operate and
maintain USAF facilities. Hired individually or by contractors, LNs have worked as
equipment operators, electricians, carpenters, masons and unskilled laborers. They have also
been employed in the white-collar jobs such as administration, engineering design, drafting
and production control. Availability of LNs during future deployments, especially the more
skilled people, will depend on local economic conditions and local threat. If the host nation
has mobilized for war, labor may be scarce, but military reserve units and national
construction organizations may be able to assist in bare base development work.
5.4.6. Users. As mentioned earlier in this volume, individual organizations should erect their
own shelters (TEMPER tents, ESCs, user-unique ISO containers) with technical aid from
CE. If this requirement is circumvented and engineers are tasked to erect all shelters, it could
cause major delays in engineers establishing utility systems and accomplishing other critical
tasks.
5.5. Manpower Requirements. As mentioned in Chapter 2, bare base deployments normally
occur with the phased movement of personnel, equipment, and supplies according to the AETF
Force Module Construct. While some engineer representation is present and vital during the open
the airbase and C2 deployment phases, the bulk of the engineer work force and the majority of
engineer tasking will be realized during the establish, operate, and robust the airbase phases of
the deployment.
5.5.1. Manpower Employment. Manpower employment and intensity fluctuates during the
deployment phases. Demands on manpower will likely be more intensive initially, then
gradually moderate as the base transitions to other phases of deployment. Transition from the
establish the airbase phase to the operate the airbase phase for all work functions will not
necessarily occur at the same time. For example, power plants and electrical distribution
systems may be installed well ahead of water and waste distribution systems. Runways may
meet all lighting and aircraft arresting system requirements and would transition immediately
into the O&M phase. During the establish the airbase phase, the most critical skills are
utilities, electrical, power production, heating and air conditioning, liquid fuels and
equipment operations. The level of civil engineer support required during the establish the
airbase phase will not change radically at the lower base population locations because the
tasks of preparing runways and taxiways, installing airfield lights, constructing POL and
ammunition areas and installing utility systems remain relatively constant regardless of base
population levels.
5.5.1.1. Establish the Airbase Phase. The prompt beddown of deploying units is critical
to mission success at contingency bare bases. Rapidly expanding bare bases will require
the minimum facilities essential for air combat operations. Some existing facilities may
have to be expanded or modified, or mobility shelters will have to be erected. During the
early stages of deployment, engineer duties will not only concentrate on force beddown
but also on preparation of the base to withstand the shock of an attack. Those activities
include erecting mobile assets, installing backup power, hardening priority facilities and
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 85
utilities and stockpiling and dispersing war reserve materiel. To provide enhanced base
security from ground attack, heavy equipment operators will clear, cover, remove
obstacles and sculpture terrain on and immediately off base to provide the integrated
defense force with clear fields of fire and to deny the enemy and terrorists access to the
base. If time allows prior to an attack, engineers will attempt to isolate utility systems to
reduce the possibility of additional damage resulting from an attack. Engineers may be
working around the clock. Nighttime operations may or may not be lit, and construction
equipment will produce high noise levels throughout the base and surrounding area.
Personnel will require time to become familiar with the base layout; as a result,
disoriented vehicle and pedestrian traffic can be expected in unusual locations. Since
construction equipment is generally not equipped with radios, operators and drivers must
work from written or verbal orders. The following list, although not inclusive, shows the
magnitude of the work projected for the beddown phase. See Attachment 6 for planning
factors for CE contingency tasks. Additionally, Attachment 7 provides engineers a quick
reference of useful information and examples related to bare base planning and
development.
5.5.1.1.1. Laying aircraft matting for aircraft parking.
5.5.1.1.2. Revetting unsheltered aircraft.
5.5.1.1.3. Constructing earth berms and dikes for fuel bladders.
5.5.1.1.4. Installing airfield and perimeter lighting.
5.5.1.1.5. Establishing water distribution points.
5.5.1.1.6. Installing power generation equipment.
5.5.1.1.7. Erecting BEAR facilities.
5.5.1.1.8. Modifying existing facilities for alternate use.
5.5.1.1.9. Providing all essential utilities.
5.5.1.1.10. Constructing earth berms for bomb dumps and fuel bladders.
5.5.1.1.11. Constructing sewage lagoons.
5.5.1.1.12. Constructing communication tower locations.
5.5.1.1.13. Constructing defensive fighting positions, armories, vehicle fighting
positions and command centers for the base defense force.
5.5.1.1.14. Constructing protective shelters to enhance survivability.
5.5.1.1.15. Laying out and cutting access roads and firebreaks.
5.5.1.1.16. Hardening critical facilities and utilities.
5.5.1.2. Operate the Airbase Phase. After completing the initial beddown, engineers must
provide operations, maintenance and services for essential facilities and utilities required
to support bare base operations. The following functions are involved:
5.5.1.2.1. Supporting force beddown of AF units and weapons systems.
86 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
5.5.1.2.2. Accomplishing operation and maintenance functions for existing, as well

as newly installed, BEAR facilities and utilities.
5.5.1.2.3. Providing fire emergency services and fire suppression.
5.5.1.2.4. Providing liaison with 49 MMG to ensure ample BEAR technical expertise
is on-hand.
5.5.1.2.5. Enhancing base C2 and overall survivability by providing wartime training
and exercise support.
5.5.1.2.6. Selectively upgrading minimum quality expedient facilities to standards
better capable of supporting sustained operations.
5.5.1.3. Base Recovery. After an attack, engineers will concentrate on restoring air
operations as quickly as possible. Damage assessment, expedient airfield repair and
emergency war damage repair to utility systems and priority facilities throughout the base
complex will be necessary. The working environment could be laden with unexploded
ordnance; contain disrupted utilities (live electrical lines, spewing fuel lines, broken
water lines, raw sewage discharge, etc.); be subject to multiple, uncontrolled fires;
include damaged facilities and pavements; and possibly be contaminated with chemical
agents. Additionally, there may be casualties who must be rescued and attended to before
repair efforts can begin in earnest. After minimizing the threat of air attack, engineers
will begin replacing expedient repairs with more permanent repairs. In some cases, Army
engineers may perform construction management of AF construction activities during
rebuild of airfields, utilities, facilities and roads. If, as a last resort, denial operations are
required, engineers may be directed to deny the enemy items that contribute to the war
effort. This might include equipment, facilities, utilities, runways, roads and items of
intelligence value. Engineer supplies and equipment will be evacuated whenever
possible.
5.5.1.4. Levels of Effort. Expedient force beddown, airfield damage repair and war
damage repair are typically based on a 72-hour workweek (each person working six days
on 12-hour shifts). All other civil engineer operations and maintenance manpower
requirements are typically based on a 60-hour work week (six days on 10-hour shifts).
Manpower requirements also include the use of multi-skilled efforts whenever possible.
5.5.1.5. FES Manning. Staffing for FES activities is typically based on the fire protection
vehicle requirements (see CE Supplement to WMP-1, Appendix 5). The bare base host
MAJCOM will determine the structural vehicle requirements, while the bare base’s
assigned aircraft, sortie rate per day and number of aircraft on the ground will determine
FES vehicle requirements. As a result, additional vehicles above the basic set identified
in Allowance Standard 012 may be required. Once total fire protection vehicle
requirements are known, staffing requirements can then be identified.
5.5.2. Factors Affecting the Engineer Force. All the planning covered in this volume are
meaningless unless engineers—the human factor in the bare base equation—are capable of
operating and surviving under adverse conditions. The following paragraphs are addressed
not only to the planners, but to the CE organization as a whole.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 87
5.5.2.1. Training. Mission success in a theater of operations depends on the level of

individual and unit training. Engineers must train the way they expect to fight. Engineers
must train to be innovative, because shortages of supplies, equipment and manpower will
demand it. Training must stress flexibility and multiskilling capabilities, because
casualties and unforeseen situations will challenge character. Engineers must train in
combat skills, as well as their primary and secondary AF specialties. Field exercises must
stimulate and test physical and mental limits to build stamina and minimize the trauma of
war. Engineers must train for all conceivable missions in all kinds of weather and climate
and for all types of CBRN considerations. And in preparation for violent and lethal
conflicts, engineers must receive, as a minimum, enough defensive training to give them
a reasonable chance of survival. CE officers and NCOs must train to be leaders in the
wartime environment. As leaders, they must be imaginative, innovative and reliable. In
summary, engineer proficiency depends on adequate training and professional leadership
at all levels of command. In order to meet these demanding requirements, engineers must
be prepared technically, physically and psychologically to operate in environments of
extreme stress and must train at base level to work as teams. Every effort must be made
to incorporate engineer training scenarios into wing-level training plans and exercises.
This is critical in tying engineer wartime capabilities to the operational mission.
5.5.2.2. Survivability. Engineers are vital to sustaining forward combat operations.
Engineers must be able to perform the most critical wartime taskings under chemical
warfare conditions and be thoroughly knowledgeable of the procedures for wearing
individual protective equipment, accomplishing shelter processing and responding
properly to the various stages of alert. They must be capable of decontaminating limited
areas and their own equipment and supply items. Engineers must also be able to repair
and service the mechanical/electrical systems that support personnel shelters and
decontaminate equipment and attack warning systems.
5.5.2.2.1. Engineers will be working in areas that could be laden with hundreds of
unexploded ordnance. They must be trained to recognize signs of potential danger
and what actions to take, or not to take, in the vicinity of unexploded ordnance.
Engineers must be able to identify, report and mark such munitions.
5.5.2.2.2. Engineers may also be subjected to a high volume of direct or indirect fire
while engaged in wartime recovery or even stability operations. They will likely be
enemy targets of opportunity, since damage recovery work assignments and
equipment will draw attention and be recognized as essential to sustaining air
operations. Engineers may also be tasked to travel to and perform duties in the less
populated areas of the base or in limited security areas outside the wire. Due to the
variety and number of engineer work assignments, it will not be possible to provide
on-scene, full-time armed protection for each work crew. Consequently, engineers
could be vulnerable to attack by enemy forces, saboteurs, snipers, or terrorists. Prime
BEEF personnel require work party security/convoy training and weapons to defend
themselves from such attacks, until security forces fire teams can arrive to engage the
hostile force and pull back to a safer area. In some situations, engineers may be called
upon to help defend the base and may represent the difference between success and
failure. During conflicts, engineers must rely on hardened vehicles, protected
positions, deception, withdrawal and personal weapons for survivability. HQ
88 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
AFCESA/CEXX has developed home station training courses on work party security,
tactical convoy operations, team leading procedures, weapons handling, and other
subjects to help prepare engineers for this task. Many of these courses are located on
the Civil Engineer Virtual Learning Center (CE VLC) at:
https://afcesa.csd.disa.mil/kc/login/login.asp. Tactical convoy procedures is also
addressed in AFTTP 3-2.58, Tactical Convoy Ops.
5.5.2.2.3. Also in the area of survivability, engineers must be prepared to implement
dispersal and hardening activities. During beddown of forces, the vulnerability of
mobile facility, equipment and material assets must be considered in terms of the
potential enemy threat. If threat conditions warrant, assets should be dispersed within
the practical limitations of distance and utility support capabilities. Make maximum
use of natural cover and camouflage techniques. Hand-in-hand with dispersal actions
are hardening activities. Engineers must be able to perform a wide range of hardening
tasks. Revetting aircraft will be a requirement in almost any contingency of moderate-
to-long duration in a high-threat environment. Engineers must be capable of
hardening the most critical base facilities and utilities. They have to be prepared to
use any available materials and methods ranging from concrete and metal revetment
to earth berms and sandbags. Engineers used commercial, prefabricated defensive
wall systems (Figure 5.4) during Operations IRAQI FREEDOM and ENDURING
FREEDOM to mitigate and protect from small arms, rocket propelled grenades and
mortars.
Figure 5.4. Defensive Walls Increase Survivability
5.5.2.3. Morale. During contingencies, high morale can make the difference between
success and failure. Good leadership, discipline, comradeship, esprit de corps and
devotion to a mission cultivate morale. Together, these quantities—all inspired through
unit integrity—make people endure and show courage in times of fatigue and danger. In a
contingency situation, engineer tasks of operations, maintenance and repair will be many
times more demanding. Engineers will be asked to work faster with fewer people, fewer
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 89
materials will be available, no detailed planning will have been accomplished, the
environment will be foreign or perhaps hostile and there will be little room for error.
These situations make the need for cohesion and unity more important than ever. In the
final analysis, it may well be the quantity of unit integrity, and not the number of
engineers and special equipment, that will make the difference.
90 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Chapter 6
AIRFIELD REQUIREMENTS
6.1. Introduction. The airfield is defined, for the purpose of this pamphlet, as that part of the
bare base devoted to the operation of aircraft. A typical airfield consists of runways, taxiways,
hardstands, aprons and other airfield pavements. NAVAIDS, aircraft arresting systems, airfield
lighting and markings, overruns and approach zones are also part of the airfield environment.
However, the prerequisites for a bare base airfield demand only a usable runway, taxiway and
parking area (Figure 6.1). Supporting areas such as aircraft parking aprons, arm and dearm pads,
hot cargo off-loading pad, aircraft turn-around points and taxiways may require construction,
modification, or upgrade to meet AF standards and mission requirements.
Figure 6.1. C-17 Landing at a Bare Base Airfield
6.2. Overview. Working on the assumption that the bare base airfield meets its basic
prerequisite, this chapter will describe the essential features of a runway, lists dimensions of
aircraft and associated runway clearance requirements and then addresses the equipment and
facilities needed to make the runway operational.
6.3. Bare Base Mission. It is critical to first determine the number and types of aircraft
assigned to the base, identify all available aircraft parking areas and determine turn-around
requirements (servicing, refueling and rearming). It is important to remember that even though
many missions may be built around tactical aircraft, transport aircraft will airlift some or most of
the BEAR supplies to the base. Consult AFPAM 10-1403, Air Mobility Planning Factors, when
reviewing peacetime and wartime planning factors for air mobility aircraft. Bare base planning
should consider airlift and tactical aircraft and, in some cases, strategic aircraft or unmanned
aircraft systems. The ability of the bare base to accept, park and turn-around these aircraft must
be evaluated as soon as possible. Limiting factors must be identified and transmitted to higher
headquarters, enabling them to configure or schedule only aircraft that can properly land and
carry out their mission. The data derived from the airfield evaluation also serves as the basis for
any rehabilitation or upgrade effort required to make the bare base fully mission capable.
6.4. Airfield Planning Criteria. Design requirements for runways are based on MAJCOM and
theater guidance. However, UFC 3-260-01, Airfield and Heliport Planning and Design, provides
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 91
standardized criteria for layout, design and construction of runways, helipads, taxiways, aprons
and related facilities, as well as dimensions for lateral clearance. Use this UFC during initial
planning when determining runway criteria and layout requirements. Adjust the criteria as
necessary in coordination with airfield management and wing flight safety offices based on
theater and MAJCOM deployment requirements. ETL 09-6, C-130 and C-17 Landing Zone (LZ)
Dimensional, Marking, and Lighting Criteria, provides dimensional, marking, and lighting
criteria and guidance for planning, design, construction, and evaluation of landing zones (LZ) for
aircrew training and contingency operations of C-130 and C-17 aircraft. Also, ETL 09-1,
Airfield Planning and Design Criteria for Unmanned Aircraft Systems (UAS), provides guidance
and criteria for planning and designing airfields that support operations of UAS presently fielded.
When airfields support large numbers of cargo aircraft, such as during joint operations and when
Civil Reserve Air Fleet aircraft are used, consider AFPAM 10-1403, Table 1, Aircraft Airfield
Restrictions, for evaluating airfield capabilities.
6.5. Runway Requirements. The essential features of a runway are its length, clearances (both
on the ground and in the surrounding airspace) and surface condition. Required pavement
strength is also important and is a function of aircraft type, weight and the amount of traffic
expected. For general concepts and design criteria for airfield pavements, consult UFC 3-260-02,
Pavement Design for Airfields. Also check aircraft-specific references and MAJCOM guidance
for minimum runway lengths and widths by aircraft type and model. Although a normal landing
or takeoff may use only part of the runway, adequate length and clearance is also needed to
recover safely from emergencies. At each end of the runway is the clear zone. Runway end and
clear zone details are illustrated in Figure 6.2.
Figure 6.2. Runway End and Clear Zone Details
6.5.1. In addition to the minimum runway dimensions, up to 1,000 feet of paved or

compacted overrun should be provided at each end of the runway. Each end clear zone
include the overruns. Clear zones should not contain any tree stumps, raised slabs, steep
ditches or similar objects that would present a hazard to an out-of-control aircraft. The
approach-departure clearance surface is an imaginary surface that forms the ―floor‖ of the
glide path. Except as shown in ETL 09-6, for C-17 and C-130 LZs, the approach-departure
clearance surface begins 200 feet from the end of the runway (see Figure 6.2). It rises at a
gradual slope from both ends of the runway, extending for several miles. No tree, utility pole,
water tower, or elevated terrain feature should penetrate the approach/departure surface. In
addition to the end clear zones, lateral runway clearances are also important safety features,
92 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
especially when aircraft encounter control problems or strong crosswind conditions. The
runway lateral clearance zone's lateral limits coincide with the limits of the primary surface
(Figure 6.3). The ends of the lateral clearance zone coincide with the runway ends. The
lateral clearance zone width is measured perpendicularly from the centerline of the runway
and begins at the runway centerline. The clearance zone width is 1000 feet unless ETL 09-6
criteria apply. The ground surface within this area must be clear of fixed or mobile objects.
Runway shoulders, which should always slope away from the runway, are generally paved at
permanent bases. At bare bases, runway shoulders should at least be dust stabilized.
Extending out from the shoulders on both sides of the runway is a graded area. As a
minimum, this area is rough graded to the extent necessary to minimize damage to aircraft.
Slopes are to be as gradual as practicable and avoid abrupt changes or sudden reversals.
Taxiing aircraft, fire emergency vehicles, aircraft arresting systems and navigational aids
(when essential for their proper functioning) may be allowed in the runway lateral clear zone.
Figure 6.3. Runway Lateral Clearance Zones
6.5.2. Runway surfaces that are usable during initial bare base operations must be monitored
and repaired as necessary to support continued sortie production. Additionally, bare base
airfield management and maintenance programs should include regularly scheduled runway,
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 93
taxiway and ramp sweeping as well as debris collection. This will minimize the damaging
effects of the environment on aircraft operating in an austere location. Planners should ensure
runway sweeping equipment is provided during the initial establishment of the bare base.
6.6. Taxiway Requirements. Bare bases that support a broad mix of aircraft require 75-foot
wide taxiways. At a minimum, taxiways should be at least 60 feet wide to allow the use of C-17s
during initial operations. Taxiway shoulders are normally paved/stabilized: 10 feet wide for
fighter aircraft and 25 feet wide for most other aircraft. Taxiways require lateral clearance but no
end clearance unless they serve as emergency runways. The lateral clearance to fixed and mobile
obstructions is 200 feet from the taxiway centerline. This can be reduced per ETL 09-6 for initial
contingency operations with C-130s and C-17s.
6.7. Apron Requirements. There are no standard sizes for aircraft parking aprons. Aprons are
individually designed to support specific aircraft and missions at each installation. The detailed
dimensions are determined the by size, type and number of aircraft that require parking and
maneuvering space and by the type of activity the apron serves. For bare base planning purposes,
refer to AFH 32-1084, Facility Requirements, and UFC 3-260-01 for specific apron dimensions
and aircraft clearance requirements.
6.7.1. Estimating New Apron Requirements. For broad planning purposes, the following
method in AFH 32-1084 is used to estimate new apron requirements: Multiply the wingspan
of the selected aircraft by its length. Multiply the product by a factor of 5.3 (use a factor of
4.4 for fighter-type aircraft). Example: To estimate apron requirements for 10 C-141 aircraft,
multiply: 48.8 m x 51.3 m x 10 aircraft x 5.3 factor = 133,000 m2 of apron needed. This is a
planning tool for sizing new aprons only. Do not use it to estimate the number of aircraft
(specifically, large aircraft) that can park on an existing apron. Many variables (e.g.,
length, width, and taxi lane locations) determine an existing apron's suitability to support
specific aircraft types. At existing bases, develop a conceptual aircraft parking plan to
determine the apron square meter requirements.
6.7.2. Parking Aircraft on an Existing Apron. Operational aircraft are parked on mass
aprons, strip aprons, or where authorized, on dispersed stubs. To determine how many
operational aircraft require apron space, proceed as follows: Begin with 100 percent of the
assigned aircraft as established by official OPLANs; from this subtract any aircraft that are
located on separate aprons, such as alert aircraft. Subtract the aircraft that are normally
located in maintenance hangars under maintenance schedules. And finally, subtract any
aircraft that are parked elsewhere on existing pavement or hardstands. Following are other
factors affecting the size and configuration of aprons for operational aircraft:
6.7.2.1. Aircraft Parking Arrangements. Aircraft are generally parked in rows on an
apron and spaced according to their dimensions (Table 6.1) and specific clearance
requirements. This spacing permits aircraft to move in and out of parking places under
their own power. Figure 6.4 illustrates a typical parking arrangement. Parking
arrangements should be studied carefully to achieve the parking layout that requires the
least amount of pavement per parked aircraft.
6.7.2.2. Fighter Aircraft. Fighter-type aircraft are often parked at a 45° angle (Figure
6.5). This is an efficient way to achieve adequate clearance to dissipate the temperature
and velocity of jet blast to levels that will not endanger aircraft or personnel; that is,
about 38° C (100° F), and 56 kilometers per hour (30.4 knots).
94 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table 6.1. Fixed-Wing Aircraft Dimensions
Aircraft1 Wingspan Length Height

Type Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet
B-1 22.7 to 41.7 77.8 to 136.7 46.0 150.7 10.3 33.6
B-52 56.4 185.0 47.8 156.6 12.4 40.8
C-5 67.9 222.7 75.6 247.8 19.9 65.1
C-9 28.5 93.4 36.4 119.3 8.4 27.5
MC-12 17.6 57.9 14.8 48.7 4.3 14.3
C-17 51.8 170 52.7 173 16.8 55.1
C-130 40.4 132.6 30.4 99.5 11.7 38.5
KC-135 39.9 130.8 41.5 136.2 12.7 41.7
KC-10 50.4 165.3 55.5 182.1 17.7 58.1
C-137 44.4 145.7 45.1 147.7 12.8 41.8
C-141B 48.8 160.0 51.3 168.4 12.0 39.3
E-3 44.4 145.7 46.6 152.9 12.9 42.2
E-4 59.7 195.7 70.7 231.8 19.6 64.3
A-10 17.5 57.5 16.2 53.3 4.5 14.9
F-5 8.5 28.0 15.8 51.7 4.0 13.2
F-15 13.0 42.8 19.4 63.8 5.9 19.2
F-16 10.0 32.8 14.5 47.6 5.0 16.4
F-22 13.6 44.5 18.9 62.1 5.1 16.6
F-35 10.7 35 15.4 51.1 4.6 15
Note 1: Dimensions vary between different models and configurations of aircraft.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 95
Figure 6.4. Typical Aircraft Parking Arrangement

96 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 6.5. Fighter Aircraft Parked Diagonally on Apron
6.7.2.3. Rotary-Wing Aircraft. Mass parking of rotary-wing aircraft will require an apron
designated for rotary-wing aircraft. Parking for transient rotary-wing aircraft at aviation
facilities where only a few rotary-wing aircraft are assigned, may be located on aprons
for fixed-wing aircraft. As with fixed-wing aircraft aprons, there is no standard size for
rotary-wing aircraft aprons. Rotary-wing aircraft at Air Force facilities are parked in a
layout similar to that of fixed-wing aircraft. Parking space, taxilane, and clearance
dimensions will be based on the rotor diameter of the specific aircraft assigned to the
facility. The wingtip clearance criteria provided in AFH 32-1084 is preferred. However,
the Army criteria in UFC-3-260-01 may be used for all rotary wing aircraft except CH-53
and CH-54 (Figure 6.6). Air Force rotary-wing parking apron dimensions are based on
the aircraft dimensions and separation distances for parked helicopters given in Table
6.2. For a rough estimate of the apron area needed, obtain the block area each helicopter
occupies by multiplying its operating length by its operating width, then multiply each
block area by 13. The apron is usually part of, or contiguous to, the main airfield apron.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 97
6.7.2.4. Taxi Lanes. Interior and peripheral taxi lanes must exceed the required width for
aircraft parked in the area if larger aircraft must taxi through en route to docks, hangars,
or pads. Example: If E-4s taxi past a ramp of F-16s, taxi lane should be based on the
wingspan of the E-4. Confine this width variation to the fewest taxi lanes possible.
Figure 6.6. Army Criteria for Type 1 Rotary-Wing Parking Apron (except CH-47)
98 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table 6.2. Rotary-Wing Aircraft Dimensions, Distance, and Taxiway Width

Minimum Distance Minimum Interior
Operating Operating
Rotary-Wing1 Between Centerline and Perimeter Taxi
Length Width
of Parked Aircraft2 Lane Width3
Type Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet
HH/MH-53 26.9 88.3 22.0 72.3 44.0 144.5 55.1 180.7
HH-1H 17.4 57.1 14.7 48.3 29.5 96.7 44.2 145.0
UH-1N57 17.5 57.3 14.6 48.0 29.3 96.0 43.9 144.0
UH/TH-1F/P 17.4 57.1 14.6 48.0 29.3 96.0 43.9 144.0
HH-60 19.8 64.9 16.4 53.7 32.7 107.4 40.9 134.2
CV-22 17.5 57.3 25.9 85.0 29.4 96.5 44.2 145.0
Notes:
1. Dimensions vary between different models and configurations of helicopters.
2. Distances represent two rotor diameters between center lines of parked aircraft.
3. Widths represent two and one-half rotor diameters for wheeled helicopters and three-rotor
diameters for skid-mounted helicopters.
Ref: AFH 32-1084
6.7.2.5. Unmanned Aircraft Systems (UAS). In addition to planning and designing
airfields that support manned aircraft, engineer planners may find it necessary to consider
support for UAS operations as well. UFC 3-260-01, supplemented by ETL 09-1,
provides basic criteria and requirements for UAS airfields. Like other aircraft, UAS are
generally parked in rows on an apron and spaced according to their dimensions. See
Table 6.3 for specific UAS dimensions.
Table 6.3. Unmanned Aircraft Systems Dimensions

Vertical
UAS Wingspan Length Height
Clearance
Type Feet Feet Inches Feet
RQ-4A Global Hawk 116.2 44.4 19.5 15.2
RQ-4B Global Hawk 130.9 47.6 20.65 15.4
MQ-9A Reaper 66 36.2 20 11.8
(1)
RQ-1B/MQ-1B Predator 48.7 27.0 5.3 6.9
(2)
MQ-1C ERMP Warrior 56.3 27.5 TBD 9.9. (Level) (3)
RQ-7B Shadow 200 14 11.33 TBD 3.2
Notes.
(1) 55.25 feet for MQ-1B Block 10 & 15.
(2) 29 feet with Alpha Probe attached.
(3) 10.32 feet for uneven surfaces, allow for an additional 5 inches.
Ref: ETL 09-1
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 99
6.8. Airfield Lights. If airfield lighting is required, contingency forces can install the portable
EALS available in BEAR.
6.8.1. The EALS can be used to support runway surfaces up to 150 feet by 10,000 feet and
can be installed and secured on all types of surfaces, e.g., sand, frozen earth, mud, ice,
asphalt and concrete. Packaged on six trailers (Figure 6.7), the system is air transportable,
fitting within the space of three standard-sized transport pallet positions. The system includes
runway edge lighting, approach lighting, threshold/end lighting, taxiway lighting, precision
approach path indicator lights, distance-to-go marker lighting and obstruction lighting. Also
included are a regulator, control panel, numerous transformers and various lengths of cable.
6.8.2. A six-person crew can normally layout and install the EALS on a minimum operating
strip (50 feet by 5,000 feet) in approximately 2½ hours. Further details on setting up and
operating the system can be found in AFH 10-222, Volume 7, Emergency Airfield Lighting
System (EALS,) and Technical Order (T.O.) 35F5-3-17-1.
Figure 6.7. EALS Trailers
6.9. Aircraft Arresting Systems. While there are several types of aircraft arresting systems in
the AF inventory, the MAAS is the type most often used in a bare base situation. The MAAS can
be installed either by RED HORSE or Prime BEEF personnel.
6.9.1. The MAAS consists of two, trailer-mounted rotary friction energy absorbers (Figure
6.8). Its primary purpose is to provide for rapid deployment of aircraft recovery capability.
The MAAS enables high cycle arrestment of hook-equipped tactical aircraft on airfields not
having a compatible, permanently installed arresting system or those that have been
expediently repaired after base attack. The MAAS is easily transportable by air or land and
can be set up on various surfaces ranging from soil to asphalt to concrete. Each MAAS is
equipped with a BAK-12 energy absorber.
100 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 6.8. Mobile Aircraft Arresting System (Towed)
6.9.2. While the MAAS is capable of bidirectional engagements, the basic MAAS is
configured for unidirectional engagements of aircraft weighing up to 40,000 pounds and does
not allow for wide-body aircraft operations, nor does it provide for both approach and
departure end engagements. A MAAS upgrade kit has been developed to overcome these
limitations. The kit employs a lightweight fairlead beam which permits the MAAS trailers to
be moved back a maximum of 200 feet from the runway edge and improves the overall
capability of the system. The kit contains two 1,500-foot nylon tapes, two lightweight
fairlead beams and numerous anchoring components. All the items except the fairlead beams
are organized in reusable shipping containers, and the entire kit is trailerized and air
transportable.
6.9.3. The size of the MAAS installation crew and the time required to install the system will
be dictated by the contingency situation. However, on average, an experienced 12-person
crew should be able to install the MAAS in less than one hour.
6.9.4. The MAAS is currently an optional BEAR equipment UTC. Detailed installation and
operating instructions for the MAAS are contained in AFH 10-222, Volume 8, Guide to
Mobile Aircraft Arresting System Installation, and T.O. 35E8-2-10-1, Arresting Systems,
Aircraft, Mobile.
6.10. Navigational Aids (NAVAIDS). If not already available at the bare base, NAVAIDS
must be installed. The basic criteria for locating NAVAIDS are listed below. Final siting and
installation are the responsibility of communications organizations. Whenever possible, install
NAVAIDS in accordance with UFC 3-260-01.
6.10.1. Tactical Air Navigation (TACAN). TACAN should be located no closer than 500
feet from the runway centerline.
6.10.2. Radio. The physical location is flexible. A clear area for the scope antenna is
required.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 101
6.10.3. Radar Approach Control (RAPCON). Should be located a minimum of 500 feet from
the runway centerline in a clear area where both approaches can be observed. The search
antenna should be clear in all directions.
6.10.4. Mobile Air Traffic Control Tower. The mobile control tower (Figure 6.9) should be
located a minimum of 500 feet from the runway centerline in a location which provides
visual surveillance of all taxiways and runways.
6.10.5. Wind Cone. Should be located in an area visible to taxiing aircraft and should be at
least 400 feet from the centerline of the runway.
Figure 6.9. AN/TSW-7 Mobile Control Tower
6.11. Aircraft Revetment. Enemy air, artillery, rocket and ground attacks against a bare base
are likely to concentrate on aircraft which are by far the most lucrative and, when parked in the
open, the most vulnerable targets available. Consequently, when the bare base site is located in a
high-threat area, plan to provide revetments for the protection of parked aircraft (Figure 6.10).
6.11.1. Revetment Protection Features. Revetments protect parked aircraft from three
dangers. First, they block shrapnel and deflect the blast from near misses by enemy aerial
munitions and indirect fire weapons (artillery, rockets and mortars). Second, revetments
screen aircraft from direct fire weapons on the ground. Third, revetments can prevent chain
reaction explosions from one aircraft to the next. Dispersed revetment cells on separate
parking pads (Figure 6.11) provide greater protection from air attack because they are point
targets rather than line targets. Where dispersed revetment parking is not possible, revetments
can be erected on the mass-parking apron in one or more of several cluster arrangements
(Figure 6.12). The ―U‖ shape cluster arrangement could be erected along a taxiway if AM-2
matting is available for parking pads. The multiple groups, ―H‖ shape cluster arrangement
provide each aircraft protection on three sides and have no line-of-sight to other parked
aircraft. Line of sight parking posed a problem in Vietnam where parked aircraft were
occasionally destroyed despite revetments because forward firing weapons on one aircraft
pointed directly at other parked aircraft. The drive-through cluster layout shown in Figure
6.12 allows quick entry and exit, but lacks the protection of a third wall. With proper
102 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
positioning of the drive-through clusters, aircraft in adjacent rows still have line-of-sight
protection.
Figure 6.10. Typical Revetment Installation at a Bare Base
Figure 6.11. Dispersed and Non-dispersed Revetment Cells

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 103
Figure 6.12. Cluster Arrangements for Aircraft Revetments
6.11.2. Standard Revetments. Several types of revetment systems are available; however, the
one most likely to be available is the B-1 Revetment Kit. Although no longer in the BEAR
package, the revetments are available as theater WRM assets. A standard kit contains 21
sections, each 12 feet long, and provides 252 linear feet of steel bins that are 16 feet high and
nearly 7 feet wide. For bare base planning, one revetment kit is required for one tactical
aircraft. Two revetment kits are required for each cargo or strategic aircraft; however, since
two B-1 kits do not provide sufficient material for dispersed revetment cell construction, one
of the cluster arrangements shown in Figure 6.13 must be used for large aircraft. Revetments
are assembled from 16- and 18-gauge corrugated steel panels pinned together with ¼-inch
diameter rods (Figure 6.14). Assembled in place, the bins must be filled with soil, sand, or
gravel. Detailed assembly instructions, list of materials, packing information and equipment
required for B-1 assembly are contained in T.O. 35E4-170-2, Aircraft Revetment Kit, Type B-
1.
Figure 6.13. B-1 Revetment Being Assembled

104 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 6.14. B-1 Revetment Being Pinned Together
6.11.3. Non-standard Revetments. Non-standard aircraft revetments can be constructed from

shipping containers, timber cribs, retaining walls of wood or matting, berms of piled earth or
soil cement and sandbags. Also, several other revetting systems are commercially available
and employed by other military services (Figure 6.15). See AFH 10-222, Volume 14, Guide
to Fighting Positions, Obstacles, and Revetments, for detailed employment methods and
assembly instructions for revetments.
6.11.4. Critical Airfield Facility Revetments. Coordinate with other base agencies to
determine which airfield facilities should be protected by revetments. Facilities commonly
protected include utility plants and substations, squadron operations, command posts and
communications, to name a few. When standard revetment materials are in short supply, it
may be necessary to depend on non-standard expedient revetments to protect equipment
essential to sortie generation.
Figure 6.15. Commonly Used Commercial Revetments

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 105
Chapter 7
ELECTRICAL UTILITY SYSTEMS
7.1. Introduction. BEAR electrical packages consist of both high- and low-voltage systems.
Traditionally, high-voltage systems are associated with large (1,100-person) base populations;
low voltage systems primarily with smaller (550-person) base populations. As new assets come
into the inventory, low-voltage systems are being upgraded to high-voltage capability. High-
voltage generators are 3-phase, 4,160 volt primary distribution and low-voltage system are
(120/208 volt) (Figure 7.1). High-voltage systems must be used when ECUs are deployed.
Figure 7.1. Typical BEAR Low-Voltage Generator
7.2. Overview. The chapter provides a brief discussion of planning for electrical systems and
power plant dispersal and environmental considerations. For specific operator and technician-
level information on BEAR electrical power assets, see AFH 10-222 Volume 5, Guide to
Contingency Electrical Power System Installation.
7.3. General Guidance.
7.3.1. Dispersed Layout. For maximum efficiency of both people and equipment, the
optimum mode of operation is to generate all the primary power at a centrally located power
plant. However, a dispersed layout could prevent the total loss of generating capability in an
area with a high-threat of attack. Plan on providing separate power plants, each separated by
distances of 1,500 to 3,000 feet. Plants should be electrically tied together to allow a back-
feed capability in the event of enemy bomb damage. It also allows operators to switch
generators off during periods of light load and maintenance shutdown.
7.3.2. Environmental Effects. High ambient temperatures can adversely affect the
performance of BEAR electric generator sets. To help reduce these effects, generator sets
should be located and spaced so that the prevailing winds (Figure 7.2) will carry the heat
away from adjacent generators and occupied areas. It is recommended that these sets be
shaded from direct sunlight to prevent engine overheating, derating output and generator
106 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
shutdown. Additionally, these sets should be protected, to the highest practical extent, from
blowing dust and sand entering cooling air intakes. Air intakes must not be restricted or heat
will buildup and cause loss of power. This cannot be overemphasized. Protect air intakes
and exhaust ports on non-operating sets and fuel and oil tanks during servicing operations.
An accelerated maintenance schedule must be expected when operating in high-temperature
and arid environments. A pressure washer for cleaning radiators should be procured early on
during the initial stages of beddown. Keeping radiators clean is essential to providing reliable
power. Specific recommendations are also in AFH 10-222, Volume 5, but from an overall
perspective planners can avoid some problems by considering the following guidelines:
7.3.2.1. Locate generator sets as far apart as feasible, consistent with other requirements.
7.3.2.2. Place generator sets on a line perpendicular to the prevailing wind direction.
7.3.2.3. Avoid placing generator sets in direct sunlight, if possible. A shelter may have to
be provided to shield units from the sun. Camouflage netting and screening can reduce
heat-related failures on bladders and other major components, but should be configured
to ensure they do not insulate the equipment and hold in the heat.
7.3.2.4. Do not attempt to bypass the thermal control, since excessive temperature can
cause catastrophic damage.
7.3.2.5. Where possible, reduce the effects of blowing sand and dust by using a shelter.
7.3.2.6. High ambient temperatures influence the maximum allowable current in cables.
Heat buildup within current-carrying conductors will not dissipate rapidly in high-
temperature environments. Therefore, current-carrying ability of conductors must be
reduced when installed in areas of high ambient temperature since an excessive increase
in cable temperatures will cause insulation failure. High ambient temperatures also affect
protective devices such as fuses, fused cutouts, time delay fuses, circuit breakers and
motor control contactors. Additionally, sand and dust tend to build up in these electrical
components causing operational problems. Finally, the standard methods for power plant
or distribution system grounding will not offer adequate or safe grounding because of the
extremely poor electrical conductivity of sand, sandy soils, or rocky soils when dry.
Figure 7.2. Generator Positioned to Allow Prevailing Winds to Disperse Heat

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 107
7.3.3. Electrical Distribution. Initial electrical power is normally provided to command

posts, squadron operations facilities, control tower, communications systems and other
mission-essential facilities using mobile, low-voltage MEP generators. Once the high-voltage
power plant and distribution system are installed, electrical power can be provided to non-
essential facilities, and the MEP generators can be used for emergency backup. A typical
electrical distribution system for an 1100-, 2200-, and 3300-person camp is illustrated in
Figure 7.3 through Figure 7.5 During construction, the base civil engineer may make an
operational risk management decision to leave some or all of the high-voltage cable on the
surface if soil conditions, time or equipment constraints prevent its immediate burial. But,
engineers must take other measures to mitigate the risk of personnel injury or damage to the
cables. At a minimum, bury or otherwise protect cables crossing roads and high-traffic
walkways. Keep detailed maps of underground lines and the locations of splices and ensure
utilities and communications personnel are aware of the layout. Locally constructed overhead
primary distribution systems are not recommended because of the difficulty in designing and
constructing a safe system given limited available materials and engineer labor.
Figure 7.3. Electric Distribution for an 1100-Person Camp (Typical)

108 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 109
7.3.4. Power Conditioning. If power conditioning is required, the user must provide this
capability with the specific equipment that requires conditioned power. Most BEAR assets
work well with most types of incoming power, and at worst ―hiccup‖ a bit when the power
drops out or fluctuates. Computers, on the other hand, can corrupt data or stop working when
subjected to power fluctuation. Equipment such as power supply units, surge/spike filter
power boards, power filters and uninterrupted power supplies may all be used to overcome
surges, sags, spikes and outages.
7.3.5. Host Nation Power. A major assumption often included in exercise scenarios—and in
this chapter—is that host nation electric power will not be available for, or is not compatible
with, bare base power demands. However, many countries do have limited electric power
distribution networks that would be useful when troops start to build the base. If host nation
power is available, plan to use it to supplement BEAR generation capability; this will vastly
reduce fuel consumption. The base must, however, maintain its own internal generation and
distribution system in case host nation power is cut off. Most power grids outside the US and
Canada use power generated at 50 cycles or hertz (Hz), single- or 3-phase, which can be used
in many cases to power electric lights and heating elements. However, only equipment
specifically designed as compatible with 50 Hz power should be connected. Most AF
equipment and utilities are designed for 60 Hz, and operating at 50 Hz will cause permanent
damage. Table 7.1 lists electric power characteristics available in various countries around
the world. For additional quick reference, Attachment 2 lists the diversity of electric power
and its characteristics in various countries of SWA. It should be noted that the quality of
110 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
power in SWA is generally poor, frequency stability and voltage regulations are often
substandard and high-level voltage transients are possible.
Table 7.1. Air Base Commercial Power Supplies

3-Phase System 1-Phase System
Country
Voltage Wire Frequency Voltage Wire Frequency
Belgium 220/380 4 50 Hz 110/220 2 50 Hz
Canada 550 or 220 4 60 Hz 220 2 60 Hz
Denmark 220/380 4 50 Hz * ** 50 Hz
France 220/380 4 50 Hz 220 2 50 Hz
Germany 220/380 4 50 Hz 220 ** 50 Hz
Greece 220/380 4 50 Hz * 2 50 Hz
220/380 or
Italy 4 50 Hz 220 2 50 Hz
127/220
Netherlands 220/380 4 50 Hz 220 2 50 Hz
220 3 50 Hz 220
Norway 2 50 Hz
220/380 4 50 Hz 240
Portugal 220/380 4 50 Hz 120/240 2 50 Hz
United
240/416 4 50 Hz ** 50 Hz
Kingdom
120/208 or
United States 4 60 Hz 3 60 Hz
277/480
* 1-Phase supply generally possible.
** 2 Plus Ground
NOTE: Voltages on 3-phase systems shown as 220/380; for example, indicate 220 volt line to
neutral and 380 volt line to line.
7.4. Low Voltage Electrical System. The urgency of most bare base deployments dictates that
electrical utility lines and distribution panels be provided on the ground on short notice. This
type system depends solely on the use of low-voltage generators. It is not sized to accept air
conditioning loads, however it can provide lighting and duplex convenience outlets for billeting,
organizational shop, administrative, office and command-level tents. These type systems depend
primarily on 30-kW and 60-kW generators. Low-voltage electrical distribution systems provide
open loop (one path of power flow to the load), 120/208-volt, 3-phase power.
7.4.1. Electrical Computation. Computations of generator demands and feeder peak loads are
based on 4,500 watts or 4.5-kW per tent. That product is then multiplied by a 0.7
diversification factor. MEP generators are capable of 10 percent overloads for several hours
at a time and should be able to handle peak loads. If the load exceeds the generator’s
capability, low priority branch circuits can be shed until a safe operating range is achieved.
7.4.2. Generators. A 550-person population can normally be powered by either two 60-kW
or four 30-kW generator sets. Running generators is a labor-intensive operation. Engine
failures and breakdowns will inevitably occur, and response and repair times will be
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 111
lengthened due to field conditions. Fueling generators will be a constant task since typical
day tanks must be refilled approximately every six to eight hours. Ideally, refilling generators
should be accomplished using a refueling vehicle, but under contingency conditions, it may
be necessary to resort to towed fuel trailers or even ―jerry‖ cans.
7.5. High Voltage Electrical System. The high-voltage electrical system is basically composed
of three major components: power generation, high-voltage primary distribution (4,160-volt) and
low-voltage secondary distribution (120/208-volt).
7.5.1. Power Generation. In many cases primary power will be obtained from 750-kW
diesel-driven electric generator sets, like the MEP-012A (Figure 7.6), providing 3-phase,
4,160-volt, 60-cycle power. The MEP-012A generator is towable by most bare base vehicles
and is air transportable. Normally, three generators are required to provide power to a 1,100-
person base and a fourth generator is required to provide periodic rotational maintenance
capability. These generators permit routine maintenance to be performed on all units on a
preplanned basis without having to purposely shut down major portions of the base electrical
system. Obviously, the number of generators required will depend on the mission and
population at the particular location. Also supporting the power generation system is a
predetermined set of spares and consumable used for performing required maintenance and
routine operations.
7.5.2. Installation. Procedures for setting up power generation plants and primary and
secondary distribution can be found in AFH 10-222 Volume 5.
7.5.3. Generator Plants. The controls for the generators are normally assembled on a panel
located inside a small shelter system, an expandable shelter container, or TEMPER tent. Plan
on manning generator plants around the clock with at least a two-shift operation. Electrical
personnel can augment power production personnel in this regard. Also plan on providing a
generator training program for personnel not fully familiar with the operation of the 750-kW
units. Communications squadrons usually deploy with their own power production personnel.
It is generally useful to try absorbing these personnel into the plant’s operation to help spread
the workload over the entire power mission. Recommend the forward headquarters be
contacted as soon as possible for sustainment manning once the total manpower requirements
are determined. In addition, put consumable parts on order as soon as possible to start the
logistics flow. Use the item listing attached to the support and spare boxes as a guide.
112 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 7.6. MEP-012A 750-kW Generator
7.5.4. Generator Fuel System. 10,000-gallon-size fuel bladders are provided for generator
sets (Figure 7.7). The objective is to have approximately a 7-day fuel supply at each power
generation plant. Ensure the fuel bladders are positioned equal to or higher than the fuel
distribution manifolds. Fuel berms or dikes should not be built higher than necessary to
contain the contents of the bladder in the event of a collapse. Excessively high berm walls
pose siphoning and gravity feed issues that are hard to overcome in a field environment.
Refer to AFH 10-222, Volume 1, AFPAM 23-221, Fuels Logistics Planning, and T.O.
37A12-15-1, Collapsible Fuel Bladders, for other fuel dike or berm construction details.
Where feasible, convert temporary bladders to above ground steel tanks for long duration
deployments.
Figure 7.7. Generators with 10,000-Gallon Fuel Storage Bladder
7.5.5. Interim Power Unit (IPU). The IPU is fielded to supplement BEAR high power UTC
shortfalls. The versatile IPU has a prime power rating of 1100kW and provides 3-phase,
2,400-/4,160-volt 60-cycle power. It consists of a generator set housed inside a 40-foot ISO
container mounted on a 40-foot trailer (Figure 7.8). The unit has sound-reduction features,
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 113
switch gear, battery and starter components, shore power components, and a 300-gallon fuel
tank. It has remote control capability and weighs approximately 52,000 pounds.
Figure 7.8. Interim Power Unit (IPU)
7.5.6. Electrical Computation. The layout of facilities (including maximum dispersed

distance) should be compatible with the electrical distribution system assets available in the
BEAR equipment packages. If deployment is to a low-threat area where maximum dispersal
is not required, minimum spacing distances may be used between facilities. This non-
dispersed pattern will reduce cable requirements considerably. In contrast, however, when
facility layout is widely dispersed due to terrain features or other constraints, it may be
necessary to have a sufficient stock of extra cables of different lengths so that some
secondary circuits can be extended. AFH 10-222, Volume 5 describes the power
requirements for each element within a facility group, presents example feeder schedules and
shows schematics of a basic electrical distribution system. The feeder schedule provides
examples of the various electrical loads of different SDCs and methods of supplying power
to air conditioners and to mobile electric power, where necessary.
7.5.6.1. Computation of electric feeder loads is accomplished using data from shelter
configuration agencies and applying appropriate diversification factors. All loads are 3-
phase. The total load for each SDC is determined by first adding all the shelter loads;
second, diversifying this total by multiplying by seven-tenths (0.7); and lastly, adding
either the heater or air conditioner load, whichever is larger (the heater and air
conditioner should not run simultaneously). The resulting load is the total kVA load on
the SDC. A quicker way to estimate requirements is to figure one SDC per every eight to
twelve facilities (take into account that shelter occupants will invariably install and use
personal electrical appliances).
7.5.6.2. If power is required in remote areas of the base, some facilities can be satisfied
by: (1) running power from an adjacent shelter exterior receptacle, (2) fabricating a
junction box to service one or more of the facilities simultaneously from one 60-amp
connector on the SDC, or (3) using the generator on a TF-2 light cart (Figure 7.9) or
similar lighting unit.
114 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 7.9. TF-2 Light Carts
7.5.6.3. The RALS also depend on power from a SDC or other source such as a remote
area generator. Area lighting (flightline, supply areas, aerial port facilities) can be
accomplished using a RALS (Figure 7.10 and Figure 7.11). The RALS provides a
flexible solution to support illumination requirements. It features 13 telescoping poles, 12
of which are positionable through the use of ―left side‖ and ―right side‖ cable loop
assemblies emanating from the RALS container. The thirteenth pole is attached to the
RALS container. Each pole is 15 feet high with one single 150-watt, 16,000-lumen, high-
pressure sodium (HPS) lamp. Poles are positioned 125 feet apart on a flat plate with
outriggers. ―Left side/right side‖ lighting string length is 750 feet per side (comprised of
two 375 feet RALS loop cord sections), for a total string length of 1,500 feet.
Figure 7.10. Remote Area Lighting System (RALS)

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 115
Figure 7.11. RALS Deployed
7.5.6.4. Water purification plants are shown on the base layout plan. Once these plants
have been sited, an electrical installation team will determine exact locations of SDCs
and MEP generators that support the water plants.
7.5.6.5. Sewage lift stations and treatment plants are indicated on the base water and
sanitary layout plans. Electrical power must be provided from the nearest SDC.
7.6. Grounding. In any electric power generation and distribution system, appropriate electrical
grounding of equipment such as generator sets, transformers, junction boxes and bus bars is
generally very important to ensure safe and reliable operation of the system. Traditional guidance
requires 25 ohms resistance to ground, or less, at all normally grounded locations. However, the
nature of the soils in many locations will not permit this level of assured grounding with
traditional ground rods or expedient techniques. In dry, rocky, or sandy regions, 25 ohms or less
grounding to earth can only be obtained using more involved and equipment-intensive methods
that may not be available to bare base engineers.
7.7. Future BEAR Electrical Power Generation and Distribution System. The AF is
exploring several options as a ―future‖ system of electrical power distribution as a replacement
for 750kW generators. The new system will support contingency operations ranging in size from
relatively small deployments to large operations of total electrical support. The US Army is
currently using a prime power unit, the MEP-PU-810A, which was tested but not fielded by the
AF. Testing and fielding of a final, deployable system may take several more years. In the
meantime, the IPU addressed in paragraph 7.5.5. is being fielded to fill any BEAR high power
UTC shortfalls.
116 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Chapter 8
WATER UTILITY SYSTEMS
8.1. Introduction. In bare base operations it is absolutely essential to determine if a source of

water, that can be made potable, is available before consideration is given to almost any other
requirement.
8.2. Overview. This chapter addresses the sources, uses, treatment and distribution of water in
arid and non-arid environments. Since water is generally scarce in an arid environment, it must
be used wisely. Consequently, a portion of this chapter will be devoted to describing proper
water supply and use in the context of a worst case situation—a bare base in an arid
environment. The final portion of this chapter is on water system equipment and procedures.
8.3. Water Sources.
8.3.1. Non-Arid Environments. In non-arid (temperate, arctic and tropical) environments,
water is generally readily available in streams, rivers and lakes. The water usually requires
only clarification and disinfection to make it potable. Groundwater is also abundant and often
can be used immediately after it is disinfected. However, groundwater near industrial areas
should be tested for the presence of hazardous wastes and all water must be examined for the
presence of human waste.
8.3.2. Arid Environments. Probably the most distinguishing characteristic of arid areas is the
lack of water. Surface water is limited to a few rivers and intermittent streams that benefit
from sparse rainfall. Except for limited areas, primarily along the coast, groundwater is also
scarce and is generally unfit to drink because of the dissolved solids content. Because of the
widespread unsanitary practices, all water in underdeveloped countries, no matter what the
source, should be considered to be contaminated with disease-causing organisms until proven
otherwise. As a result, a contingency force must be prepared to produce its own potable
water and must constantly strive to conserve this mission-essential resource, regardless of the
water’s quality and ultimate use.
8.3.3. Seawater. Seawater obtained offshore at a location removed from a sewage outfall is
normally relatively clean. It is salty and contains suspended particles of sand and bacteria.
Seawater may be used without adverse effects for electrical grounding, housekeeping tasks,
firefighting (although not in fire vehicles), some construction tasks, showering and
laundering. It should not be used where continued use could corrode critical metal surfaces.
When used for showers, laundries and personal hygiene purposes, it must be disinfected.
8.3.4. Brackish Water. Surface water and groundwater containing 500 to 15,000 parts per
million (ppm) of dissolved solids are called brackish. The solid content is much less than
seawater (35,000 ppm) but is high enough to give the water a distinctively salty taste (Figure
8.1). Brackish water may contain dissolved salts. This makes the water difficult to lather
(forms curds) and, when heated, leaves hard mineral deposits on the wetted surface of the
container. As with seawater, brackish water may be used for construction, electrical
grounding, firefighting and general housekeeping tasks. It is not generally recommended for
those purposes where it is to be heated to near-boiling temperatures. Additionally, some
aquifers may be contaminated by oil. Other less common contaminants, such as ammonia,
arsenic and radioactive isotopes, may be encountered.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 117
Figure 8.1. Dissolved Solids
8.3.5. Freshwater. Freshwater (less than 500 ppm of dissolved salts) has no apparent salty
taste, but when found on the surface (river, stream, oasis), may contain suspended materials,
dissolved minerals, fecal matter, bacteria and other disease-causing organisms. When
obtained from local wells or the municipal water supply systems, freshwater may appear
clean with no significant odor. Despite its appearance, such water sources may contain
dissolved minerals, salts and bacteria. Disinfection through chlorination is often the only
treatment required to make the local water drinkable. On the other hand, drinking freshwater
containing significant amounts of dissolved salts may produce a laxative effect.
8.3.5.1. Freshwater can be used for most cleaning and nonconsumptive purposes without
purification. Conventional water purification procedures are normally adequate to make
most freshwater sources potable; however, when the dissolved solids content is too high,
water should be purified by reverse osmosis treatment. To reemphasize a point made
earlier; do not make the mistake of assuming that a particular water supply is safe. Some
countries do not treat water to the standards required by the AF. To safeguard the health
of the deployed forces, indigenous water sources must be tested before being declared
suitable for human consumption.
8.3.5.2. Surface freshwater sources can also be a major health hazard. These waters,
primarily rivers, often serve the indigenous population for the disposal of all forms of
wastes (including human waste) and for that reason is a source of pathogenic organisms.
Surface freshwater also harbors a variety of other organisms that may infect humans
through bodily contact with the water (Figure 8.2).
118 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 8.2. Surface Freshwater Sources May Contain Infectious Organisms
8.3.5.3. Drinking water from a source such as depicted above is obviously dangerous.
Even more health threatening are the blood flukes (small worms spawned by several
types of snails) that cause a disabling disease known as Schistosomiasis. Prevalent in
Africa and SWA, these immature worms (Schistosomes, Figure 8.3) are released from
snails’ bodies into the water. The worm penetrates the skin of people who are in the water
to bath, swim, or do their laundry. Once in the body, these worms block circulation and
cause scarring in the liver, bladder and intestines, giving rise to severe swelling.
Schistosomiasis can occur in less than 30 days. Treatment for this disease is very painful
and, to make matters worse, there is no vaccine for Schistosomiasis.
Figure 8.3. Schistosomes Worms
8.4. Water Use. Water consumption is based on the size of the deployed force and its
consumption requirements. Joint Publication 4-01, Joint Bulk Petroleum and Water Doctrine,
describes essential water requirements as: drinking, personal hygiene, field feeding, medical
treatment, heat casualty treatment, personal contamination control, patient decontamination in
CBRN environments, and in arid regions, vehicle and aircraft maintenance. When requirements
exceed production, all but essential consumption should be reduced. After performing a
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 119
preventive medicine risk assessment, commanders may decide to use nonpotable water for
activities that generally use potable water (e.g. showering, laundry, etc). Various AF engineer
panels have recommended that when mobile water treatment and distribution assets are used, the
water-use planning factor should be 30 gallons per person per day (gpppd) at a bare base. If a
permanent water treatment plant and adequate storage capability are available at the beddown
location, a 60-gpppd factor may be used. A breakdown of the 30-/60-gpppd planning factor, by
function, is shown in Table 8.1. A description of each of the functions follows the table as well
as a discussion of ice requirements. Depending on location, climate and other factors,
commanders may determine that these quantities need to be reduced to conserve water. Note:
keep in mind that water consumption may be affected by considerations other than military
populations. For instance, consumption by host nation labor forces, enemy prisoners of war or
displaced persons (e.g. refugees). Planners should be aware of requirements and obligations that
may arise from various international protocols, agreements and conventions at specific locations.
Table 8.1. Water Use Planning Factors
Functions Water Usage Factor (gal/person/day)

Using Using Fixed Water
Potable Water
BEAR Assets Treatment Plant
Drinking 4.0 4.0
Personal Hygiene 3.0 3.0
Shower 5.0 15.0
Food Preparation 4.0 5.0
Hospital 1.0 2.0
Heat Treatment 1.0 1.0
Using Using Fixed Water
Nonpotable Water
BEAR Assets Treatment Plant
Laundry 2.0 14.0
Construction 2.0 2.0
Graves Registration 0.5 0.2
Vehicle Operations 0.5 1.8
Aircraft Operations 2.0 3.0
Firefighting 2.0 4.0
10% Loss Factor 3.0 5.0
Total 30.0 60.0

8.4.1. Potable Water.
8.4.1.1. Drinking. Approximately four gallons of cooled drinking water will be provided
each individual per day. Those engaged in strenuous physical activities will normally
require this amount of water to maintain their strength during the hottest period of the
120 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
day. Those who are less active will drink less. Under all circumstances, everyone needs
to develop a habit of drinking frequently during the day, whether thirsty or not. Every
contingency since Operation DESERT STORM has made providing packaged or bottled
water almost a standard operating procedure. While this is one quality of life factor that
should not be deleted, there are drawbacks to using bottled water, including extensive
shipping and handling. Many people are not in the habit of drinking a lot of water. It’s a
hard habit to learn, but one that can be directly related to mission capability. Practice the
following tips:
8.4.1.1.1. Drink extra water before starting any mission or hard work.
8.4.1.1.2. Drink small quantities frequently.
8.4.1.1.3. Drink water even if not thirsty.
8.4.1.1.4. Refill water jugs and canteens at every opportunity.
8.4.1.2. Personal Hygiene. Approximately 3 gallons of water are to be provided for
personal hygiene each day. Personal hygiene should consist of brushing teeth, shaving,
and washing face and hands. It is allocated in a contingency environment in the following
manner: brushing teeth with a brief rinse 1/3 gallon; shaving (once a day) and washing
2/3 gallon; based on three times per day, the total requirement would be 3 gallons per day
(gpd). In austere environments washing three times a day and shaving each day may not
be possible; however, the minimum planning factor of 2.7 gpd should be used. Electric
shavers are very popular and may help to reduce a small portion of the personal hygiene
water requirement.
8.4.1.3. Shower. In order to maintain the health and mental well being of personnel at
bare base locations, a daily shower is recommended. However, prior to all BEAR assets
being operational or when source water is limited, a time limit may need to be established
for the length of showers. There may be occasions when bacterially safe nonpotable
water, such as from a river or stream, can be used by contingency forces. In these
instances, approval to use this water without treatment should be obtained from the unit
medical officer. The BEAR showerhead flow rate is 1.5 gallons per minute, and a daily
2–minute shower would require 3.0 gpppd.
8.4.1.4. Food Preparation. The amount of water used for food preparation varies with the
type of meal being served. In arid regions, two ―B‖ type meals and one ―C‖ type meal
will be served daily. Preparation of these meals will require 0.7 gpppd. Another 0.3
gpppd are required due to additions of tilt grilles, coffee pots and steam tables in the
BEAR 550 Kitchen. And 3 gpppd are required for kitchen cleanup. The total water
requirement for food preparation is 4 gpppd.
8.4.1.5. Hospital. The hospital consumption planning factor is 1.0 gpppd. This figure
comes from a projection of 65 gpd for each patient and 10 gpd per hospital staff member.
These rather significant quantities of water are based on daily baths for the medical staff
and the majority of patients; changes of uniforms and bedding each day; and the various
general sanitation, food preparation and housekeeping tasks accomplished each day in
support of patients and the hospital staff. See Chapter 12 of this volume for additional
information on support of bare base medical facilities.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 121
8.4.1.6. Heat Treatment. Approximately 1.0 gpppd is planned for use in the treatment of
heat casualties. Heat casualties are normally treated by submersion in cool water and by
forced intake of liquids.
8.4.2. Nonpotable Water.
8.4.2.1. Laundry. About 5.0 gpppd are allocated to launder individual and organizational
clothing. Although potable water is not required, consider the constraints imposed by the
use of untreated water. First, hard water not only reduces the cleaning power of laundry
detergents, but may also deposit insoluble residue on the clothing being laundered.
Second, brackish and saltwater rapidly corrode metal components of the laundry system.
However, both problems can be overcome or at least tolerated for a short period of time
in an austere environment. Saltwater detergents, developed primarily for shipboard use
by the Navy, are available commercially and usually in the DOD inventory. Corrosion
tolerance is essentially a trade-off between immediate requirements and increased
equipment wear and subsequent maintenance work. The BEAR Self-Help Laundry is
made up of standard commercial washers and dryers. According to the manufacturer, the
new and more efficient commercial washers use 46 gallons per wash cycle. To allow for
locally purchased washers that might be less efficient than the BEAR units, 49 gallons
per wash cycle was used as the planning factor. It is estimated that two washings per
person per week will sustain sanitary conditions and provide for morale and welfare in a
bare base environment. Therefore, the recommended planning factor for laundry with a
fixed water treatment plant is 14 gpppd.
8.4.2.2. Construction. Approximately 1 gpppd is planned for construction. Concrete
mixes for most contingency field applications can use nonpotable quality water. In
general, satisfactory concrete can be mixed using natural surface water, brackish water
and seawater, or any water that is free of oil and suspended organic matter, especially
sugar. Brackish or seawater should not be used however in reinforced concrete, because
the steel reinforcement will corrode. Depending on the type of cement used, curing time
may be extended. Also, sewage effluent that has undergone the equivalent of secondary
treatment is suitable for concrete. There may be some occasions to use wastewater as a
dust control agent.
8.4.2.3. Graves Registration. A planning factor of 0.5 gpppd is used for graves
registration. This involves the handling of the remains, which demand the application of
good sanitation practices, especially among the graves registration personnel. Some water
is used for washing the remains’ hands and feet for identification purposes, but most is
used for hygiene. Handlers are required to wash and disinfect themselves frequently.
While this planning factor usage is low, the total quantity set aside for this task should be
sufficient.
8.4.2.4. Vehicle Operations. Use 0.5 gpppd in planning for vehicle operations. Water
will be used primarily for radiator coolant makeup. Washing vehicles should be kept to a
minimum to conserve water. However, be prepared to increase this amount at facilities
with limited hard-top roadways, FOD-prevention measures may require that vehicle
undercarriages and wheel-wells be washed at entry control points (ECPs) before entering
flightline areas.
122 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
8.4.2.5. Aircraft Operations. Aircraft operations will require 2.0 gpppd. The water will
be used primarily for cleaning engine intakes and to prevent engine damage from
ingested sand. Water will also be used to clean other surfaces that could be damaged by
abrasion.
8.4.2.6. Firefighting. A minimum of 2.0 gpppd should be stored strictly for firefighting
purposes.
8.4.3. Ice Requirements. Hot weather and strenuous physical activity cause the body’s
temperature to increase and the body sheds this increase by producing sweat. This natural
cooling system is efficient, and the body continues to function well if its water losses are
replaced. When not replaced, dehydration occurs and with it comes a corresponding loss in
body function efficiency. If dehydration is allowed to progress, an individual can quickly
become incapacitated and then must be treated for heat stroke.
8.4.3.1. The normal thirst sensation is not a reliable indicator of the water requirement. It
will be necessary, therefore, for individuals to drink water frequently during the hot and
most active part of the day. It may be necessary to cool the water to at least 90 degrees
Fahrenheit (60 degrees Fahrenheit is more desirable) to make it more palatable. If water
cannot be sufficiently cooled for consumption, then it is important to alter the taste. For
example, when added to water most powered drink mixes are generally palatable at 85
degrees Fahrenheit; however, plain water is not. Water that is converted to ice to cool
drinking liquids will more likely be consumed and is considered part of each individual’s
daily allocation.
8.4.3.2. The dining hall will dispense 0.5 gallons of water per person each day as
beverage during meals and another 0.09 gallons (12 ounces) per person of water
converted into ice to cool that beverage. Dining halls will have their own dedicated ice
machines.
8.4.3.3. About half of the base population will perform duties away from the areas where
drinking fountains are available; therefore, drinking water or other beverages may be
transported to job sites in 5- and 10-gallon insulated containers. It takes 2.88 gallons of
water or beverage per person per day to meet these requirements. It takes another 0.53
gallons of water converted to ice (4.4 pounds) to cool a 75 degrees Fahrenheit liquid to a
desired 60 degrees Fahrenheit for three to four hours when the ambient temperature is
120 degrees Fahrenheit.
8.4.3.4. The ice needed by medical treatment facilities located at the bare base represents
an additive requirement. The quantity of ice to be allocated to each type of medical
facility is addressed in Chapter 12, Table 12.2.
8.4.3.5. Ice requirements for the mortuary holding area (for graves registration when
mechanical refrigeration is not available) are 1.7 pounds per person per day (0.2 gallons
of water) in arid climates.
8.5. Water Purification. The primary water purification equipment item used in bare base
operations is the ROWPU. It can produce potable water from almost any water source.
8.5.1. With the formation of the Rapid Deployment Force in the late-1970s, an increased
need arose for water purification equipment that could produce potable water from seawater.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 123
To meet this need, the AF fielded a 600-gallon-per-hour (gph) ROWPU, able to produce
potable water from either seawater or freshwater (Figure 8.4). While this particular ROWPU
was rated to produce 600 gph of potable water from seawater, it has produced up to 900 gph
from freshwater without over-taxing the unit or causing excess wear to the membranes.
Today, larger capacity ROWPUs that can produce 1500 gph or more of treated water are
replacing the 600-gph ROWPU in the BEAR inventory (Figure 8.5).
8.5.2. ROWPUs normally do not come with their own power source, however electrical
power is required to pressurize the water for the reverse osmosis process. The lower the
dissolved solids content of the water, the lower the power requirement. For instance,
purifying fresh water will consume less energy than purifying seawater.
8.5.3. The temperature of the feed water also affects the water purification capability. Very
cold or very warm feed water will decrease the output and shorten the life of the purification
membranes. When the temperature of the feed water exceeds 96 degrees Fahrenheit, plan on
producing less water than usual. The dissolved solids concentration in raw water also
influences the production capability. For additional details of the various ROWPUs and the
BEAR water distribution system, see AFH 10-222, Volume 9, Reverse Osmosis Water
Purification Unit Set-Up and Operation.
Figure 8.4. 600-GPH Reverse Osmosis Water Purification Unit (ROWPU)

124 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 8.5. 1500-GPH ROWPU
8.6. Water Purification Plants. When several water purification units must be used to meet the
water requirements of a given base population, the individual units can be consolidated into
water purification plants. In low threat areas where enemy attack is unlikely, one central water
plant is most efficient. Less manpower and logistics support are required to operate one plant
than two separate units that produce an equal amount of treated water. Where an enemy attack is
likely, multiple water plants should be established to enhance survivability. The vital need of
water at a bare base justifies sacrificing the economy of operation in a high-threat area. No more
than two water purification plants are recommended; one should be located near the billeting
area, the other near the flightline.
8.7. Water Storage. A bare base should have the capacity to store a 5-day supply of water. The
storage capacity should consist of 60 percent potable water and 40 percent untreated water based
on the 30-gpppd requirement. With three 20,000-gallon water bladders and four 3,000 gallon
bladders, there are 72,000 gallons of potable water storage capacity in a typical 550-person
package. This does not include the potential storage capacity for the source run (20,000-gallon),
water production (52,000-gallon) and extension packages (6,000-gallon) which may also be
attached. Using BEAR assets, a bare base of 3,300 personnel will have over 600,000 gallons of
storage capability. This potential capacity exceeds the 5-day storage planning factor. At bases
using two purification plants, the storage capacity should be fairly evenly split between the two
plants.
8.8. Freeze Protection. For extreme cold-temperature operation, water purification units may
be placed in a small shelter and 3,000-gallon tanks in separate tents. Where practical, two 3,000-
gallon tanks can be enclosed within one tent. When necessary, the M-80 or WH-400 water heater
can be used to circulate water through the tanks to prevent freezing (this may not be necessary
when using the BEAR water distribution loop, since it has a circulating pump that will
continuously move water into bladders). To minimize damage, hoses not being used to distribute
water should be disconnected, drained and rolled up.
8.9. Wastewater Removal. Wastewater (or gray water) disposal is generally handled by
electric-driven pumps (Figure 8.6), which are provided in each shower, kitchen and laundry
location. Wastewater lines of a lightweight, flat hose are used to carry the water away from the
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 125
inhabited area to natural drainage or to a waste disposal system. Even future latrine systems may
require manually turning on pumps and using a wash-down spray wand to push heavy solids into
the pump for disposal.
Figure 8.6. Electric-Driven Pump
8.10. Water Cooling. Water stored in some locations in SWA has been recorded at over 120
degrees Fahrenheit. While the effects of such temperature on human consumption have not been
fully documented, it is obvious this water temperature must be brought within the range of 60 to
70 degrees Fahrenheit in order to encourage personal consumption and to avoid dehydration.
Also, some cooling may be required prior to use for showers.
8.10.1. Several methods of providing cooled drinking water are available. Where water is
already on hand, water coolers can be used. A centralized distribution point for chilled water
and ice should be located at one of the water purification plants to provide for people who do
not otherwise have access to water. Insulated containers and mobile water chillers are used to
provide cooled drinking water to persons in remote areas of the base. The number of water
coolers required for a specific base population is relative to the chilled water output of a
given unit. Consider, for example, a water cooler, that provides 15 gph of cooled water at a
temperature of 68 degrees Fahrenheit when the ambient air temperature is 120 degrees
Fahrenheit and the supply water temperature is 110 degrees Fahrenheit. This cooler would
theoretically cool 360 gallons of water per day. But to do this, the unit would have to operate
continuously and would not account for a backlog of people who require a drink
simultaneously during periods of peak shelter occupancy or following mass physical exercise
or work. Therefore, the unit should be derated at least 30 percent or to an output of 252
gallons per day. Since each person should consume up to four gallons per day, one water
cooler will service approximately 63 people. Water coolers should have a downward water
flow, allowing water to be drawn to fill canteens and drinking containers without excessive
waste. Since water fountains are not provided as part of the BEAR package, consider local
purchase of suitable units.
126 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
8.10.2. It may be necessary to provide other methods to cool drinking water that will be
consumed in remote work areas. For on-base personnel, potable chilled water points with
provisions for making ice can be established at a selected water purification plant. For remote
areas or off-base personnel, chilled water and ice can also be taken in insulated water
containers to work sites.
8.10.3. The mobile water chiller (Figure 8.7) is also used to provide cooled drinking water
at remote sites. The mobile water chiller mounts on the M-149 series water trailer. It is
capable of cooling 120 degrees Fahrenheit water to 60 degrees Fahrenheit at a rate of 800
gallons per day. Assuming that half of the work force will require half of their daily drinking
water cooled in this fashion, a requirement will exist to cool 1-gallon per person per day
using mobile water chillers mounted on M-149 water trailers. Two M-149 water trailers and
two chillers are adequate for each 1,100-person increment. For deployments greater than
2,200 people, two spare trailers and two chiller units should be included.
Figure 8.7. 400-Gallon ―Water Buffalo‖ Trailer With Chiller Attached
8.11. Ice Plants. To supplement chilled water requirements, approximately 4.4 pounds of ice
per person per day should be provided. Ideally, an ice plant should be set up at one of the water
purification plants to support the base populace. Currently, however, ice-making machines
capable of meeting overall ice requirements are not part of the BEAR inventory. Limited ice
making capability is available at dining facilities but this is primarily for food service support.
There are ice machines included with the BEAR 550 kitchen. Table 8.2 shows ice requirements
for initial bare base populations and Figure 8.8 shows some typical large capacity ice machines.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 127
Table 8.2. Basic Ice Machine Requirements

Ice Requirements
Base Population
(pounds/day)
550 2,420
1,100 4,840
2,200 9,680
3,300 14,520
Figure 8.8. Typical Ice Machines
8.12. Water Conservation. As a culture, Americans generally do not use water sparingly.
Consequently, part of the training before deploying to arid regions must include instruction on
water conservation. Such training should be accompanied by measures that make water less
available. This will reduce the temptation to return to wasteful habits. While everyone in the
chain of command must assist in the conservation effort, command emphasis is the backbone of
water conservation. Additionally, planners must be aware of the need to save water and must
learn to take advantage of opportunities to reuse wastewater for other purposes.
8.12.1. Planners play a major role in conserving water through proper siting of activities and
facilities. For example, activities that require large amounts of potable water should be
located near water terminals and tank farms to minimize transportation requirements and
losses during handling. In addition, activities/facilities that can use nonpotable water should
be sited, when possible, near those that generate wastewater. For example, wastewater from
laundry and shower units could be used for mixing concrete, compacting soil and controlling
dust.
8.12.2. Planners should also consider using seawater or brackish water. Both sources can be
used for concrete, soil cement, soil compaction and dust control. The two latter tasks are
likely to constitute major civil engineer efforts. The existing road network at most bare bases
is limited and will require expansion, and the rapid deterioration of existing and newly
established roads from heavy traffic will demand continuous maintenance. Also, nonpotable
128 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
water can be used in the decontamination of certain CBRN-contaminated equipment, should

the need arise.
8.12.3. Much can be learned from some of the water-conserving habits of the region’s
inhabitants. Everyone operating in a water-scarce, arid environment should observe the basic
water conservation principles listed below. Desert dwellers, particularly the nomadic tribes,
have relied on similar water discipline for centuries.
8.12.3.1. Make it a responsibility shared by everyone to conserve water by avoiding
wasteful practices. Also, create a shared awareness that there is a useful purpose for
wastewater or potable water that is hot and therefore unpalatable.
8.12.3.2. Place command emphasis on water conservation and water reuse.
8.12.3.3. Protect potable water from all sources of contamination, including sand and
dust.
8.12.3.4. Do not dispose of water of any type without considering alternative uses.
8.12.3.5. Prohibit water thievery from storage containers and pipelines and the
indiscriminate use of expedient showers.
8.12.4. The use of water of lesser quality is also a viable method of conservation. In SWA,
where the dissolved solids content of water can be high, any opportunity to use local water
and avoid the costly reverse osmosis purification process has both logistic and economic
advantages. These benefits are most apparent when it comes to water for bare base
construction tasks. Untreated seawater or brackish water is usually quite satisfactory for
construction that is only intended for short-term use.
8.13. Legacy and Future Water Systems. Until recently, engineers deployed and trained on
bare base water distribution systems developed in the 1980s. Many of the components were
developed specifically for military bare base use, but the basic system layout was an industry
standard. The design required specific UV-treated piping and connectors that greatly increased
the cost and added labor hours to the setup time.
8.13.1. Lessons learned from Operations DESERT STORM and PROVIDE HOPE, and
more recently in Operations ENDURING FREEDOM and IRAQI FREEDOM have
broadened AF knowledge of creating water systems that are more efficient for real-world
operations. Changes in camp layouts, efficient contract purchasing methods and more precise
water usage estimates have all contributed to development of better systems. Changes in
technology have vastly improved material, while commercial inventory and vendor
availability have made it more efficient and less costly to procure sustainable equipment.
Consequently, the AF has developed a new BEAR water system. The new system combines
proven characteristics from legacy Harvest assets with new technology to create a system
suitable for current and future operations.
8.13.2. The BEAR water system is intended to fulfill potable water and wastewater recovery
needs at austere locations. The water system is modular in design and consist of a series of
pumping, piping, and storage equipment; applicable fittings; and other components such as
fluid control valves. It is capable of drawing source water, purifying, storing, and then
distributing potable water to user facilities. The water system provides water to support
kitchens, latrines, showers, laundries, and other bare base facilities and recovers the
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 129
wastewater for appropriate disposal. One complete water system is comprised of five distinct
subsystems: Source Run, Water Production (1500 ROWPU or 600 ROWPU), 550 Initial, 550
Follow-on, and Industrial Operations & Flightline Extension. From a bare base perspective,
the new water system is easier to set up, maintain, and be trained on and is more efficient
than older systems. From an overall program perspective, the system is easier to store, takes
up less airlift space, is easier to procure (less parts) and should prove to be cost-effective in
the long run. The AF is constantly looking for ways to be lighter, leaner and more effective
in deploying forces for expeditionary operations. The new BEAR Water System is a
substantial complement to that effort. See T.O. 40W4-21-1, BEAR Water System, and AFH
10-222, Volume 11, Contingency Water System Installation and Operation, for water system
configuration and operation.
130 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Chapter 9
WASTE UTILITY SYSTEMS
9.1. Introduction. Since potable water is viewed as perhaps the most essential element to bare
base operations, disposal of wastewater and other wastes may seem to be unimportant. This is
not true. If waste is not quickly and properly disposed of, unsanitary conditions can rapidly
develop. Flies, mosquitoes and rodents can overwhelm a bare base, spreading disease with them.
During some previous major conflicts, the casualty rate from disease and other non-battle causes
invariably exceeded the combat casualty rate. This was particularly true for theaters of operation
that combine high temperatures and prevalence of indigenous disease.
9.1.1. Field Sanitation. Despite many medical and technological advances, the threat from
insect-borne diseases and sanitation hazards remains as real today as it was in World War II,
Korea and Vietnam. Troops deployed to areas with poor sanitary conditions and high rates of
insect-borne diseases can still contract malaria during a 180-day deployment. During
physically exhausting deployments, particularly those lacking permanent facilities, there is an
individual tendency to relax sanitation and personal hygiene standards. This poses a threat to
the entire base population and could seriously affect mission accomplishment. It is also a
significant challenge for bare base planners who may have to rely on expedient methods for
waste disposal during the early stages of deployments. With proper application of field
sanitation and insect control methods, infection rates can be kept to a very low level.
9.1.2. Environmental Considerations. In addition to traditional waste disposal problems,
engineers must also consider those types of waste that pose potential environmental problems
if not monitored. Items such as fuels, chemicals and process byproducts must be controlled
and properly disposed of to avoid health and safety hazards. If safe disposal is not an
immediate option at a bare base, as a minimum an adequate, secure storage area should be
established. Be especially observant of local-national activities that might be under AF
control. Local environmental rules at a bare base may not be as strict as US standards and
may pose environmental problems for US forces if not watched closely. For additional
information on environmental considerations during contingency operations, see AFH 10-
222, Volume 4, and the numerous references and checklists in its attachments.
9.2. Overview. To assist in planning, this chapter describes various methods to dispose of
wastes. Expedient field methods for human waste disposal are addressed first, followed by a
discussion of methods that use BEAR assets for disposing of liquid wastes during longer-term
deployments. Finally, this chapter presents methods for disposing of solid wastes.
9.3. Expedient Human Waste Disposal Methods. During the early stages of most
deployments, engineers may need to use expedient field methods to dispose of human wastes
such as cat hole, burn-out, deep pit, and saddle trench latrines (Figure 9.1), and urine soakage
pits. Later on, even when BEAR latrines and disposal systems are in place, there may be
locations on the base that need expedient facilities due to the distances from main utility
networks or lack of enough BEAR assets. See AFPAM 10-219 Volume 7, Expedient Methods,
and AFH 10-222 Volume 1, for a thorough description of commonly-used and effective
expedient latrines.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 131
Figure 9.1. Typical Expedient Straddle-Trench Latrine with Privacy Screens
9.3.1. When planning for expedient latrine facilities, assume one toilet will serve 20 people.
In areas where females will not routinely use the latrine, urinals may be substituted for one-
third of the minimum required number of toilets. For instance, in a 550-person camp with all
males, generally plan on a minimum of 28 toilets. However, if urinals were available, then
only 19 toilets (and 9 urinals) would suffice. Keep in mind that separate latrines must still be
provided for females. Since approximately 20 percent of AF personnel are women, plan on
providing a corresponding percentage of bare base latrine facilities for them.
9.3.2. Like many other BEAR assets, field deployable latrines begin arriving over the course
of the first several days of the deployment, and become more and more plentiful as the base
is established. As deployable latrine units arrive and are set up, expedient latrines will be
closed. Until deployable latrines are connected to the wastewater distribution system,
wastewater from the holding tanks is collected using a wastewater disposal trailer (Figure
9.2). The trailer consists of a 1,000-gallon tank and a vacuum pump powered by a 12-hp
gasoline engine. The vacuum pump removes air from the tank causing suction through the
pickup hose. Large material can be removed in this way and not damage the pump. To empty
the unit, the pump is reversed and the tank pressurized, thus forcing out the contents. For
planning purposes, assume wastewater disposal trailers can make 15 trips a day and thus can
dispose of 15,000 gallons of waste per day. Latrines should be emptied daily.
9.3.3. Wastewater from the disposal trailer should be emptied in uninhibited areas downwind
from the base where contamination of drinking water sources is not possible. Dumping
locations must be carefully considered since waste disposal in this manner may continue
several days until a more permanent collection system is in place (i.e., septic system, lagoon,
treatment facility, contracted disposal).
132 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 9.2. Wastewater Disposal Trailer
9.4. Expedient Wastewater Disposal Methods. Water usage generally results in wastewater
that requires disposal. Depending on the source, wastewater may contain suspended solids and
particulate matter, organic material, dissolved salts, biological and pathogenic organisms, and
toxic chemicals. The volume of wastewater alone can cause significant problems in the field. The
information in Table 9.1. is presented as a guide for estimating the quantities of wastewater
generated under initial bare base conditions (prior to the entire collection system being installed).
These quantities are less than those addressed later in this chapter because the water system will
not be established and less water will be available. Also during this initial phase, less water will
be used for showers and personal hygiene. Planning for expedient wastewater disposal in the
early stages of a deployment is essential to protect the health of the force. The following
paragraphs address several field-expedient wastewater disposal options.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 133
Table 9.1. Wastewater Volumes—Initial Beddown
Quantity Quantity To Be Comments

Purpose Disposed (GPPPD)
(GPD)
Drinking 4.0 2.0 1/2 of Drinking Water
Personal Hygiene 3.0 2.0 Portion of Personal Hygiene
Showers 5.0 5.0 100% Becomes Waste
Food Preparation 4.0 3.0 Only Kitchen Clean-Up Considered
Vehicles 0.5 0.0 No Wastewater Expected
Hospital 1.0 1.0 100% Becomes Waste
Heat Treatment 1.0 0.0 No Wastewater Expected
Construction 2.0 0.0 No Wastewater Expected
Graves Registration 0.5 0.0 No Wastewater Expected
Laundry 2.0 2.0 100% Becomes Waste
Aircraft Cleaning 2.0 0.0 No Wastewater Expected
Firefighting 2.0 0.0 No Wastewater Expected
Loss Factor (10%) 3.0 0.0 No Wastewater Expected
30.0 15.0
9.4.1. Soakage Pits. Soakage pits acts as a reservoir from which water is gradually
absorbed by the surrounding soil (Figure 9.3). Its effectiveness depends on the cleanliness of
the water being absorbed, level of the ground water table, permeability of the soil and
dimensions of the soakage surface. In areas with good/rapid soil drainage, such as limestone
or coral, average size soakage pits (4 feet square by 4 feet deep) should work well. In slow
draining silt or desert sands pits must be much larger. Care must be taken in slow-drainage
areas to clear the wastewater thoroughly before running it into a soakage pit. Soakage pits are
generally not recommended in areas where soil percolation rates are poor—SWA, for
example. Nevertheless, field studies may identify favorable conditions for pits even when
percolation rates are known to be poor.
134 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 9.3. Soakage Pit
9.4.2. Soakage Trenches. In areas where ground-water level precludes digging a 4-foot
deep pit, engineers can construct soakage trenches (Figure 9.4). First construct a 2 feet
square by 1 foot deep pit and fill with coarse well-draining material, such as stones or gravel.
Dig one foot wide trenches that radiate outward from the pit in several directions. Vary the
depth of the trenches from 1 at the pit to 1.5 feet at the outer edges. Fill the trenches with the
well-draining materials.
Figure 9.4. Soakage Trench
9.4.3. Evaporation Beds. Laundries, showers and kitchens generate many gallons of
wastewater. When soil is compacted and makes it difficult to use soakage pits, use
evaporation beds. To determine the size of evaporation beds, allow three square feet per
person for kitchen wastewater and two square feet for shower and laundry waste. The beds
should be placed so that wastewater can be channeled to any particular bed as desired. As an
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 135
example, a BEAR kitchen configured to serve 1,100 personnel would require 3,300 square
feet of evaporation bed. If divided into seven individual beds of 472 square feet, each bed
would measure 22 feet by 22 feet. The kitchen will produce about 2 gpppd of wastewater for
a total of 2,200 gallons or 294 cubic feet. Each bed should be about 0.62 feet deep, but to
allow for free board each bed should be one foot deep.
9.4.4. Expedient Grease Traps. Grease traps should be constructed to prevent grease from
entering the wastewater disposal beds. Grease will slow the evaporation process, clog and
prevent water from leaching into the soil and provide food for insects. Several types of grease
traps sufficiently remove grease from liquid wastes in the field. Some are superior to others
in that they are easier to construct and last longer. The important thing about a grease trap is
it should be of sufficient capacity so the hot, greasy water being added will not heat the cool
water already in the trap. Otherwise the grease will remain uncongealed and pass through the
trap. Figure 9.5 depicts two types of expedient grease traps that are easy to construct.
Figure 9.5. Expedient Grease Traps
9.4.5. Wastewater Collection Pit Boxes. Other facilities that produce wastewater must
have pits constructed to collect the wastewater. These type facilities are less common and are
included here for legacy purposes. Facilities that produce relatively small quantities of
wastewater should have a pit that holds 1,000 gallons. Facilities that produce larger amounts
of wastewater should have a 2,000-gallon pit. Details for construction of these pits are shown
in Figure 9.6, Table 9.2 and Table 9.3 The wastewater disposal trailer is also used to empty
these collection pits.
136 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 9.6. Construction of Wastewater Collection Pit Boxes
Table 9.2. Bill of Materials for Wastewater Collection Boxes (1,000 Gallon)
1,000-GALLON PIT BOX
Description Number Required Remarks
A 1/2″ x 6′-0″ x 7′-6″ 1 ea Floor
B 1/2″ x 3′-0″ x 7′-6″ 2 ea Side Panel
C 1/2″ x 3′-0″ x 6′-0″ 2 ea End Panel
D 2 x 4 x 7′-6″ 4 ea Framework
E 2 x 4 x 5′-8 3/4″ 4 ea Framework
2 x 4 x 5′-8 3/4″ 1 ea
F 15′ x 15′ Sheet Plastic 1 ea Brace*
Nail 6d 1.00 lb Liner
Nail 10d 1.00 lb
*Line box with plastic before installing braces.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 137
Table 9.3. Bill of Materials for Wastewater Collection Boxes (2,000 Gallon)
2,000-GALLON PIT BOX
Description Number Required Remarks
A 1/2″ x 6′-0″ x 7′-6″ 2 ea Floor
B 1/2″ x 3′-0″ x 7′-6″ 4 ea Side Panel
C 1/2″ x 3′-0″ x 6′-0″ 2 ea End Panel
D 2 x 4 x 15′-0″ 4 ea Framework
E 2 x 4 x 5′-8 3/4″ 4 ea Framework
F 2 x 4 x 5′-8 3/4″ 2 ea Upright
G 2 x 4 x 5′-8 3/4″ 3 ea Brace*
1/2″ x 4′-0″ x 8′-0″ 4 ea
H 15′ x 15′ Sheet Plastic 1 ea Cover
Nail 6d 1.50 lb Liner
Nail 10d 2.00 lb
*Line box with plastic before installing braces.
9.5. BEAR Wastewater Disposal Methods. The BEAR wastewater disposal system operates
similar to many municipal wastewater systems. Wastewater is collected and transported via
pipes, hoses, lift stations and pumps to a centralized collection area. The wastewater system uses
a 25,000-gallon wastewater collection tank (Figure 9.7). The system can also collect wastewater
from BEAR facilities for disposal at an on-site treatment plant or by contract collection and
transport to an off-site treatment facility. During initial bare base operations, collecting all
wastewater from base facilities may not be feasible. It is recommended that gray-water drying
beds or evaporation ponds be constructed for showers and laundry facilities and only latrines and
kitchens be initially connected to the wastewater system. This will eliminate individual facility
black water collection by pushing the wastewater through a series of force-main pumping
stations to the central collection tank located outside the main bare base. Wastewater sent to the
collection tank is mixed and aerated to maintain it in a liquid state for eventual disposal. Setting
up the wastewater system takes time, so while the system is being constructed, wastewater is
picked up at the point of generation by wastewater removal trailers. These trailers are discharged
away from the base or into sewage or stabilization lagoons once they are completed. The BEAR
wastewater system is packaged in increments designed to support various populations. Although
the type and amount of equipment is specified, planners may need to design a system unique to
the deployment location. To help in designing the system, the following paragraphs address the
sources and quantities of wastewater, followed by a description of the collection system and
wastewater treatment options.
9.5.1. Wastewater Sources. Of the 30 gpppd of potable water provided at a bare base for
initial beddown, about 21 gpppd (70 percent) will become wastewater. Table 9.4 can be used
to calculate the quantity of wastewater generated in a given area. For example, a typical
shower-latrine complex supports 275 people. Latrines and showers generate approximately
12.7 gpppd, so the latrine complex will generate about 3,500 gallons of wastewater per day
138 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
or an average flow of 145 gallons per hour. Because of various work schedules and shifts, the
maximum hourly flow is unlikely to exceed four times the average hourly flow. Therefore,
the maximum hourly flow would be about 580 gallons per hour. This figure can be used for
initial design purposes. Keep in mind locations with fixed water treatment plants and those
with more quality of life improvements will see water usage increase and more wastewater
being generated. Planners should be aware the initial design specifications for wastewater
treatment and disposal facilities will more than likely have to be expanded. Potable water
production and usage should be monitored to determine actual wastewater generation.
Figure 9.7. BEAR 25,000-Gallon Wastewater Collection Tank
Table 9.4. Wastewater Sources and Estimates

Gallons per person per day
Source
BEAR Assets Fixed Water Plant
Latrine 7.7 7.7
Showers 5.0 15.0
Hospital 1.0 1.0
Laundry 2.0 14.0
Total 19.7 42.7
9.5.2. Wastewater Collection. Base camps are usually placed on fairly level ground making
gravity-fed wastewater lines unfeasible. The BEAR water system uses forced wastewater
lines; which makes them usable on level or uneven terrain. Waste output from user facilities
(latrines, showers, kitchens, laundries, etc.) is processed by various pumps, lift stations, and
wastewater lines that distribute the wastewater to lagoons or the wastewater collection tank
for eventual disposal. Latrine and kitchen facilities also have an in-line, sewage ejector
system (grinder pump) to help facilitate wastewater distribution (Figure 9.8). The ejector is
attached to the latrine waste tank outlet and kitchen holding tank outlet. The latrines’ waste is
sent through the ejector and pushed to a macerator pump lift-station (Figure 9.9). From the
lift-station the waste is pushed through a wastewater hose to a dual-pump lift-station (Figure
9.10). Note: Manual cleaning of the latrine tanks with the water wand will still be required.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 139
The kitchen waste is sent through the ejector and sent to the dual-pump lift station. The dual
pump lift-station collects all of the wastewater in the camp and pushes it into a central
collection tank.
Figure 9.8. Latrine Facility with Sewage Ejector System
Figure 9.9. Macerator Pump Lift Station

140 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 9.10. Dual-Pump Lift Station
9.5.2.1. The layout and configuration of the wastewater system is largely dependent
upon specific site conditions and requirements, including camp size, facility layout, and
predominant wind direction. In the layout shown in Figure 9.11, all wastewater is
distributed to a 25,000-gallon wastewater collection tank. In this configuration, it is
estimated the wastewater tank will be required to be pumped out one or more times per
day. The waste can be sent to a sewage or stabilization lagoon, leach field, treatment
plant, etc.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 141
Figure 9.11. Total Wastewater Collection Layout (1100-Person Camp)
9.5.2.2. In another configuration (Figure 9.12), only wastewater from latrines and
kitchens is routed to the wastewater tank. The remaining wastewater from showers and
laundries is sent to gray-water drying beds or lagoons. In this configuration, it is
estimated that the wastewater tank will be required to be pumped out once every five
days.
142 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 9.12. Partial Wastewater Collection Layout (1100-Person Camp)
9.5.2.3. Installation of these components, while not technically difficult, will be time
consuming. Additionally, the same people responsible for installation of the wastewater
system are also responsible for installing the more important water distribution system.
Furthermore, some personnel will be used to support ROWPU operation and wastewater
disposal functions. The bottom line is be prepared to operate the field deployable latrine
and disposal trailers for an extended time since there will be several concurrent
competing beddown demands vying for engineer assistance. Local contract support in
this area may be a good alternative.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 143
9.5.3. Wastewater Treatment and Disposal.

9.5.3.1. Stabilization Lagoons. In areas where sufficient natural drainage exists to carry
wastewater away from the base, stabilization lagoons (Figure 9.13) can be constructed. A
stabilization lagoon is a shallow artificial pond used to treat wastewater before it is
discharged. Bacteria and protozoans metabolize waste organics in a stabilization lagoon.
When the lagoon bottom is anaerobic (without oxygen), biological activity results in
digestion of the settled solids. Algae in photosynthesis use nutrients released by the
bacteria. The degree of stabilization produced in oxidation lagoons is significantly
influenced by climatic conditions. During warm, sunny weather, decomposition and
photosynthetic processes flourish, resulting in rapid stabilization of waste organics.
Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) reductions in warm weather usually exceed 95
percent. Stabilization lagoons are designed with long liquid retention times, usually 20 to
120 days. Lagoons discussed in this chapter have been designed with a retention time of
approximately 20 days, suitable for a predominantly hot and sunny region (SWA or
equivalent). Although much of the treatment occurs naturally through chemical
processes, aeration devices may be used to add oxygen to the wastewater. Aeration
makes treatment more efficient so that less land area is necessary.
Figure 9.13. Stabilization Lagoon
9.5.3.1.1. A wastewater stabilization lagoon should have a flat bottom pond and be
enclosed by an earth dike. Operating liquid depth has a range of 2 to 5 feet with 3 feet
of dike freeboard. Freeboard is the distance between the highest level of the
wastewater and the top of the dike or berm. A minimum depth of 2 feet is required to
prevent growth of rooted aquatic plants. Operating depths greater than 5 feet can
create odorous conditions because of anaerobic bottom conditions. Influent lines
discharge near the center of the pond and the effluent overflows in a corner on the
windward side to minimize short-circuiting. When multiple lagoons are used, they
should be able to operate individually or in a series. It may also be necessary to line
or seal the bottom of the lagoon to prevent leaks and maintain its biological
properties. A commonly used sealing agent is bentonite clay, although flexible
synthetic membranes may also be used.
144 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
9.5.3.1.2. In multiple lagoon installations, the sequence of lagoon operation is

regulated to provide control of the treatment process. Operating lagoons in series
generally increases BOD removal by preventing short-circuiting. Parallel operation
may be desirable to distribute the organic load and avoid potential odor problems.
Since stabilization lagoons may emit odor, they should be located as far as practical
from the base and on the leeward side so that prevailing winds are away from the
base. Lagoons treating only domestic wastewater normally operate odor-free. Figure
9.14 lists the requirements for stabilization lagoons for various base sizes.
Construction details are shown in Figure 9.15. Excavation for the lagoons is based on
balanced cut and fill.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 145
Figure 9.14. Stabilization Lagoon Requirements

146 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 9.15. Stabilization Lagoon Construction Details
9.5.3.2. Evaporation Lagoons. In areas where it is impossible to discharge wastewater

off base, evaporation lagoons will have to be constructed. Evaporation reduces the liquid
volume of wastewater, returning water vapor to the environment. Solids settle to the
bottom and form sludge. Because of the large construction requirements, evaporation
lagoons should only be used as a last resort. Evaporation lagoons for the different size
bases are presented in Table 9.5.
Table 9.5. Evaporation Lagoon Requirements

Wastewater Lagoon Area Number of Dimensions at
Base Size
(GPD) Required (SF) Lagoons 5’ Depth
550 8,250 100,000 9 120΄ x 120΄
1100 16,500 200,000 9 164΄ x 164΄
2200 33,000 400,000 9 226΄ x 226΄
3300 49,500 600,000 9 273΄ x 273΄
4400 66,000 800,000 9 313΄ x 313΄
5500 82,500 1,000,000 9 348΄ x 348΄
6600 99,000 1,200,000 9 380΄x 380΄
9.5.3.2.1. Evaporation is dependent upon the net evaporation rate and surface area
available for evaporation. The evaporation lagoons sized in this chapter are based
upon a net evaporation rate of 46 inches per year and a wastewater flow rate of 15
gallons per person per day. Figure 9.16 can be used to calculate lagoon requirements
for other net evaporation rates.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 147
Figure 9.16. Evaporation Lagoon Area Requirements
9.5.3.2.2. Evaporation lagoons should be constructed in increments. Table 9.6 shows

the time required for each of the lagoons to fill (in days). The time varies because as
the lagoon area increases, the amount of water being evaporated increases, thus
decreasing the net flow rate. For the 1,100-person base the first lagoon will fill in 46
days but the eighth lagoon will not fill until 932 days. Only construct lagoons that
will be used during the anticipated deployment. Following the lagoon construction
sequence in Figure 9.17 will minimize construction requirements.
Table 9.6. Days Required to Fill Evaporation Lagoons

Base Lagoon Number
Population 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1,100 46 99 161 233 324 445 617 932 --
2,200 50 108 175 255 353 484 674 1032 --
3,300 52 111 180 263 365 500 699 1059 --
4,400 53 114 184 269 375 514 721 1119 --
5,500 53 115 186 271 378 518 730 1133 --
6,600 54 116 188 275 383 525 737 1145 --
Notes: Based on 14 gallons of wastewater per person per day. Net evaporation rate of 46 inches per
year. Lagoons are 5 feet deep with dike walls that slope at 3:1.
148 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 9.17. Evaporation Lagoon Construction Sequence
9.5.3.2.3. Where less than one gallon per hour is discharged from a shelter supplied
with water for drinking or testing purposes, a dry pit (French) drain would adequately
serve the area. The drain can be constructed using a 55-gallon drum (with the top and
bottom removed) that is placed level in the ground and filled with rocks. No human or
solid wastes should be discharged into the dry pit drain.
9.5.3.2.4. The lagoons in this chapter have not been sized to accept brine water
discharged from ROWPUs. The brine water can be disposed of by returning it to the
source, if the source is a body of water. If the source of the water is a well, some other
method of disposal must be found. The ROWPU brine water flow rate depends on the
source of water being treated, but can be twice the amount of potable water being
produced (see Chapter 9).
9.5.3.2.5. Wastewater from kitchens must be treated to remove grease before
entering the collection system. Construction details for typical grease traps supporting
kitchen facilities are presented in Figure 9.18. The single-drum grease trap can be
used for a 550-person kitchen and the larger version should be used for kitchens that
serve 1,100 or more.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 149
Figure 9.18. Kitchen Facility Grease Traps
9.6. Solid Waste Disposal. Solid waste must also be collected and disposed. For planning
purposes, expect four pounds per person per day of solid waste will be generated. This includes
garbage (waste from preparation and serving of food), rubbish (paper, cartons, boxes, cans, etc.),
ashes and industrial wastes. Although it is important to consider all available methods of solid
waste disposal, disposal plans must adhere to theater-specific waste management guidance and
procedures. Other sources of information include AFI 32-7001, Environmental Management,
AFI 32-7042, Waste Management, UFC 3-240-10A, Sanitary Landfill, and AFH 10-222, Volume
150 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
4. These publications provide good solid waste management guidelines, however engineer
planners must be aware of local, theater, and host-nation requirements.
9.6.1. Burning Operations. If solid waste disposal plans include burning, severe restrictions
may apply to certain types of burning. If used, open-air burn pits must be operated in a
manner that prevents or minimizes risks to humans and the environment. Review DODI
4715-19, Use of Open-air Burn Pits in Contingency Operations, for additional information.
Open-air burn pits are a short-term solution to reduce the volume of solid waste during
contingency operations. Long-term solutions include the use of incinerators (Figure 9.19)
and landfills.
Figure 9.19. Incinerator Operations
9.6.2. Landfill Operations. Uncompacted solid waste weighs about 200 pounds per cubic
yard. When compacted into a landfill, it weighs 700 to 1,000 pounds per cubic yard. A 1,100-
person base generates about 4,400 pounds per day of solid waste. Uncompacted, the waste
would have a volume of 22 cubic yards. A dump truck with a 5-cubic yard capacity would
need to make five trips to carry a day’s waste to the disposal site. However, daily burial at a
landfill would compact it to between 4.4 and 6.3 cubic yards per day.
9.6.2.1. A typical trench method of landfill operation is shown in Figure 9.20. A crawler
tractor digs a trench for waste to be dumped into. It also spreads and consolidates the
waste. At the end of the day, the crawler of construction equipment covers the waste with
24 inches of earth. As a trench is filled or abandoned, it should be covered with 30 inches
of earth and its boundaries marked.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 151
Figure 9.20. Trench Method Construction of Sanitary Landfill
9.6.2.2. To minimize the possibility of underground pollution, follow these

recommendations when siting a landfill:
9.6.2.2.1. Do not build on exposed rock strata. Keep a minimum of 30 feet clay-till
overburden between strata and refuse unless studies indicate a lesser depth is
satisfactory. Locate fill at least 500 feet from wells unless studies indicate subsurface
seepage is not imminent.
9.6.2.2.2. Do not place garbage and refuse in mines or other areas where resulting
seepage or leaching could carry waste to water-bearing strata or wells. Remember,
chemical pollution emanating from a fill will travel longer distances than organic and
bacterial pollution.
9.6.2.2.3. Do not locate sanitary fills on or near springs.
9.6.2.2.4. Locate the landfill in an area of stable soil and downwind from the
installation. Avoid areas of sand dunes or other mobile earth deposits.
9.6.3. Commercial solid waste disposal systems are increasingly being targeted at meeting
the unique challenges of deployed environments. These include containerized dehydration
units that turn solid waste into ash or fine powder. These systems can potentially reduce the
amount of water, logistics and labor needed for disposal operations and are easier on the
environment.
9.6.4. Additional information on managing and disposing of solid, hazardous and medical
waste can be found AFH 10-222, Volume 4.
152 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Chapter 10
BEAR FACILITIES
10.1. Introduction. Modular, expandable and fabric-covered shelters and canvas tents provide
structures needed on a bare base for billeting, shops, hangars and storage. All expandable
facilities and tents can be set up for immediate use and packaged for redeployment by the same
people who use them. It is important to keep in mind that BEAR shelters are made of lightweight
materials that provide virtually no protection against weapons fire and munitions fragments.
Consequently, in high-threat areas these shelters are dispersed and hardened to the maximum
extent possible by using sandbags or other expedient revetment walls. In some instances,
protective shelters may have to be constructed to obtain the required degree of survivability.
10.2. Overview. This chapter provides a brief description of BEAR contemporary and legacy
shelters. It also covers the special handling procedures required for hardwall shelters.
Throughout this chapter, keep in mind when siting facilities, areas should be level, firm, well-
drained and relatively free of surface rock or stone. Also keep in mind the environmental
limitation for these facilities is generally -25 degrees Fahrenheit to +125 degrees Fahrenheit and
most can withstand steady wind loads of 60 knots with gusts to 90 knots. Refer to AFH 10-222,
Volume 6, Guide to Bare Base Facility Erection, and applicable technical orders for detailed
guidance on erection and disassembly of facilities in this chapter.
10.3. BEAR Shelters.
10.3.1. Small Shelter System (SSS). This all-purpose tent-type shelter (Figure 10.1) is used
for billeting, work areas, latrines and showers, storage, etc. It is stored and shipped in its own
container, four containers per 463L pallet. When fully erected, this shelter measures 32.5 feet
long by 20 feet wide by 10 feet high (650 sq ft). The SSS is equipped to accept 120/208
VAC, 60-cycle, single-phase power. This shelter is commonly referred to as the ―Triple-S‖
and has been designated as the replacement for the TEMPER tent through attrition.
Compared to the TEMPER tent, it is less costly, slightly lighter, tighter, and more vector
proof. It also requires less day-to-day maintenance when erected, and its fabric is easier to
repair. A minimum of six people are required to safely assemble this structure in about 1.5
hours (nine labor hours) and multiple buildings can be interconnected. See T.O. 35E5-6-11,
Alaska Small Shelter System (AKSSS), for further instructions.
10.3.2. Medium Shelter System (MSS). This shelter is 52 feet long by 29.5 feet wide by 15
feet high (1,534 sq ft) and is used as an all-purpose, mid-sized shelter (Figure 10.2) in the
maintenance, warehouse, storage and kitchen areas. The shelter is shipped and stored in its
own containers. An all-terrain forklift and a hammer drill and bits are required for erection. It
may be erected over soil, asphalt, or concrete. This shelter has a 120/208 VAC, 60-cycle, 3-
phase, 5-wire input. The MSS is replacing the General Purpose Shelter in the inventory. It
provides tighter protection against dust and insects, has lower maintenance costs and takes up
less shipping space. These shelters are also known as the ―M Double S.‖ A minimum of six
people can safely assemble this structure in about 4 hours (24 labor hours) and multiple
shelters can be interconnected. Consult T.O. 35E5-6-21, California Medium Shelter System,
for more details.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 153
Figure 10.1. Small Shelter System
Figure 10.2. Medium Shelter System
10.3.3. Dome Shelter. The Dome Shelter is a large shelter used as a warehouse,
maintenance area, or small aircraft hangar (Figure 10.3). It is constructed of synthetic fabric
over aluminum arch sections, with steel tension cables to provide rigidity. The standard
configuration for the Dome Shelter is 120 feet long, 70 feet wide (8,400-sq-ft shelter) and
25.6 feet high at the arch apex. Dome Shelters with a gabled end are 89.3 feet long by 60 feet
wide by 25.6 feet high for a 5,358-sq-ft building. The area needed to erect the standard
shelter is 140 feet by 90 feet and with the gable end requires 110 feet by 90 feet. The location
should be vehicle accessible as the shelter is shipped and stored in three 463L pallet
containers. When installing on concrete, secure with thunder studs. Shelter can accept
120/208 VAC, 60-cycle, 3-phase, 5-wire electrical input. A minimum crew of eight is
required to erect the Dome Shelter in about 32 hours (256 labor hours), and multiple
buildings can be interconnected. See T.O. 35E4-216-1, Bare Base Dome Shelter, for more
information on the shelter.
154 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 10.3. Dome Shelter
10.3.4. International Standardization Organization (ISO) Shelter. ISO shelters were

developed to provide some degree of standardization in the various shelters used by the
Armed Forces. The ISO designation means each structure conforms to the material handling
requirements established by the ISO. Although there are not many of these shelters in the
BEAR systems, some may be encountered at locations supporting joint services. As shown in
Figure 10.4, these shelters are either rigid or expandable. No special equipment is needed for
erecting ISO shelters and site preparation requirements are minimal.
10.3.4.1. The ISO 1:1 (rigid type) measures 8 by 20 feet and its gross weight is 13,900
pounds (3,900 tare weight and 10,000 payload).
10.3.4.2. The ISO 2:1 (one side expandable) has interior dimensions of 14 feet 6 inches
by 19 feet 1 inch; ceiling height is 7 feet 1 inch. The gross weight of this shelter is 15,000
pounds (tare weight is 5,500 pounds). With four people assigned, erection takes 25
minutes.
10.3.4.3. With both sides expanded, the ISO 3:1 has a nominal interior dimension of 20
feet by 11 feet 6 inches; ceiling height is 6 feet 9 inches. Gross weight is 6,500 pounds
(tare weight is 2,000 pounds). Six people can erect this ISO in 45 minutes.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 155
Figure 10.4. ISO 2:1 Shelter
10.3.5. Expandable Light Air Mobile Shelter (ELAMS). This all-purpose, softwalled
shelter serves as a command post, medical clinic, maintenance shop, storage, or office area
(Figure 10.5). Standard expanded configuration is 14.8 feet long by 20.25 feet wide by 8 feet
high (300 sq ft). The shelter has a 120/208 VAC, 60-cycle, 3-phase, 5-wire input. A
minimum of five personnel are can safely assemble the structure in about six hours (30 labor
hours).
Figure 10.5. Expandable Light Air Mobile Shelter
10.3.6. Large Area Maintenance Shelter (LAMS). The LAMS (Figure 10.6) provides
semi-portable housing for small aircraft and vehicle maintenance. Sized at approximate 129
feet long, 75 feet wide, and with a 31-foot height clearance at the center, it has electrically
operated Clamshell end-doors at both ends. The shelter is equipped with explosion proof
lights, outlets, wiring, and switches. It can be erected on a reinforced concrete pad (100 feet
minimum x 135 foot minimum x 8 to 10 inch thick), asphalt, or earth surface. Once erected,
the LAMS provide an unobstructed, weatherproof work area free of vertical supports that
could hinder movement of aircraft and equipment within. A minimum of ten people are
156 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
required to assemble the structure safely. Assembly time is approximately 300 man-hours.
Consult T.O. 35E4-219-1, Large Area Maintenance Shelter, for additional information.
Figure 10.6. Large Area Maintenance Shelter
10.3.7. Automatic Building Machines. While not included in BEAR packages, automatic
building machines can be and are used at most bare bases. Using rolls of galvanized steel or
aluminum, these machines produce structural building arches of various widths that are
erected and crimped together at the seams. The manufactured facilities, commonly called K-
spans (Figure 10.7), can be used as aircraft hangars or covered storage buildings. When
fitted with end walls and ventilating and mechanical systems, these facilities can serve as
shops, recreational facilities and shelters. Some of these machines are prepositioned overseas
and others are part of the RED HORSE squadron equipment package. A trained crew of 10 to
12 people can make a 10,000 SF facility in about a day using a trailer-mounted system.
Figure 10.7. RED HORSE Crew Assembling a K-Span Building

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 157
10.4. Legacy Shelters.

10.4.1. Tent, Extendable, Modular, Personnel (TEMPER). Prior to the SSS, the
TEMPER was the most frequently used facility in bare base packages. The TEMPER tent is a
modular, soft shelter (synthetic material) supported by an aluminum frame structure (Figure
10.8). Its primary use is for troop billeting (12 personnel per tent) but it also supports other
functions, such as shops and administrative space. This tent comes with roll up windows,
mosquito netting and a flysheet (waterproof material that attaches above the tent top and
allows free movement of air between the flysheet and the tent top). The tent comes in 8 foot
by 20-foot sections that fasten together; the nominal tent size is 32 feet by 20 feet x 11 feet
(640 sq ft tent). Also included is a white inner liner for insulation and a fabric floor. For
special adaptations, solid doors and entry vestibules are available. An electrical wiring kit
provides lights and convenience outlets. The TEMPER tent can be heated and cooled as
required and a fabric plenum is provided to direct airflow. A minimum of six personnel are
required to safely assemble this shelter in about 1.5 hours (9 labor hours). However, it is
common to use a team of 10 personnel (of various skill levels) to erect it in about an hour.
Multiple buildings can be interconnected. Consult AFH 10-222, Volume 6, and T.O. 35E5-
6-1, Tent, Extendable, Modular, Personnel (TEMPER), for detailed information on this
shelter.
Figure 10.8. TEMPER Tent
10.4.2. General Purpose (GP) Shelter. The general-purpose shelter supports such
functions as shops, storage and multipurpose use (Figure 10.9). The overall size of the
shelter is approximately 48 feet long by 31 feet wide by 12 feet high. The shelter has
windows, rigid doors and truck doors that give access to service equipment. Lighting and
service outlets are provided through a distribution panel and cable arrangement on each side
of the shelter. A membrane or rigid panel floor are optional features that may be installed in
the shelter. Removable panels in the shelter allows for the installation of a heating and air
conditioning unit. Shelter erection tools are provided and located in marked containers. A
crew of six can erect the shelter on a prepared surface in about 15 hours, or about 20 hours if
installed with a floor. The GP Shelter is packaged into an 8 feet by 8 feet by 10 feet
container, which can be used for other purposes until the shelter is reconstituted. The GP
shelter is being replaced through attrition by a softwalled Medium Shelter System described
earlier in this chapter.
158 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 10.9. General Purpose Shelter
10.4.3. Expandable Shelter Container (ESC). This shelter container is used primarily for
flightline and industrial shops (Figure 10.10). When expanded, the ESC measures
approximately 21 feet long by 13 feet wide by 8 feet high (273 SF) and weighs 12,500
pounds when shipped without an internal payload. When packaged, the unit is 8 feet by 13
feet by 8 feet. The unit may be expanded without removing whatever payload might be in the
container. Panel inserts in one of the swing-out walls can be removed to connect one ECU,
which is sufficient for heating and cooling this shelter. Double doors (cargo doors) are
installed in one end wall of the center section and a personnel door in the other end wall.
Double pane windows in the walls are nonopening, shatterproof, heat resistant and equipped
with blackout curtains. An entire 3-phase electrical system is provided, along with installed
lighting and electrical service equipment. The ESC can be erected with a crew of six people
in approximately two hours.
Figure 10.10. Expandable Shelter Container
10.4.4. Aircraft Maintenance Hangar (ACH). This 77-foot-wide shelter is used for most
on-aircraft maintenance functions or as a warehouse (Figure 10.11). It consists of a series of
freestanding arches formed from individually shipped aluminum beams and honeycomb core
and aluminum skin panels. The beams and panels are locked together at ground level to form
an arch section. Each hangar is shipped in four containers that measure 10 feet by 8 feet by 8
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 159
feet each. These containers are positioned at each corner of the hangar to make vestibule-like
personnel entrances/offices. Use existing concrete or asphalt surfaces, AM-2 matting or a
locally supplied material as the floor. The ACH structure comes with 3-phase electric wiring
and openings for ducts to interface with the BEAR electric and heating systems. The first
choice for the hangar site is on, or close to, an airfield apron. If the apron site is impractical, a
hard surface, approximately 125 by 150 feet, capable of withstanding aircraft weight should
be selected. When erected, the hangar is 125.6 feet long by 77 feet wide and 25 feet high at
the center (9,748 sq ft) with the doors closed. Personnel from RED HORSE or the 49 MMG
will erect this shelter. Erecting the ACH requires a minimum of 10 people and generally
takes about 40 hours (400 labor hours). Multiple buildings can be interconnected. Consult
T.O. 35E4-133-1 for further information.
Figure 10.11. Aircraft Hangar
10.4.5. Frame-Supported Tensioned Fabric Shelter (FSTFS). The FSTFS is a hangar-like

structure fashioned by stretching a fabric skin over a series of metal arches (Figure 10.12). It
supports functions requiring large floor spaces, such as supply storage, vehicle maintenance
and various aircraft maintenance shops. The FSTFS can be set up directly on pavement or
floors built from AM-2 matting. The most common sizes are 70 feet long x 60 feet wide x
25.6 feet high (4,200 sq ft) and 140 feet long x 60 feet wide x 26 feet high (8,400 sq ft). RED
HORSE or the 49 MMG erects these facilities. A minimum of eight personnel are required to
safely assembly the FSTFS and assembly time is about 32 hours (256 total labor hours) for
the smaller version and 48 hours (384 total labor hours) for the larger version. Multiple
buildings can be interconnected. FSTFSs are gradually being replaced by the Dome Shelters,
which provide more utility and versatility. See T.O. 35E4-183-1 for detailed descriptions.
160 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 10.12. Frame Supported Tension Fabric Shelter (FSTFS)
10.5. Hygiene Facilities.

10.5.1. Shower/Shave Unit. This portable shower/shave unit (Figure 10.13) consists of a
four-section shower element and four separate washstands. These units come with their own
tents. Set up requires a minimum of four people approximately 6 hours (plus tent and boiler
set up).
Figure 10.13. Shower/Shave Unit
10.5.1.1. Portable shower consists of six separate but identical and interchangeable
modules. Each module has a pallet-like shower base pan with drains and fittings to
connect the drain plumbing. Each shower module has two shower nozzles mounted on a
surrounding framework, which serves as a support for the vinyl fabric shower enclosure.
The entire shower system includes interconnecting hoses among the six modules for
water inlet and draining, a water heater (usually an M-80) and pump for hot water supply
and another pump with hose for removal of wastewater.
10.5.1.2. Each shave facility consists of a three-bowl washstand and a mirror with
attached light fixture (Figure 10.14). The washstand features folding legs and contains all
required plumbing. Four washstands (a total of 12 bowls) will be located with each field
shower (two on each side).
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 161
Figure 10.14. Shave Facility Washstand
10.5.2. Field Deployable Latrine. The field deployable latrine is included in BEAR
equipment. This latrine (Figure 10.15) consists of six toilets and a urinal trough mounted
above a 135-gallon water tank, a hand-washing sink and a 180-gallon waste tank. Four
deployable latrine units constitute one BEAR package and support 600 people. These
packages come with their own tents. Setup (not including the shelter) takes two people about
one hour.
Figure 10.15. Field Deployable Latrine
10.5.2.1. Water and waste tanks are supported by an aluminum frame and plywood
partitions. There are privacy screens between the toilet commodes and the urinals. A
pressurized water system, operating on 115-VAC power, supplies water for flushing the
toilets. The vent pipes, curtains and frame dismantle and the urinal board folds down to
provide a shipping package 88 inches wide by 104 inches long by 42 inches high. This
latrine contains an electrical outlet and comes with a 100-foot power cable. The unit is
self-packaging, can be forklifted and is stackable. Tie down and lifting eyes are provided.
162 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
The double-stacked latrine unit is air transportable on 463L pallets. This unit weights
1,530 pounds dry without the pump unit.
10.5.2.2. During the early stages of a deployment, this latrine can be operated in a stand-
alone mode. That is, the water tank is periodically replenished and the waste tank is
emptied using the wastewater disposal trailer (recall Figure 9.2). Once the water and
waste distribution systems are in place, the unit can be connected directly to the service
lines. For planning purposes, one six-commode field deployable latrine can serve 160
males (because it would also have urinals) and 120 females. As mentioned in the
previous chapter, separate latrines must be provided for women. This provision may be
accomplished by splitting one bank of the latrine assembly and separating them with a
plywood wall between the two banks. This allows use of the same shelter, pumps, etc.
10.6. Food Service Facilities. The kitchen complex generally consists of several tents and
associated kitchen equipment sized to feed 1,100 people. The 1,100-person kitchen package
consists of two 550-person kitchens. In a typical setup for this population size, interconnected
shelters provide space for storage, utensil washing, food preparation, serving and dining. Force
Support personnel normally erect all tents associated with the kitchen; however, engineers
provide supporting utility service (electric, water and wastewater) and install some of the more
complicated equipment items, such as water heaters, walk-in refrigeration units and air
conditioning units. Several expedient food service facilities are covered in the next chapter.
10.7. Offloading Facilities at the Bare Base. Dimensions and weight is determined by the
mode of transportation from the aircraft to the site of erection. Basically, the shelters must be
forklifted, hoisted, or trucked from one location to another. Engineers will need to have several
people qualified on large, all-terrain forklifts. Provisions for forklifting tines are incorporated
into the base assembly of all hardwall shelters. The tines must slide into the opening provided for
forklift operation. The ship/store containers also have forklift tine holes. Site layout action must
be well under way by the time facilities begin to arrive on base. This allows equipment operators
to place facility assets correctly with respect to orientation and utility connections. More
importantly, this also helps avoid having to move assets more than once during the initial
beddown.
10.7.1. Containers. Many BEAR assets are transported in ship/store containers that are 90
inches high and sized for a 463L pallet. The containers have double doors on both 108-inch
sides with adjustable shelves and a center divider. The containers have a tare weight of about
1,750 pounds and a maximum load capacity of 10,000 pounds. They are used to ship and
store such assets as tents, shower/shave facilities, BEAR 550 kitchens and Dome Shelters.
(Note: the overall dimensions of the 463L pallet are 88 by 108 inches, with usable
dimensions of 84 by 104 inches. This allows two inches around the load to attach straps, nets,
or other restraint devices. An empty 463L pallet weighs 290 pounds and with nets it weighs
355 pounds). Planners should expect to see 20-feet wide ISO containers become the primary
packaging source for BEAR equipment assets.
10.7.2. Hoisting. Hoisting rings are also located on each roof corner of hardwall shelter
containers. When three shelters are joined in a triple-mode concept, 12 rings are available.
Inboard corners of outbound shelters or outbound corners of center shelters give the best
cable angles for lifting the shelter and any internal payload. Ship/store containers also have
external lifting rings.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 163
10.8. Allowance Standards (AS). AS 157 is the allowance standard for BEAR equipment. The
facilities and equipment lists presented in Chapter 3 are derived from the information contained
in the allowance standard. Be aware, however, that the allowance standard is not specific with
respect to numbers and types of facilities for all functional areas. For example, security forces
will likely want a base defense operations center, sector command posts, an armory, a storage
facility and protective revetments; these potential requirements are not specifically delineated in
the AS. Instead, there are several facility assets that are identified as multipurpose or common
facilities, and these will have to be parceled out base wide to meet the various facility demands.
The commander at the deployed location is normally the final authority in regard to facility
allocation, but engineer planners must be prepared to provide advice and recommendations of
facility scopes and base wide requirements based on population and the number of aircraft.
10.9. Survivability Considerations. As stated at the chapter’s outset, the lightweight
construction of modular BEAR shelters provides little, if any, protection even against small arms
fire, much less the blast and fragmentation associated with explosions and aerial munitions.
While dispersal of facilities in a high-threat environment enhances survivability, additional
measures are necessary to protect personnel and critical resources. Volume 2 of this pamphlet
series highlights basic planning for such enhancements and AFH 10-222, Volume 14 provides
descriptions of various weapons effects and information on natural and manmade revetment
materials. Construction methods for structural revetments and personnel protection shelters are
presented in Volume 7 of this pamphlet series.
164 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Chapter 11
BARE BASE ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT
11.1. Introduction. This chapter provides descriptions of ancillary equipment and mechanical
systems that may require support by bare base engineers. Although CE may not own or operate
most of this equipment, much of it is in UTC packages used by other functional communities
(e.g. Force Support, Medical, etc), and CE will likely be involved in site preparation, installation
and hardening and the connection of electrical power, water and waste disposal systems.
11.2. Overview. The description of equipment and systems in this chapter and Chapter 12 is
intended as a guide for planning for the additional resources required to support these ancillary
equipment items. This chapter is not intended to cover operations or detailed procedures.
Planners should see applicable TOs, manuals, and other sources for additional information on
these and other ancillary equipment and systems.
11.3. Fuels Mobility Support Equipment (FMSE). FMSE is designed to receive and issue
fuel at bare bases and to augment locations with fixed-fuel facilities. It includes items such air-
transportable fuel bladders, hydrant systems, bulk pumps, and filter separators. Details for two of
these items are addressed below.
11.3.1. R-14 Air Transportable Hydrant Refueling System. The R-14 is a portable, hydrant-
refueling system that can be airlifted or ground shipped anywhere in the world and made
fully operational in a matter of hours. A complete system contains three identical, self-
sufficient modules. Each module consists of a pumping unit; two 50,000-gallon bladder
tanks; and all the hoses, valves, and fittings necessary for operation (Figure 11.1). The
pumping module is configured on a four- wheeled trailer and features the same components
found on conventional servicing equipment. Each R-14 module can fuel one heavy aircraft at
600 gallons-per-minute (gpm) or two fighter aircraft at 200 gpm. The number of R-14 units
to be deployed to an installation is predicated on the number of aircraft to be supported.
These units are sourced separately from BEAR assets and can vary in quantity from base to
base. Additional 50,000-gallon bladders without the refueling module can also be deployed,
normally in packages of four.
11.3.2. Fuel Bladders. Fuel bladders (sometimes referred to as pillow tanks) generally range
in capacity from 500 gallons to 210,000 gallons (Figure 11.2). Typically, 10,000-gallon fuel
bladders are used at low-demand sites such as vehicle refueling points. Larger 50,000-gallon
fuel bladders support aircraft fuel storage and refueling and are commonly found with the R-
14 refueling unit previously addressed. The 210,000-gallon bladders are used for bulk fuel
storage. Collapsible fuel bladders, like aboveground steel tanks, require berms and liners to
contain tank contents in case of rupture and to stop fragments and blast effects from near-
miss explosions. Fuel bladders are actually less vulnerable than permanently installed steel
tanks since they are close to the ground, have no vapor space, generate no sparks when
penetrated and have much lower static head. Additional fuel bladder details are listed in
Table 11.1. Refer to T.O. 37A12-15-1, for additional information relating to operation,
service, repair, and berm construction details.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 165
Figure 11.1. R-14 Refueling System Readied for Shipment
Figure 11.2. Collapsible Fuel Bladders

166 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table 11.1. Collapsible Fuel Bladder Details

Bladder Dimensions Weight
Full (Approximately)1 Empty Dry
Capacity (Approx.)2
Length Width Height Length Width
Ft In Ft In Ft In Ft In Ft In Pounds
500 13 5 9 0 5 8 5 1 4 4 250
3,000 12 6 12 6 4 0 14 0 14 0 210
10,000 20 6 20 6 4 0 22 0 22 0 375
20,000 26 6 22 6 5 2 28 0 24 0 680
50,000 66 0 22 6 5 5 68 2 28 1 1,500
50,000 62 8 22 7 5 2 65 0 24 6 1,026
210,000 68 5 68 5 6 5 70 0 70 0 5,000
210,0003 72 5 73 4 5 6 74 4 73 2 4,217
1-After settling (height is greater on initial fill)
2-Tank only. no accessories
3-Tanks produced by MPC Containment Systems after October 2008
11.4. Fuels Operational Readiness Capability Equipment (FORCE). A mobile, air-

transportable, aircraft and ground fuel delivery system that is designed to replace older and less
efficient Fuels Mobility Support Equipment (FMSE) previously addressed. Currently being
fielded at numerous locations, FORCE fueling systems, like that shown in Figure 11.3, saves
time and resources and improves safety, reliability, and flexibility of the deployed fueling
systems.
Figure 11.3. New FORCE Refueling System
11.5. Laundry Facility. Force Support personnel provide laundry service support at a bare
base. Force Support is responsible for planning the quantities of washers, dryers and supplies for
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 167
laundry operations or providing for contract support where available. For additional information
on Force Support’s role in laundry support, refer to AFH 10-247, Volume 1, Guide to Services
Contingency Planning—Beddown. For planning purposes, each laundry unit normally supports
550 persons, although the capability will depend on the type of laundry system used. For the
Self-Help Laundry System, plan on 5 washers and 10 dryers for every 200 people. For
commercial-off-the-shelf equipment, plan on one washer and 1.5 dryers for every 20 people.
11.5.1. Self-Help Laundry. The self-help laundry is designed for rapid deployment and
continuous operation as an efficient field laundry system. An entire set contains 10 washers,
and 20 double-stacked dryers, water heater, 3,000-gallon collapsible bladder water tank,
supply and drain pumps, electrical distribution panels and associated hardware. The washers,
dryers and electrical connection boxes are to be operated inside a 32 feet long by 20 feet
wide facility (TEMPER tent or small shelter system). The pumps, water heater and tank are
all positioned outside the shelter. The set also includes benches, folding tables and temporary
hanging racks. The set can be halved into a laundry center of 5 washers and 10 dryers per
tent to support smaller populations (Figure 11.4). Bare bases also often use heavy-duty
household or commercial washers and dryers as self-help laundries.
11.5.1.1. Utilities. The laundry requires a maximum of 300 amps, 3-phase, 60-cycle,
120/208 VAC electrical power. This laundry does not come with electrical generation
equipment and must be connected to the local power source. It can also be operated
without the water heater, which requires 208 VAC, 3-phase power. Adapters are provided
to connect this system’s 1-1/2 inch diameter inlet valve assembly to a 2-inch local water
source. Cold water is then pumped to the washers and to the hot water heater. The drain
pump draws wastewater and sends it to the local drain piping system or whatever disposal
system is being used.
168 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 11.4. Self-Help Laundry Major Components
11.5.1.2. Site Preparation. The site selected for the laundry facility should be a relatively
level area with adequate drainage. Laundry equipment requires approximately 75 square
feet of space inside a TEMPER tent or general-purpose medium or small shelter system,
which is erected by Force Support personnel.
11.5.2. Contract Laundry and Dry Cleaning. Depending on location and need, Force Support
personnel may establish contract laundry, dry cleaning and linen exchange. This includes
organizational laundry (e.g. medical) and other needs. Quality of life enhancements might
include a covered porch, additional chairs and a rudimentary sound system for radio
broadcasts.
11.6. BEAR 550 Kitchen. The BEAR 550 Kitchen is an optional asset and currently the most
commonly used food service structure in the BEAR inventory (Figure 11.5). It is designed to
serve up to 550 personnel and seat 120. That capacity is doubled (1100 personnel and 240 seats)
when two 550 kitchens are combined (Figure 11.6). All tools, components and equipment,
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 169
(except electrical and water supplies), that are required to unpack, set up, operate, maintain,
strike, and repack the facility, are supplied in the shipping containers. Force Support personnel
normally erect all tents associated with the kitchen; however, engineers provide siting layout and
supporting utility service (power, water, and wastewater) and install some of the more
complicated equipment items such as water heaters, walk-in refrigeration units and air
conditioning units. The power distribution system takes electrical power from an external source
and steps it down to the power level requirements of the various electric appliances and lights.
The major components of the power distribution system of 550 kitchen facilities include
secondary distribution boxes, cable assemblies and lighting harnesses. Electrical power
requirements are one 225-Amp, 208 VAC, 3 Phase, 60 Hz power source and two 150-kVA
secondary distribution centers. Refer to T.O. 35E4-169-31, BEAR Base Harvest Falcon/Eagle
Electric Kitchen with Mess Kit Laundry, for more information on siting kitchen facilities.
Figure 11.5. BEAR 550 Kitchen (550-Personnel)

170 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 11.6. BEAR 550 Kitchen (1100-Personnel)
11.7. Single Pallet Expeditionary Kitchen (SPEK). This specially designed kitchen is
deployed as a lightweight, highly mobile, temporary kitchen for use at remote and
underdeveloped areas for periods of up to 30 days (Figure 11.7). As the name implies, the
BEAR SPEK and all of its equipment fit onto a single 463L air cargo pallet. It is designed to feed
500 people twice a day in two-hour periods with tray-pack Unitized Group Rations-Heat and
Serve (UGR-H&S). It comes in an expandable ―EISU-90‖ container and includes a Medium
Shelter System for diners’ seating space. The SPEK’s critical equipment items are the Tray
Ration Heater (TRH), which is used to prepare the UGR-H&S menu items, and the Field
Sanitation Unit (FSU), which is used for cleaning, washing and sanitizing kitchen utensils. The
TRH and FSU can operate in temperatures from –20 degrees Fahrenheit to +120 degrees
Fahrenheit and relative humidity ranging from 20 to 80 percent. Local support for water and
wastewater disposal is required. A 2-kW diesel generator, provided with the kitchen, furnishes
the electrical power source. The entire kitchen can be easily unpacked and assembled by a
minimum of 8 personnel in about 2 hours and requires only 4 food service personnel to operate
its equipment and serve food.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 171
Figure 11.7. Single-Pallet Expeditionary Kitchen (SPEK)
11.8. M-80 Water Heater. The M-80 water heater (Figure 11.8) is the primary boiler
component for several BEAR assets, namely the shave/shower unit, the 550-person kitchen and
the standardized field laundry. The heater is self-contained and operates on either diesel or
gasoline, consuming approximately five gallons per hour. It weighs approximately 465 pounds
and is skid-mounted with forklift tine inserts for ease of movement. Its overall size is 52 inches
long by 27 inches wide by 47 inches high. It has a capacity of 23.7 gallons and provides nine
gallons of water per minute at 100 degrees Fahrenheit. The heater comes as an integral part of all
the systems it supports; i.e., it does not have to be requested separately. Details on the operation
of the M-80 water heater can be found in T.O. 35E7-4-27-1, Heater, Water, Liquid Fuel, M-80,
and AFH 10-222, Volume 12, Guide to Bare Base Mechanical Systems.
Figure 11.8. M-80 Water Heater
11.9. WH-400 Water Heater. The WH-400 water heater (Figure 11.9) is being phased into the
BEAR inventory as a replacement for the M-80. It is a fuel-fired, skid-mounted water heater
suitable for military transport. It operates using a variety of fuels, including DF1, DF2, DFA, JP-
172 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
5, and JP-8. The heater dimensions are 75‖ H x 32‖ W x 55‖ L, and weighs 500 pounds in the
fully functioning, ready-to-operate configuration. It delivers water at a rate of 9 gpm at
temperatures between 60o F and 190o F (16o C and 88o C). It has a drum fill adaptor assembly
that permits use of 55-gallon fuel drums for extended operations.
Figure 11.9. WH-400 Water Heater
11.10. 130K Portable Heater. The 130K heater provides heated air for sleeping quarters and
work facilities (Figure 11.10). This multi-fueled heater will deliver hot air at a minimum of 1000
cubic feet per minute and at temperatures ranging from 80o F to 180o F—making it ideal for
extremely cold conditions. It can also provide forced fresh air ventilation without heating.
Consult AFH-10-222, Volume 12, and T.O. 35E7-3-4-1, Heater, 130K Multi-Fueled, Portable,
Duct Type 130,000 BTUH Model Polar Bear1, for additional information.
Figure 11.10. 130K Portable Heater
11.11. Environmental Control Units (ECUs). ECUs are used for heating, cooling,
dehumidifying, filtering, and circulating air in tents, portable shelters and vans to meet the
controlled environmental requirements of personnel and equipment. ECUs admit fresh air at a
controlled rate. In a typical application, the air conditioner is located external to the controlled
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 173
space (normally 4-6 feet away) and conditioned air is circulated into the controlled space through
supply and return ducts. ECUs are included in BEAR assets in sufficient numbers to support the
facilities included in each set.
11.11.1. Field-Deployable Environmental Control Unit (FDECU). The FDECU is the
primary BEAR ECU (Figure 11.11). There are several different models fielded and each can
be used to heat, cool, dehumidify, filter and circulate air in portable shelters and containers
for personnel and equipment. It provides a maximum of 84,000 BTUs of heat and 67,000
BTUs of cooling per hour. This unit also uses ―ozone friendly‖ R-134A refrigerant. Perhaps
most important from a mobility aspect, the FDECU is smaller and considerably lighter than
the other models. Weight and cube improvements have doubled the number of ECUs that can
be packaged per pallet. FDECUs can be fitted with chemical, biological and radiological
filters attached to an inside blower to pressurize the shelter and filter-out harmful agents.
Additional information on the FDECU can be found in T.O. 35E9-314-1, Field-Deployable
Environmental Control Unit.
Figure 11.11. Field-Deployable Environmental Control Unit
11.11.2. A/E32C-39. Commonly referred to as the Dash 39 (-39), the ECU-39 (Figure
11.12) is a BEAR legacy ECU that is being replaced by the FDECU previously addressed. In
a standard application, the unit is located external to the controlled space and the conditioned
air circulates through supply and return air ducts. The unit can also be adjusted to admit fresh
air at a controlled rate. Approximate cooling capacity is 4.5 tons. Approximate heating
capacity is 9.6 kilowatts (down to approximately 30° F). This unit uses R-22, an ozone-
depleting refrigerant.
174 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 11.12. A/E32C-39 Environmental Control Unit
11.12. Walk-In Refrigeration Units. BEAR packages contain portable, walk-in refrigeration
units or boxes that support food service storage operations or a field morgue. Refrigeration boxes
are secure, insulated containers in which the mechanical refrigeration equipment is installed.
These boxes can be moved by forklift utilizing the forklift holes provided in the aluminum skid,
which is a permanent part of the boxes. Lifting loops are also provided on each corner near the
top so that the boxes can be lifted by crane, boom, or helicopter. The walls, floor and ceiling of
the boxes are aluminum-framed, filled with densely packed insulating foam and covered with
sheet metal. These boxes must be placed on a smooth, level surface to allow ventilation under the
floor and ensure proper fitting and closing of the door. Under non-wartime conditions, an
individual must be universal chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-qualified in order to purchase, dispose
and recover refrigerants used in these units. Engineers are responsible for the setup, O&M of all
refrigeration units.
11.12.1. Advanced Design Refrigerator, 300 Cubic Foot (ADR-300). The ADR-300 (Figure
11.13) replaces the 150-cf reefer. It weighs 3,285 pounds and is approximately 9 feet wide by
7 feet long by 8 feet high. It has forklift pockets and airlift cargo rails on all four sides. The
ADR-300 has an internal capacity of 6,715 pounds which makes its maximum gross weight
10,000. It has interior racks with five removable shelves on each side wall that each holds up
to 300 pounds. The unit is also approved for helicopter sling load operations. Since the
mechanical refrigeration unit comes already attached, the ADR can be setup by one
technician, using a 10K forklift, and operational in less than an hour. For additional
information, refer to T.O. 40R7-6-1, Operator's, Unit, and Direct Support Maintenance
Manual, Advanced Design Refrigerator, 300 Cubic Foot, (ADR-300) and AFH 10-222,
Volume 12.
11.12.2. 150-Cubic Foot (CF) Refrigerator. The 150-cf refrigeration unit (Figure 11.14) is a
BEAR legacy reefer. It is used for food service, mortuary and medical applications. It weighs
800 pounds and is approximately 7 feet wide by 7 feet long by 7 feet high overall. When in
service, it must have a clear space of at least 3 feet around the condenser. These units come
in two sections: an insulated box and a mechanical refrigeration unit (MRU). See paragraph
11.12.4. for more information on MRUs. The 150 cubic foot units are being phased-out of
the inventory and replaced by the ADR-300 previously addressed.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 175
Figure 11.13. Advanced Design Refrigerator, 300 Cubic Foot (ADR-300)
Figure 11.14. Inside a 150-Cubic-Foot Refrigeration Unit
11.12.3. 1200-Cubic Foot Refrigerator. The 1,200-cf refrigeration unit (Figure 11.15) is also
a BEAR legacy reefer unit. It weighs 4,140 pounds and needs 6 feet of clear space on the
ends to allow for installation and ventilation of the condenser. This unit comes unassembled,
and takes 8 people approximately 8 hours (with a forklift) to set up. When set up, the unit is
approximately 13 feet wide by 17 feet long and 8 feet high. Similar to the 150-cf reefer, this
unit comes in two sections, insulated box and a mechanical refrigeration unit (MRU). See
paragraph 11.13.4. for more information on MRUs.
176 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure 11.15. Exterior of 1,200-Cubic Foot Refrigeration Unit
11.12.4. Mechanical Refrigeration Units (MRU). The main components of the MRU are a
condenser, a compressor and an evaporator. This unit maintains the temperature of the boxes
between 0 and 35 degrees Fahrenheit and uses R-12 refrigerant. Newer units being procured
are also capable of using R-134 refrigerant. The unit supporting the 150-cubic-foot box
(Figure 11.16) is rated at 5,000 BTUs and requires 220-volt, 3-phase electrical power. The
unit associated with the 1,200-cubic-foot box is rated at 10,000 BTUs and requires 208-volt,
3-phase power. With the assistance of a forklift, two people can install the mechanical units
on the boxes.
Figure 11.16. Mechanical Refrigeration Unit on a 150-Cubic-Foot Refrigeration Box

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 177
Chapter 12
MEDICAL FACILITIES
12.1. Introduction. Medical resources are of vital importance to contingency and wartime
operations. Deployment of medical treatment facilities (MTF) is necessary to support and sustain
sortie generation at the bare base. The basic premise is to treat and return to duty when possible
or evacuate and replace. Using phased levels of care, the AF has developed multiple deployable
MTFs to treat and evacuate casualties under all conditions (Figure 12.1). The Expeditionary
Medical Support (EMEDS) system is a component of the Aerospace Medical Contingency
Ground Support System. EMEDS is composed of UTC building blocks that provide personnel
and equipment to meet specific operational requirements. These UTCs enable a deployed MTF
to expand in an incremental or modular manner to meet the full spectrum of theater
requirements. These capabilities are used to provide essential care, deferring definitive care to
the continental United States (CONUS) or supporting theaters.
Figure 12.1. Aerial View of Expeditionary Medical Treatment Facility
12.2. Overview. This chapter begins with a discussion of the levels of AF medical assets in a
theater, followed by an outline of CE responsibilities for the support of bare base MTFs. Each
type of MTF is described in detail to permit planners to gain an appreciation of the magnitude of
the engineer task involved. Facility layouts are also shown. Finally, engineer support
requirements are summarized in ready reference tables for efficient use in the planning process.
12.3. Concept of Operations and Deployment Sequence. The Aerospace Medical
Contingency Ground Support System has almost 200 equipment and personnel UTCs tailored to
meet specific theater operational requirements. The UTCs enable the main unit of this system,
the Air Force Theater Hospital (AFTH), to deploy in modules and expand to meet the full
spectrum of specialty care requirements. The medical capability required at a beddown location
is determined by the expected casualty rates, casualty types, base population, evacuation
distances, etc. The AFTH starts with the Small, Portable Expeditionary Aeromedical Rapid
Response (SPEARR) team and, using EMEDS building blocks, expands to as large as 114 beds.
178 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
The following paragraphs provide an overview of the major elements of the EMEDS/AFTH,
(formerly called the Air Transportable Hospital). Air Combat Command (ACC) is responsible
for Manpower and Equipment Force Packaging (MEFPAK) for the EMEDS. Tables in this
chapter provide an overview of the civil engineer and other expeditionary combat support (ECS)
required for EMEDS. For additional information on EMEDS, see Air Force Tactics, Techniques,
and Procedures 3-42.7, Aerospace Medical Contingency Ground Support System.
12.3.1. EMEDS Basic. The EMEDS Basic package provides medical care for operations
with a population at risk (PAR) of 1-2,000 personnel and is currently comprised of two
modules.
12.3.1.1. Module 1—SPEARR Team. This 10-person mobile, clinically capable team
provides care that includes physician-directed resuscitation and stabilization. It may also
include advanced trauma management, emergency medical procedures and forward
resuscitative surgery. Supporting capabilities include basic laboratory, limited x-ray,
pharmacy and temporary holding facilities (Figure 12.2). Patients are treated and
returned to duty (RTD), or are stabilized for movement to an MTF capable of providing a
higher level of care. The SPEARR Team can sustain this capability for 5-7 days without
resupply for a PAR of 1-500 personnel. The team can deploy as man-portable (no shelter
for patient operations) or with a 6,000-pound sling loadable pallet trailer (patient care
shelter included).
Figure 12.2. Expeditionary Medical Support (EMEDS) SPEARR Facility
12.3.1.2. Module 2—An additional 15 personnel, supplies and infrastructure to augment

the previously deployed SPEARR team. When combined with Module 1, this package
increases medical capability to serve a PAR of up to 2,000 personnel. If necessary, both
modules may deploy at the same time as a single unit.
12.3.1.3. At full capacity, EMEDS Basic has 25 medical personnel plus equipment and
provides forward stabilization, primary care, dental services, force health protection and
preparation for aeromedical evacuation. This package has a limited inpatient care
capability consisting of four holding beds. Full operational capability for EMEDS Basic
is expected within 12 hours of arrival at the bare base. Again, ECS requirements are
summarized later in this chapter.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 179
12.3.2. EMEDS+10 Bed AFTH. This package adds another 31 personnel (total of 56)
providing care that includes resuscitation, initial wound surgery and postoperative treatment.
EMEDS+10 can provide care for seven days without resupply for a PAR of 2,000-3,000. It
has 10 inpatient beds and one ambulance. Full operational capability for EMEDS+10 Bed
AFTH is expected within 24 hours following arrival at the bare base. Full operational
capability for any of the EMEDS increments is attained when facility and clinical functional
areas (aerospace medicine, preventive medicine, dental, primary care, C2, emergency care,
critical care and surgical capability) are fully established.
12.3.3. EMEDS+25 Bed AFTH. This package adds another 30 personnel (total of 86)
providing the same level of medical/dental care as the EMEDS+10, but for a PAR of 3,000-
5,000. The package deploys with seven days of supplies and increases inpatient capacity to
25 inpatient beds (cumulative) and one additional ambulance. Full operational capability for
EMEDS+25 Bed AFTH is expected within 24 hours following arrival at the bare base.
12.3.4. EMEDS+50 Bed AFTH and up. The EMEDS+50 provides the surgical capability
found in the smaller hospitals plus rehabilitative and recovery therapy for those who can
RTD within the theater evacuation policy. This size facility is achieved by adding a 25-bed
Hospital Medical Expansion Package (HMEP) or Hospital Surgical Expansion Package
(HSEP) of 25 ward personnel and equipment to the EMEDS+25 Bed AFTH. With multiple
expansion packages, the EMEDS AFTH is expandable to 114 beds and 299 medical
personnel.
12.3.5. Transportable Blood Transshipment Center (TBTC). This Small Shelter System/
International Standardization Organization (ISO) shelter system is staffed with 12 personnel
and is designed to store and ship frozen and liquid blood products during contingency
operations. The EMEDS AFTH is only capable of storing about 60 units of blood, but each
TBTC can hold up to 7,200 units. The TBTC is normally collocated with other supporting
medical treatment facilities near a strategic airhead or major airfield. Twelve medical
personnel, with support of a 13K forklift, can assemble the TBTC in 22 hours. It is, however,
not mobile so it does require base support. Engineer support requirements consist of technical
assistance (and physical assistance if TBTC staffing is inadequate) for shelter erection and
provision of power (200-kW), water (300 gal/day) and ice (800 lbs/day).
12.4. Civil Engineer Support of Medical Facilities. In general, AF medical doctrine restricts
staff capabilities to those actions that directly perform and support medically specific functions
and technology associated with a medical unit’s mission. For all other functions, the medical
facility must rely upon CE and those ECS elements to which the medical support is provided. In
a bare base environment, CE support translates into the following engineer tasks:
12.4.1. Site Preparation: Must meet the medical facility’s specific layout requirements.
12.4.2. Shelter Erection: Furnish technical direction for shelter erection and, when required,
augment medical personnel in the assembly of discrete, functional modules into an operating
hospital complex. An all-terrain forklift must be available to set up the EMEDS/AFTH.
12.4.3. Utilities: Provide water; electricity; disposal of wastewater, liquids, solid and
biological wastes; HVAC support to maintain specified temperatures; and the final
connection of BEAR utility systems to the medical facility’s utility interfaces.
180 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
12.4.4. O&M: Repair war damage to the physical plant, utility systems and installed non-
medical equipment.
12.4.5. Fire Emergency Services: Establish a response posture to meet the fire emergency
service requirement for the type of medical facility being supported. For determination of
additive vehicles and personnel, see the Fire appendix in CE Supplement to WMP-1.
12.4.6. EOD: Provide instructions and procedures on how to conduct medical post-attack
and recovery operations in an unexploded ordnance environment.
12.5. Support Requirement by Type of EMEDS Facility.
12.5.1. Facility Shelters. All medical functions are housed in Small Shelter Systems (SSS),
except for surgery, x-ray and lab which are housed in ISO shelters. EMEDS Basic is housed
in three SSSs (Figure 12.3). The EMEDS+10 adds three additional SSSs and the
EMEDS+25 adds three more (for a total complex of nine SSSs) plus three ISO shelters. A
13K all-terrain forklift will be required to move these containers. Since the EMEDS is
designed in a modular or incremental fashion, a quick response sub-set can be transported in
one C-130 aircraft, as shown in Table 12.1.
Figure 12.3. EMEDS Small Shelter System
Table 12.1. EMEDS Airlift Impact
Facility Airlift Requirement

SPEARR (with back packs) Passengers only
SPEARR (full) 1 each C-130 sortie
EMEDS Basic 1 each C-130 sortie
EMEDS+10 AFTH 1 each C-17 sortie
EMEDS+25 AFTH 2 each C-17 sorties
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 181
12.5.2. EMEDS Basic has a one pallet SPEARR trailer, known as the Expanded Capability
and Infrastructure Module (ECIM). It is sling-loadable which enables movement by
helicopter if mission circumstances dictate.
12.5.3. Components and Equipment. The EMEDS deploys with tools needed for erection.
One 10-kW (single-phase only) generator deploys with the SPEARR for initial power.
EMEDS Basic requires base support for power. EMEDS+10 and +25 deploy with a total of
two MEP-7 portable 100-kW generators (for initial and backup power) and a 400-gallon
water trailer. One additional 100-kW generator is provided when adding a 25-bed HMEP or
HSEP.
12.5.4. Site Requirements. The EMEDS should be sited in low-threat areas, but near support
group services such as showers, billeting, kitchen, etc. Site grades must slope away from the
shelter to preventing flooding.
12.5.5. External Support Requirements. The EMEDS is equipped and staffed to provide
medical support only, and is therefore dependent on CE and base support as summarized in
Table 12.2.
182 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table 12.2. Support Required for EMEDS/AFTH
EMEDS+10 Bed EMEDS+25 Bed

Item Basic
AFTH AFTH
Site Preparation 15,000 ft2 26,000 ft2 40,000 ft2
Work Shelter 1,950 ft2 3,900 ft2 5,850 ft2
Billeting 25 people 56 people 86 people
Latrine/Showers* 29 people 67 people 113 people
Food Service
Regular 87 meals/day 198 meals/day 337 meals/day
Liquid 3 meals/day 9 meals/day 12 meals/day
Laundry 1,000 lb/week 2,000 lb/week 3,600 lb/week
Power 65-kW 100-kW 200-kW
Power w/CP- 100-kW 200-kW 200-kW
EMEDS
Fuel
Diesel 0 gal/day 150 gal/day 300 gal/day
Diesel w/CP- 150 gal/day 300 gal/day 300 gal/day
EMEDS
Water (potable) 400 gal/day 800 gal/day 1,430 gal/day
Ice 0 lb/day 85 lb/day 150 lb/day
Water Chiller ------- 1 2
Water Trailer ------- ------- -------
Medical Waste
Liquid 700 gal/day 1,400 gal/day 2,500 gal/day
Solid 180 lb/day 610 lb/day 1,100 lb/day
Telephones 9 (4 cell, 3 land, 10 (4 cell, 4 land, 12 (4 cell, 6 land,
2 crash) 2 crash) 2 crash)
Satellite/Tele 1 1 1
Medicine
Land Mobile Radio 8 8 8
STU III 1 1 1
Oxygen (LOX) 40 liter/day 60 liter/day 90 liter/day
ECUs 3 6 9
Pallets 4 17 (cumulative) 26 (cumulative)
Equipment 6K forklift 13K forklift, flatbed 13K forklift, flatbed
Movement truck truck
* Staff and patients.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 183
EMEDS+50 Bed AFTH EMEDS+114 Bed AFTH

Item
(Estimated) (Estimated)
Site Preparation 50,000 ft2 110,000 ft2
Work Shelter 8,410 ft2 TBD
Billeting 114 people 299 people
Latrine/Showers* 164 people 413 people
Food Service
Regular 492 meals/day 1239 meals/day
Liquid 20 meals/day 45 meals/day
Laundry 9,000 lb/week 20,920 lb/week
Power 200-kW 200-kW
Diesel 1,000 gal/day 2,280 gal/day
Water (potable) 5,500 gal/day 11,000 gal/day
Ice 300 lb/day 675 lb/day
Water Chiller 3** 7**
Water Trailer 1 1
Medical Waste
Liquid 4,950 gal/day 11,286 gal/day
Solid TBD TBD
Telephones 14 (4 cell, 8 land, 24 (4 cell, 18 land,
2 crash) 2 crash)
Satellite/Tele Medicine 1 1
Land Mobile Radio TBD TBD
STU III 1 1
Oxygen (LOX) 180 liter/day 410 liter/day
ECUs 16 33
Pallets TBD TBD
Equipment Movement 13K forklift, flatbed truck 13K forklift, flatbed truck
* Staff and patients
** Cumulative Total
12.6. Aeromedical Staging Facilities.
12.6.1. Mobile Aeromedical Staging Facility (MASF). The MASF is a 13-person mobile,
tented, temporary staging facility that provides rapid response patient staging, limited
holding and supports small scale contingency (SSC), humanitarian and civil disaster response
operations, and major theater war (MTW). Once deployed, the MASF is an aeromedical
evacuation (AE) system asset subordinate to the expeditionary AE Squadron to which they
184 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
are assigned and or attached. The MASF assists in the carrying out of the AE mission, and is
normally located at or near airheads capable of supporting mobility airlift (Figure 12.4).
Figure 12.4. Patients Prepared for Aeromedical Evacuation
12.6.1.1. The MASF is equipped and staffed for routine wartime processing of 10
patients at a time, a maximum flow of 40 patients in a 24-hour period, and a maximum 6
hour patient hold time. It is made up of patient care and support personnel. An additional
MASF package along with UTC FFQM2 (MASF Expansion Package +25) must be
added to increase the wartime patient flow to 80 patients per 24 hour period.
12.6.1.2. Facility Shelters, Components and Equipment. The ASF uses 168 TEMPER
tent sections. Tools needed for erection, portable 100-kW generators (for initial and
backup power) and the environmental control systems are deployed with the ASF
increments. The site should not have more than a 6-inch drop in 20 feet. The ASF must
be sited near a base or support complex.
12.6.2. Contingency Aeromedical Staging Facility (CASF). The CASF provides
personnel and equipment necessary for 24-hour staging operations for patients transiting the
Aeromedical Evacuation (AE) system worldwide. The CASF coordinates and communicates
with medical and AE elements to accomplish patient care and patient movement, including
ground transportation. It provides patient reception, complex medical/surgical nursing,
limited emergent intervention, and ensures patients are medically and administratively
prepared for flights.
12.7. External Support Requirements. Table 12.3. lists support required for ASFs.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 185
Table 12.3. Support Required for Aeromedical Staging Facilities
Mobile ASF
Item 25-Bed ASF
(10-patient staging capability)
Site Preparation 40,000 ft2 10,000 ft2
2
Work Shelter 2,750 ft 2,750 ft2
Billeting 34 people 13
Latrine/Showers* 59 (34 staff/25 patients) 23 (13 staff/10 patients)
Food Service
Regular 114 meals/day 69 meals/day
Liquid 3 meals/day 2 meals/day
Laundry 6,250 lb/week 2,415 lb/week
Power 100-kW 5-kW
Fuel (Diesel)** 250 gal/day 45 gal/day
Water (potable) 4,430 gal/day 1,725 gal/day
Ice 150 lb/day 60 lb/day
Water Chiller 2 1
Water Trailer 0 0
Medical Waste
Liquid 2,500 gal/day 1,725 gal/day
Solid 1,100 lb/day 414 lb/day
Telephones 9 (4 cell, 3 land, 2 crash) 4 (2 cell, 1 land, 1 crash)
Satellite/Tele Medicine 1 1
Land Mobile Radio 8 4
STU III 1 1
Oxygen (LOX) 90 liter/day 35 liter/day
ECUs*** 4 0
Pallets 8 (cumulative) Rolling stock packed on 2 HMMWV
Equipment Movement 13K forklift, flatbed truck 0
* Staff and patients.
** Generator and 2
HMMWV.
*** The Mobile ASF does not include ECUs. An FFQM3 Staging Support Pg can be
requested to provide 2 ECU/60KW generator capability.
186 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
12.8. Biological/Chemically Contaminated Casualties. The EMEDS, MASF and CASF do

not have Collectively Protected (CP) shelters and any patients being treated or awaiting
movement during an attack will require individual protective equipment (IPE) or protective
patient wraps (See AFTTP 3-42.3, Health Service Support in Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical
Environments, Table 4.1., Note 1).
HERBERT J. CARLISLE, Lt General, USAF

DCS/Operations, Plans, and Requirements (A3/5)
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 187
Attachment 1
GLOSSARY OF REFERENCES AND SUPPORTING INFORMATION
References:
DODI 4715-19, Use of Open-air Burn Pits in Contingency Operations, 15 February 2011
JP 1-02, Department of Defense Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms, 8 November 2010
JP 3-34, Joint Engineer Operations, 12 February 2007
JP 4-03, Joint Bulk Petroleum and Water Doctrine, 9 December 2010
USAF War and Mobilization Plan, WMP-1, Civil Engineer Supplement, 17 May 2007
AFDD 1-2, Air Force Glossary, 11 January 2007
AFDD 3-10, Force Protection, 28 July 2011
AFDD 3-34, Engineer Operations, 19 September 2011
AFI 10-208, Continuity of Operations (COOP) Program, 1 December 2005
AFI 10-209, RED HORSE Program, 13 May 2008
AFI 10-210, Prime Base Engineer Emergency Force (BEEF) Program, 15 November 2010
AFI 10-211, Civil Engineer Contingency Response Planning, 16 November 2011
AFI 10-214, Air Force Prime RIBS Program, 27 February 2006
AFI 10-2501, AF Emergency Management Program Planning and Operations, 24 January 2007
AFI 10-401, Air Force Operations Planning and Execution, 7 December 2006
AFI 10-403, Deployment Planning and Execution, 13 January 2008
AFI 10-404, Base Support and Expeditionary (BAS&E) Site Planning, 11 October 2011
AFI 10-601, Operational Capability Requirements Development, 12 July 2010
AFI 25-101, War Reserve Materiel (WRM) Program Guidance & Procedures, 2 May 2005
AFI 25-201, Support Agreements Procedures, 1 May 2005
AFI 32-10112, Installation Geospatial Information and Services (IGI&S), 19 October 2007
AFI 32-1042, Standards for Marking Airfields, 27 October 2005
AFI 32-7001, Environmental Management, 4 November 2011
AFI 32-7042, Waste Management, 15 Apr 2009
AFI 34-246, Air Force Lodging Program, 9 November 2007
AFI 41-106, Medical Readiness Program Management, 1 July 2011
AFI 48-101, Aerospace Medicine Enterprise, 19 October 2011
AFMAN 10-2503, Operations in a Chemical, Biological, Radiological, Nuclear, and High-Yield
Explosive (CBRNE) Environment, 7 July 2011
188 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
AFMAN 91-201, Explosives Safety Standards, 12 Jan 2011

AFPAM 10-1403, Air Mobility Planning Factors, 12 December 2011
AFPAM 10-219V1, Contingency and Disaster Planning, 9 June 2008
AFPAM 10-219V2, Civil Engineer Disaster and Attack Preparations, 9 June 2008
AFPAM 10-219V3, Civil Engineer Disaster and Attack Recovery Procedures, 9 June 2008
AFPAM 10-219V4, Airfield Damage Repair Operations, 28 May 2008
AFPAM 10-219V6, Planning and Design of Expeditionary Airbases, 1 February 2006
AFPAM 10-219V7, Expedient Methods, 9 June 2008
AFPAM 23-221, Fuels Logistics Planning, 22 December 2006
AFH 10-222V1, Guide to Bare Base Development, 1 February 2006
AFH 10-222V2, Guide to Bare Base Assets, 1 April 2006
AFH 10-222V4, Environmental Guide for Contingency Operations Overseas, 1 March 2007
AFH 10-222V5, Guide to Contingency Electrical Power System Installation, 1 July 2008
AFH 10-222V6, Guide to Bare Base Facility Erection, 1 July 2008
AFH 10-222V7, Emergency Airfield Lighting System (EALS), 1 December 2011
AFH 10-222V8, Guide to Mobile Aircraft Arresting System Installation, 1 May 2006
AFH 10-222V10, Civil Engineer Camouflage, Concealment & Deception Measures,
18 February 2011
AFH 10-222, V11, Contingency Water System Installation and Operation, 19 May 2011
AFH 10-222V12, Guide to Bare Base Mechanical Systems, 23 April 2009
AFH 10-222V14, Civil Engineer Guide to Fighting Positions, Shelters, Obstacles, and
Revetments, 1 August 2008
AFH 10-247V1, Guide to Services Contingency Planning: Beddown, 10 February 2005
AFH 31-109, Integrated Defense Handbook, 14 October 2010
AFH 32-1084, Facility Requirements, 1 September 1996
AFTTP 3-2.68 IP, Multi-service Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Airfield Opening,
7 May 2007
AFTTP 3-42.7, Aerospace Medical Contingency Ground Support System, 24 August 2001
CINC’s Preparedness Assessment Report VIII, Expeditionary Medical Support and the SPEARR
Team Update, 1 December 2000
UFC 3-240-10A, Sanitary Landfill, 16 January 2004
UFC 3-260-01, Design: Airfield and Heliport Planning and Design, 17 November 2008
UFC 3-260-02, Pavement Design for Airfields, 30 June 2001
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 189
UFC 4-010-01, DOD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings, 8 October 2003
UFC 4-010-02, DOD Minimum Antiterrorism Standoff Distances for Buildings (FOUO),
8 October 2003
ETL 09-1, Airfield Planning and Design Criteria for Unmanned Aircraft Systems (UAS),
28 September 2009
ETL 09-3, Chemical Dust Control for Contingency Roads, Base Camps, Helipads, and Airfields,
3 Mar 2009
ETL 09-6, C-130 and C-17 Landing Zone (LZ) Dimensional, Marking, and Lighting Criteria,
17 August 2009
T.O. 35E4-133-1, Bare Base 76-Foot Aircraft Maintenance Hangar, 23 December 2002
T.O. 35E4-169-31, BEAR Base Harvest Falcon/Eagle Electric Kitchen with Mess Kit Laundry,
1 May 2006
T.O. 35E4-170-2, Aircraft Revetment Kit, Type B-1, 6 May 1982
T.O. 35E4-183-1, Frame-Supported Tensioned Fabric Shelter, Types A and B, 11 December
1991
T.O. 35E4-216-1, Bare Base Dome Shelter, 30 September 2005
T.O. 35E5-6-1, Tent, Extendable, Modular, Personnel (TEMPER), 1 March 1993
T.O. 35E5-6-11, Alaska Small Shelter System (AKSSS), 1 December 2004
T.O. 35E5-6-21, California Medium Shelter System, 9 March 2000
T.O. 35E7-3-4-1, Heater, 130K Multi-Fueled, Portable, Duct Type 130,000 BTUH Model Polar
Bear1, 1 July 2007
T.O. 35E7-4-27-1, Heater, Water, Liquid Fuel, M-80, 30 June 2005
T.O. 35E8-2-10-1, Arresting Systems, Aircraft, Mobile, 1 September 2009
T.O. 35E9-314-1, Field-Deployable Environmental Control Unit, 17 October 2008
T.O. 35F5-3-17-1, Lighting System, Airfield, Emergency A/E82U-2, 1 October 2000
T.O. 35F5-5-22-1, Remote Area Lighting System (RALS) for Deployable Power Generation and
Distribution System (DPGDS), 29 January 2004
T.O. 37A12-15-1, Collapsible Fuel Bladders, 30 January 2004
T.O. 40R7-6-1, Operator's, Unit, and Direct Support Maintenance Manual, Advanced Design
Refrigerator, 300 Cubic Foot, (ADR-300), 7 February 2007
T.O. 40W4-21-1, Basic Expeditionary Airfield Resources (BEAR) Water System PN 3000001,
1 May 2007
TM 9-4520-257-12, Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual for Heater, Space, Radiant,
Large (H-45, 17 September 1992
190 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Adopted Forms
AF Form 847, Recommendation for Change of Publication.
Abbreviations and Acronyms

AB—Air Base
AC—Alternating Current; Aircraft
ACC—Air Combat Command
ACH—Aircraft Maintenance Hangar
ACS—Agile Combat Support
ADR—Airfield Damage Repair; Advanced Design Refrigerator
ADVON—Advance Echelon
AE—Aeromedical Evacuation
AEF—Air Expeditionary Force
AFCAP—Air Force Contract Augmentation Program
AFCESA—Air Force Civil Engineer Support Agency
AFDD—Air Force Doctrine Document
AFI—Air Force Instruction
AFMAN—Air Force Manual
AFPAM—Air Force Pamphlet
AFPD—Air Force Policy Directive
AFS—Air Force Specialty
AFTH—Air Force Theater Hospital
AFTTP—Air Force Tactics, Techniques and Procedures
AGE—Aerospace Ground Equipment
AMC—Air Mobility Command
Amp— —Ampere
ANC—Air Navigation Charts
ANG—Air National Guard
AO—Area of Operations
AOR—Area of Responsibility
AS—Allowance Standard
ASF—Aeromedical Staging Facility
AWG—American Wire Gauge
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 191
BCE—Base Civil Engineer

BEAR—Basic Expeditionary Airfield Resources
BOB—BEAR Order of Battle
BOD—Biochemical Oxygen Demand
BTU—British Thermal Unit
C2—Command And Control
CASF—Contingency Aeromedical Staging Facility
CBRNE—Chemical, Biological, Radiological, Nuclear and High-Yield Explosive
CCD—Camouflage, Concealment and Deception
CE—Civil Engineering; Civil Engineer
CEMIRT—Civil Engineer Maintenance, Inspection and Repair Team
CFC—Chlorofluorocarbon
CIP—Common Installation Picture
CONPLAN—Concept Plan
CONOPS—Concept of Operations
CONUS—Continental United States
COTS—Commercial-Off-The-Shelf
CP—EMEDS —Collective Protection Expeditionary Medical Support
DC—Direct Current
DOD—Department Of Defense
EALS—Emergency Airfield Lighting System
ECU—Environmental Control Unit
EMEDS—Expeditionary Medical Support
EOD—Explosive Ordnance Disposal
ESC—Expandable Shelter Container
ETL—Engineering Technical Letter
FDECU—Field Deployable Environmental Control Unit
FEL—Front-End Loader
FFM—Folded Fiberglass Mat
F/L—Fork Lift
FOA—Field Operating Agency
FOL—Forward Operating Location
192 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
FORCE—Fuels Operational Readiness Capability Equipment

FSTFS—Frame Supported Tension Fabric Shelter
FSU—Field Sanitation Unit
Gal——Gallon
Gal/D—Gallon Per Day
GCCS—Global Command and Control System
GP—General Purpose (Tent)
GPD—Gallons Per Day
GPH—Gallons Per Hour
GPM—Gallons Per Minute; General Purpose Medium (Tent)
Gpppd— —Gallons Per Person Per Day
HE—Harvest Eagle
HF—Harvest Falcon
HMEP—Hospital Medical Expansion Package
HN—Host Nation
Hp——Horsepower
HSEP—Hospital Surgical Expansion Package
HVAC—Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
Hz——Hertz
IOC—Initial Operating Capability
IPE—Individual Protective Equipment
IPU—Interim Power Unit
ISO—International Standardization Organization
JCS—Joint Chiefs of Staff
JSP—Joint Support Plan
Kg——Kilograms
Km——Kilometers
Kv——Kilovolt
kVA—Kilovolt Ampere
kW— —Kilowatt
LAM—Large Area Maintenance Shelter
LCN—Load Classification Number
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 193
LOGCAP—Logistics Civil Augmentation Program

LOX—Liquid Oxygen
LN—Local National
MAAS—Mobile Aircraft Arresting System
MAJCOM—Major Command
MASF—Mobile Aeromedical Staging Facility
MEP—Mobile Electric Power
MEFPAK—Manpower and Equipment Force Packaging
MMG—Materiel Maintenance Group
MOB—Main Operating Base
MOS—Minimum Operating Strip
MCO—Major Combat Operations
MSS—Medium Shelter System
MTF—Medical Treatment Facility
NAF—Numbered Air Force
NATO—North Atlantic Treaty Organization
NAVAIDS—Navigational Aids
NAVFAC—Naval Facilities Engineering Command
NSN—National Stock Number
O&M—Operation and Maintenance
OPLAN—Operations Plan
OSI—Office of Special Investigations
PAPI—Precision Approach Path Indicator
PAR—Population At Risk
PCN—Pavement Classification Number
PDC—Primary Distribution Center
POL—Petroleum, Oils and Lubricants
PPM—Parts Per Million
Prime BEEF—Prime Base Engineer Emergency Force
Prime RIBS—Prime Readiness In Base Services
PSC—Primary Switching Center
PSI—Pounds per Square Inch
194 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
RALS—Remote Area Lighting Set

RAPCON—Radar Approach Control
RBC—Reach Back Center
RHS—RED HORSE Squadron
ROWPU—Reverse Osmosis Water Purification Unit
RP—Reference Point
RTD—Return To Duty
SDC—Secondary Distribution Center
SF—Square Feet
SPEARR—Small Portable Expeditionary Aeromedical Rapid Response
SPEK—Single Pallet Expeditionary Kitchen
SSS—Small Shelter System
SWA—Southwest Asia
TACAN—Tactical Air Navigation
TBTC—Transportable Blood Transshipment Center
TEMPER—Tent Extendable Modular Personnel
TM—Technical Manual
T.O.——Technical Order
TPFDD—Time Phased Force and Deployment Data
TPFDL—Time Phased Force and Deployment List
UAS—Unmanned Aircraft Systems
UFC—Unified Facilities Criteria
UGR—H&S —Unitized Group Rations-Heat and Serve
UTC—Unit Type Code
VA—Volt-Ampere
VAC—Volts Alternating Current
WMP—War And Mobilization Plan
WRM—War Readiness Materiel
Terms
Aeromedical Evacuation—The movement of patients under medical supervision to and
between medical treatment facilities, usually by air transportation.
Air Expeditionary Force—Deployed US Air Force wings, groups and squadrons committed to
a joint operation.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 195
Aircraft Arresting System—A series of components used to stop an aircraft by absorbing its
momentum in a routine or emergency landing or aborted takeoff.
Airfield Damage Repair (ADR)—The process of using construction equipment, tools, portable
equipment, expendable supplies and temporary surfacing materials to provide a minimum
operating surface through expedient repair methods.
Air Base Defense—Those measures taken to nullify or reduce the effectiveness of enemy
attacks on, or sabotage of, air bases to ensure that the senior commander retains the capability to
assure aircraft sortie generation.
Air Force Civil Engineer Support Agency (AFCESA)—A field operating agency (FOA)
located at Tyndall Air Force Base, Florida. The Readiness Support Directorate (HQ
AFCESA/CEX) acts as the Air Force program manager for civil engineer contingency response
planning.
Air Force Contract Augmentation Program (AFCAP)—A program under which civilian
contractors/commercially available resources can be used to fill critical base operating support
functions/asset requirements that occur during a wide range of contingency, crisis, and wartime
operations. AFCAP uses civilian contractual assistance during peacetime to locate and plan for
the acquisition of worldwide commercial resources (personnel and materiel) assets to meet AF
wartime support requirements.
Area of Operations (AO)—An operational area defined by the joint force commander for land
and naval forces. Areas of operation do not typically encompass the entire operational area of the
joint force commander, but should be large enough for component commanders to accomplish
their missions and protect their forces.
Bare Base—A base having minimum essential facilities to house, sustain and support operations
to include, if required, a stabilized runway, taxiways and aircraft parking areas. A bare base must
have a source of water that can be made potable. Other requirements to operate under bare
conditions form a necessary part of the force package deployed to the bare base.
Base Denial—The destruction or denial of vital air base resources so the enemy cannot use them
against friendly forces or for his benefit.
Base Development—The acquisition, development, expansion, improvement and construction
or replacement of the facilities and resources of an area or location to support forces employed in
military operations or deployed in accordance with strategic plans.
Basic Expeditionary Airfield Resources (BEAR)—Facilities, equipment and basic
infrastructure to support the beddown of deployed forces and aircraft at austere locations; a
critical capability to fielding expeditionary aerospace forces. Also known as BEAR, the
resources include tents, field kitchens, latrine systems, shop equipment, electrical and power
systems, runway systems, aircraft shelters and water systems needed to sustain operations.
Camouflage, Concealment and Deception—The use of concealment, disguise and decoys to
minimize the possibility of detection or identification of troops, material, equipment and
installations. It includes taking advantage of the natural environment as well as the application of
natural and artificial materials.
Chemical Warfare—All aspects of military operations involving the employment of lethal and
incapacitating munitions/agents and the warning and protective measures associated with such
196 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
offensive operations. Since riot control agents and herbicides are not considered to be chemical
warfare agents, those two items are referred to separately or under the broader term "chemical",
which is used to include all types of chemical munitions or agents collectively (JP 1-02).
Collective Protection Shelter—A filtered air shelter that provides a contamination-free working
environment for selected portions of the force such as command and control elements. The
shelter allows relief from continuous wear of chemical protective equipment.
Collocated Operating Base—An active or Reserve allied airfield designated for joint or
unilateral use by US Air Force wartime augmentation forces or for wartime relocation of US Air
Force in-theater forces. COBs are not US bases.
Command and Control—The exercise of authority and direction by a properly designated
commander over assigned and attached forces in the accomplishment of the mission. Command
and control functions are performed through an arrangement of personnel, equipment,
communications, facilities and procedures employed by a commander in planning, directing,
coordinating and controlling forces and operations in the accomplishment of the mission (JP 1-
02).
Contingency—An emergency, involving military forces, caused by natural disasters, terrorists,
subversives, or by required military operations. Due to the uncertainty of the situation,
contingencies require plans, rapid response and special procedures to ensure the safety and
readiness of personnel, installations and equipment (JP 1-02).
Contingency Plan—A plan for major contingencies that can reasonably be anticipated in the
principal geographic subareas of the command (JP 1-02).
Contingency Response Plan—A base civil engineer plan of action developed in anticipation of
all types of contingencies, emergencies and disasters.
Decontamination—The process of making any person, object, or area safe by absorbing,
destroying, neutralizing, making harmless, or removing chemical or biological agents or by
removing radioactive material clinging to or around it.
Deployment—The relocation of forces and material to desired areas of operations or to a staging
area. Deployment encompasses all activities from origin or home station through destination,
specifically including within the United States, inter-theater and intra-theater movement legs,
staging and holding areas. (JP 1-02). Deployment begins when the first aircraft, personnel, or
item of equipment leaves the home base. The force is deployed when the last component of the
unit has arrived at the desired area.
Dispersal—Relocation of forces for the purpose of increasing survivability.
Doctrine—Fundamental principles by which military forces guide their actions in support of the
national objectives. It is authoritative but requires judgment in application (JP 1-02).
Expeditionary Operation—An operation conducted by an armed force organized to accomplish
a specific objective in a foreign country. Examples of expeditionary operations include engaging
in armed conflict; protecting US citizens or commerce abroad; providing humanitarian assistance
after a natural or manmade disaster; and conducting peacekeeping operations.
Expeditionary Structures—Those structures intended to be inhabited for no more than 1 year
after they are erected. This group of structures typically include tents, Small and Medium Shelter
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 197
Systems, Expandable Shelter Containers (ESC), ISO and CONEX containers, and General
Purpose (GP) Medium tents and GP Large tents, etc.
Explosive Ordnance Disposal (EOD)—The detection, identification, on-site evaluation,
rendering-safe, recovery and final disposal of unexploded explosive ordnance. It may also
include explosive ordnance that has become hazardous by damage or deterioration.
Fabric Covered Structures—A construction type that can be identified by wood or metal
(usually aluminum) posts or load-bearing frames with some type of fabric (such as canvas)
stretched or pulled over the posts or frames. Examples of the types of structures that should be
considered under this classification of structures include Frame-Supported Tensioned Fabric
Structures (FSTFS); Tent, Extendable, Modular, Personnel (TEMPER Tents); and Small and
Medium Shelter Systems (SSS and MSS); General Purpose (GP) Medium tents and GP Large
tents; and air supported fabric
structures. Testing has shown that for these fabric structures, the posts and frames are
what cause hazards (UFC 4—010-01).
Facility—Any structure, pavement, or utility system that supports Air Force operations. For
emergency planning purposes, the term facility in 40 CFR 355, as it applies to the Air Force, is
considered equivalent to an installation.
Force Beddown—The provision of expedient facilities for troop support to provide a platform
for the projection of force. These facilities may include modular or kit-type substitutes (JP 3-34).
Force Module—A grouping of combat, combat support and combat service support forces, with
their accompanying supplies and the required nonunit resupply and personnel necessary to
sustain forces for a minimum of 30 days. The elements of force modules are linked together or
are uniquely identified so that they may be extracted from or adjusted as an entity in the Joint
Operation Planning and Execution System databases to enhance flexibility and usefulness of the
operation during a crisis (JP 1-02).
Forward Operating Base—An airfield used to support tactical operations without establishing
full support facilities. The base may be used for an extended time period. Support by a main
operating base will be required to provide backup support for a forward operating base (JP 1-02).
Harvest Eagle—A nickname for a legacy air transportable, tent-based system of housekeeping
support facilities designed to provide basic living accommodations, field feeding and hygiene
support under bare base conditions. Each kit is designed to provide softwall housekeeping
support for 550 personnel. Facilities are not air conditioned and are powered with low voltage,
tactical power generator systems. Examples of Harvest Eagle equipment are water purification
units, tents and showers. Harvest Eagle packages are being entirely phased out and the
equipment phased into BEAR modules.
Harvest Falcon—A nickname for a legacy air transportable system of hardwall shelters, tents,
equipment and vehicles designed to provide worldwide support of personnel and squadron size
aircraft deployments under bare base conditions. These sets provide direct mission and
housekeeping support facilities for up to 55,000 personnel and 822 aircraft at up to 15 separate
beddown locations. It includes facilities, equipment and supplies necessary to establish and
maintain base support functions such as base civil engineering, vehicle maintenance, supply,
chapel, pest management, field exchange, administration and chaplain support. Harvest Falcon is
198 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
sized into 50, 1,100-person bare base housekeeping sets, 15 flightline initial sets, 25 flightline
follow-on support sets and 15 industrial operations support sets. Harvest Falcon sets are being
entirely phased out and the equipment phased into BEAR modules.
Hazardous Material—All hazardous substances, petroleum, natural gas, synthetic gas, acutely
toxic chemicals and other toxic chemicals including hazardous waste.
High Threat Area—An area that, because of its location or strategic targets, is highly
susceptible to enemy attacks.
Host Nation—A nation that receives the forces and or supplies of allied nations, coalition
partners or NATO organizations to be located on, to operate in, or to transit through its territory.
Host Nation Support—Civil or military assistance rendered by a nation to foreign forces within
its territory during peacetime, crisis or emergencies, or war based on agreements mutually
concluded between nations.
Joint Support Plan—A plan for the reception and beddown of forces that is collectively
developed by the host nation, the theater in-place sponsor and the affected augmentation unit.
The plan outlines all facets of operations at a collocated operating base to include personnel,
facilities and equipment.
Limiting Factor—A factor or condition that, either temporarily or permanently, impedes
mission accomplishment. Illustrative examples are transportation network deficiencies, lack of
in-place facilities, malpositioned forces or materiel, extreme climatic conditions, distance, transit
or overflight rights, political conditions, etc.
Main Operating Base (MOB)—In special operations, a base established by a joint force special
operations component commander or a subordinate special operations component commander in
friendly territory to provide sustained command and control, administration and logistical
support to special operations activities in designated areas. Also, a base on which all essential
buildings and facilities are erected and organizational and intermediate maintenance capability
exists for assigned weapon systems. The intermediate maintenance capability may be expanded
to support specific weapon systems deployed to the MOB. Also called main operations base.
Manpower and Equipment Force Packaging (MEFPAK)—-A data system that supports
contingency and general war planning with predefined and standardized personnel and
equipment force packages. MEFPAK has two subsystems: the Manpower Force Packaging
System (MANFOR) and the Logistics Force Packaging System (LOGFOR).
Manpower Force Packaging System (MANFOR)—A MEFPAK subsystem that provides: (1)
the title of the unit or force element and its unique Joint Chiefs of Staff Unit Type Code, (2) the
mission capability statement (MISCAP) containing the definition of a UTC’s capability, and (3)
the manpower detail by function, grade (officers only) and Air Force specialty required to meet
the defined capability.
Operation Plan—Any plan, except for the Single Integrated Operation Plan, for the conduct of
military operations. Plans are prepared by combatant commanders in response to requirements
established by the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff and by commanders of subordinate
commands in response to requirements tasked by the establishing unified commander. Operation
plans are prepared in either a complete format (OPLAN) or as a concept plan (CONPLAN). The
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 199
CONPLAN can be published with or without a time-phased force and deployment data (TPFDD)
file.
a. OPLAN—An operation plan for the conduct of joint operations that can be used as a basis for
development of an operation order (OPORD). An OPLAN identifies the forces and supplies
required to execute the combatant commander’s strategic concept and a movement schedule of
these resources to the theater of operations. The forces and supplies are identified in TPFDD
files. OPLANs will include all phases of the tasked operation. The plan is prepared with the
appropriate annexes, appendixes and TPFDD files as described in the Joint Operation Planning
and Execution System manuals containing planning policies, procedures and formats.
b. CONPLAN—An operation plan in an abbreviated format that would require considerable
expansion or alteration to convert it into an OPLAN or OPORD. A CONPLAN contains the
combatant commander’s strategic concept and those annexes and appendixes deemed necessary
by the combatant commander to complete planning. Generally, detailed support requirements are
not calculated and TPFDD files are not prepared.
c. CONPLAN with TPFDD—A CONPLAN with TPFDD is the same as a CONPLAN except
that it requires more detailed planning for phased deployment of forces.
Playbook Option—Equipment available to but excluded from BEAR sets to allow planners
greater tasking flexibility. While these items provide significant capability, they may not be
needed in the core BEAR sets each and every deployment. Playbook options consist of 16 major
UTCs including the MAAS, 550 kitchen, EALS, self-help laundry, AM-2 matting and ROWPU.
Potable Water—Water that is safe for drinking because it is free from contamination, pollution
and harmful impurities.
Primary Circuit—An electrical circuit carrying greater than 600 volts.
Prime BEEF (Base Engineer Emergency Forces)—A headquarters US Air Force, major
command (MAJCOM) and base-level program that organizes civil engineer forces for worldwide
direct and indirect combat support roles. It assigns civilian employees and military personnel to
both peacetime real property maintenance and wartime engineering functions.
Readiness—The ability of US military forces to fight and meet the demands of the national
military strategy. Readiness is the synthesis of two distinct but interrelated levels: (a) Unit
readiness – the ability to provide capabilities required by the Combatant Commanders to execute
their assigned missions. This is derived from the ability of each unit to deliver the outputs for
which it was designed. (b) Joint readiness – the Combatant Commander’s ability to integrate and
synchronize ready combat and support forces to execute his or her assigned missions (JP 1-02).
RED HORSE Squadrons (RHS)—These squadrons provide the Air Force with a highly
mobile, self-sufficient, rapidly deployable civil engineering capability required in a potential
theater of operations.
Reverse Osmosis Water Purification Unit (ROWPU)— A water purification device that uses
a series of membranes to eliminate impurities. The ROWPU is capable of removing dissolved
minerals.
Secondary Circuit—An electrical circuit carrying less than 600 volts.
200 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Standoff—A steel or wood curtain erected approximately 10 feet in front of a protective

structure to detonate shells and thereby reduce the penetrating effect.
Survivability—Capability of a system to accomplish its mission in the face of an unnatural
(man-made) hostile, scenario-dependent environment. Survivability may be achieved by
avoidance, hardness, proliferation, or reconstitution (or a combination).
Temporary Structures—Those structures that are erected with an expected occupancy of 3
years or less. This group of structures typically includes wood frame and rigid wall construction,
and such things as Southeast Asia (SEA) Huts, hardback tents, ISO and CONEX containers, pre-
engineered buildings, trailers, stress tensioned shelters, Expandable Shelter Containers (ESC),
and Aircraft Hangars (ACH).
Terrorism—The calculated use of unlawful violence or threat of unlawful violence to instill
fear; intended to coerce or to intimidate governments or societies in the pursuit of goals that are
generally political, religious, or ideological.
Time-Phased Force and Deployment List (TPFDL)—Appendix 1 to Annex A of the operation
plan which identifies types or actual units required to support the operation plan and indicates
origin and ports of debarkation or ocean area. It may also be generated as a computer listing from
the time-phased force and deployment data.
Unit Type Code (UTC)—A Joint Chiefs of Staff developed and assigned code, consisting of
five characters that uniquely identify a ―type unit.‖
War And Mobilization Plan (WMP)—The Air Force supporting plan to the Joint Strategic
Capabilities Plan. The six volumes of the WMP extend through the Future Years Defense
Program to provide continuity in short- and mid-range war and mobilization planning. It
provides current planning cycle policies and planning factors for the conduct and support of
wartime operations. It establishes requirements for development of mobilization and production
planning programs to support sustained contingency operations of the programmed forces. The
WMP encompasses all functions necessary to match facilities, manpower and materiel with
planned wartime activity.
War Damage Repair—The repair of all facilities except airfield pavements.
War Readiness Materiel (WRM)—Materiel required in addition to primary operating stocks
and mobility equipment to attain the operational objectives in the scenarios authorized for
sustainability planning in the Defense Planning Guidance. Broad categories are: consumables
associated with sortie generation (to include munitions, aircraft external fuel tanks, racks,
adapters and pylons); vehicles; 463L palletization systems; materiel handling equipment; aircraft
engines; BEAR assets; individual clothing and equipment; munitions and subsistence.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 201
Attachment 2
ELECTRICAL CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS IN SOUTHWEST ASIA (SWA)
Table A2.1. SWA Electrical Current Characteristics
ELECTRICAL CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS IN SWA
Type and Frequency Stable

Number of Nominal Number of
Country and Frequency of Enough for
Phases Voltage Wires
City Current Electric Clocks
Afghanistan
Charikar a.c.60 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Farah a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Ghazni a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Gulbahar a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Heart a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Jalalabad a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Kabul a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Kandshar a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Kunduz a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Maimana a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Mazar-i-Sharif a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Paghman a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Pul-i-Khumri a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Egypt
Alexandria a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2 No
Asyut a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Aswan a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Benha a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Beni Suef a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Cairo a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Damanhur a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Damietta a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Heliopolia a.c.50 1 110 2 No
1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Helwan a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3.4 No
Ismaila a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Dafr el Zaiyat a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Kena a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
202 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012

Egypt (cont)
Luxor a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
El Maadi a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
El Mansura a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
El Mahalla a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Minia a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Port Fouad a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Port Said a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Port Tewik a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Sohag a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Suez a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Tanta a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Zagazig a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Iran
Abadan a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Ahwaz a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Behshahr a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Ghazvin a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Hamadan a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Isfahan a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Karaj a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Kashan a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Kerman a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Kermanshah a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Korramshahr a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3.4 Yes
Masjed Soleyman a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Meshed a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Pahlevi a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Qom a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Resht a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Rezaiyeh a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Shiraz a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3.4 Yes
Tabriz a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Tehran a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Yazd a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 203

Country and Number of Nominal Number of
Frequency of Enough for
City Phases Voltage Wires
Current Electric Clocks
Iraq (Note 1)
Baghdad a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Basra a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Kirkuk a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Mosul a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Israel (Notes 1 & 2)
Beer Sheba
Haifa a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Holon a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Natanya a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Petah Tiqva a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Ramat-Gan a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Rehovot a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Tel Aviv a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Jerusalem a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Jordan (Note 1/ 2)
Amman a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Irbid a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Nablus a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Zerqa a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Kuwait a.c.50 1,3 240/415 2,4 Yes

Lebanon
Aley a.c.50 1,3 110/190 2,4 No
Beirut a.c.50 1,3 110/190 2,4 No
Bhamdoun a.c.50 1,3 110/190 2,4 No
Brummana a.c.50 1,3 110/190 2,4 No
Chtaure a.c.50 1,3 110/190 2,4 No
Dhour el Choueir a.c.50 1,3 110/190 2,4 No
Sidon a.c.50 1,3 110/190 2,4 No
Sofar a.c.50 1,3 110/190 2,4 No
Tripoli a.c.50 1,3 110/190 2,4 No
Tyre a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 No
Zahleh a.c.50 1,3 110/190 2,4 No
a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
204 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012

Libya (Notes 3 & 4)
Al Aziziyah a.c.50 1,3 127/220 2,4 No
Barce a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,4 No
Ben Gashir a.c.50 1,3 127/220 2,4 No
Benghazi a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,4 No
Derna a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,4 No
El Baida a.c.50 1,3 230 2,4 No
Homs a.c.50 1,3 127/220 2,4 No
Misurata a.c.50 1,3 127/220 2,4 No
Sebha a.c.50 1 230 1 No
Tagiura a.c.50 1,3 127/220 2,4 No
Tobruk a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,4 No
Tripoli a.c.50 1,3 127/220 2,4 No
Zavia a.c.50 1,3 127/220 2,4 No
Oman
Muscat a.c.50 1,3 220/440 2,3 No
Pakistan (Note 1)
Abbotabad a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,3,4 Yes
Bahawalpur a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,3,4 Yes
Hyderabad a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,3,4 Yes
Islamabad a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,3,4 Yes
Karachi a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,3,4 Yes
Lahore a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,3,4 Yes
Lyallpur a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,3,4 Yes
Montgomery a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,3,4 Yes
Multan a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,3,4 Yes
Murree a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,3.4 Yes
Peshawar a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,3,4 Yes
Quetta a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,3,4 Yes
Rawalpindi a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,3,4 Yes
Saudi Arabia
(Notes 5 & 6)
Al Khobar a.c.60 1,3 127/220 2,4 Yes
Buraydah a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,4 No
Dammam a.c.60 1,3 127/220 2,4 Yes
Hofuf a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,4 Yes
Jiddah a.c.60 1,3 127/220 2,3,4 Yes
Mecca a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,4 Yes
Medina a.c.60 1,3 127/220 2,4 Yes
Riyadh a.c.60 1,3 127/220 2,4 Yes
Taif a.c.50 1,3 230/400 2,4 Yes
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 205

Sudan (Note 1)
Atbara a.c.50 1,3 240/415 2,4 Yes
Ed Daner a.c.50 1,3 240/415 2,4 Yes
Ed Dueim a.c.50 1,3 240/415 2,4 Yes
El Obeid a.c.50 1,3 240/415 2,4 Yes
Hassa Heissa a.c.50 1,3 240/415 2,4 Yes
Juba a.c.50 1,3 240/415 2,4 Yes
Kassala a.c.50 1,3 240/415 2,4 Yes
Khartoum a.c.50 1,3 240/415 2,4 Yes
Khartoum N a.c.50 1,3 240/415 2,4 Yes
Kosti a.c.50 1,3 240/415 2,4 Yes
Malakal a.c.50 1,3 240/415 2,4 Yes
Omdurman a.c.50 1,3 240/415 2,4 Yes
Port Sudan a.c.50 1,3 240/415 2,4 Yes
Sennar a.c.50 1,3 240/415 2,4 Yes
Shendi a.c.50 1,3 240/415 2,4 Yes
Wadi Halfa a.c.50 1,3 240/415 2,4 Yes
Wau a.c.50 1 240 2 Yes
Syria
Aleppo a.c.50 1,3 115/200 2,3,4 No
Damascus a.c.50 1,3 115/200 2,3,4 No
Dayr-Al-Zawr a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Hama a.c.50 1,3 115/200 2,3,4 No
Homs a.c.50 1,3 115/200 2,3,4 No
Latakia a.c.50 1,3 115/200 2,3,4 No
Turkey (Note 2)
Adana a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Adapazari a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Afyon a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Ankara a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Balikesir a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Bursa a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Eskisehir a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Gaziantep a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Istanbul a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Izmir a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3.4 Yes
Izmit a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Kayseri a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Knoya a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Malatya a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Manisa a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
206 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012

Turkey
(Continued)
Mersin a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Samsun a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Sivas a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Trabzon a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Zonguldak a.c.50 1,3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Yemen (Arab Rep)

Hoeida
Sana a.c.50 1,3 220 2,3 No
Taiz a.c.50 1,3 220 2,3 No
a.c.50 1,3 220 2,3 No
NOTES:
1. A grounding conductor is required in the electrical cord attached to appliances.
2. The neutral wire of the secondary distribution system is grounded.
3. Electric current is now continuous in most of the cities and large towns.
4. The neutral wire of the secondary distribution system is grounded except in the case of Sebba.
5. Grounding conductors are not required and many houses are not wired for a separate ground.
6. Power supply being standardized at 60 cycle, 127/200V.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 207
Attachment 3
EXISTING FACILITIES AND RESOURCES CHECKLIST
1. COUNTRY: ________________________________________________________________
2. NAME OF AIRFIELD: _______________________________________________________
3. ALTERNATE NAMES: ______________________________________________________
4. DATE OF INFORMATION: ___________________________________________________
5. DESCRIPTION OF REFERENCE POINT (RP)
A. LATITUDE (RP): ______________________________________
B. LONGITUDE (RP): ______________________________________
C. LOCATION OF THIS REFERENCE POINT (RP): ____________________________

__________________________________________________________________________
D. ELEVATION OF RP: _____________________________________________________
6. DESCRIPTIVE LOCATION (NAME & DISTANCE TO CLOSEST TOWN):

______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
7. BASE POPULATION: _______________________________
A. MILITARY: _______________________________________
B. CIVILIAN: ________________________________________
8. NEAREST US MILITARY INSTALLATION: ____________________________________
9. RUNWAYS/TAXIWAYS/AIRCRAFT SUPPORT STRUCTURE:
A. ORIENTATION (Bearing to nearest degree; indicate MAGNETIC or TRUE)

RUNWAY #1 ____/________ RUNWAY #2 ________________
(North/South/East/West End) (North/South/East/West End)
B. ELEVATION OF RUNWAY ENDS; RUNWAY GRADIENT

RUNWAY #1 ______/_______ RUNWAY #2 ________/________
C. LENGTH/WIDTH (Exact dimensions in feet or meters)

RUNWAY #1 ______ /_________ RUNWAY #2 _________/________
208 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
D. CONSTRUCTION (Type and thickness of surface; composition and depth of base type sub-base;
condition of runway.)
RUNWAY #1 ___________________ RUNWAY #2 ___________________

________________________________ ________________________________
________________________________ ________________________________
________________________________ ________________________________
________________________________ ________________________________
E. CAPACITY (Gross weight for aircraft single wheel, twin wheel and twin tandem type landing
gear; maximum psi runway will support. Give Load Classification Number (LCN) and Pavement
Classification Number (PCN), if known.)
RUNWAY #1 ______________________ RUNWAY #2 _______________________

___________________________________ ____________________________________
___________________________________ ____________________________________
____________________________________ ____________________________________
F. ARRESTING SYSTEM(S) (Type of system as barrier; cable or barrier/cable; identify system;

capability; location identified by runway number and distance from runway end.)
RUNWAY #1 (Approach End) RUNWAY #2 (Approach End)

_________________________________ _________________________________
_________________________________ _________________________________
_________________________________ _________________________________
RUNWAY #1 (Departure End) RUNWAY #2 (Departure End)

________________________________ __________________________________
________________________________ __________________________________
________________________________ __________________________________
G. RUNWAY OVERRUNS (Length, width, type, thickness and weight bearing capacity;
composition and thickness of base; type sub-base and LCN, if known. Give extensibility of runways
and indicate sterilized portions.)
RUNWAY #1 (Approach End) RUNWAY #2 (Approach End)

________________________________ ________________________________
________________________________ ________________________________
________________________________ ________________________________
RUNWAY #1 (Departure End) RUNWAY #2 (Departure End)

________________________________ _________________________________
________________________________ _________________________________
________________________________ _________________________________
________________________________ _________________________________
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 209
H. RUNWAY REMARKS (Give surface, width and condition of shoulders. Describe runway
numerals and other runway/taxiway markings. Give usability during wet seasons, if applicable;
drainage, natural or artificial; take off and landing restrictions. Give type aircraft, at heaviest
weight, if known, that have used the airfield and that could still be accommodated. Give
description, location and height of obstructions along runways.)
RUNWAY #1 RUNWAY #2
____________________________________ _______________________________________
____________________________________ _______________________________________
____________________________________ _______________________________________
____________________________________ _______________________________________
____________________________________ _______________________________________
____________________________________ _______________________________________
____________________________________ _______________________________________
____________________________________ _______________________________________
I. TAXIWAYS (Number, type, width, markings and the same construction and static load data as for
the runway; location from RP; stabilized shoulder surface, width and condition; give lateral
clearances or restrictions to include description, location and height of obstructions along taxiways.)
(1) TAXIWAY (Name): ________________ Ref Point: ___________________________

Width (main surface): __________________ Width (shoulder): ________________________
Asphalt, Concrete or other: _____________________________________________________
Load Bearing Capability/Capacity (LCN or PCN): ____________________________________
Obstructions: _______________________________________________________________
Markings: ____________________________________________________________________
(2) TAXIWAY (Name): _____________________ Ref Point: ________________________

Width (main surface: _________________________ Width (shoulder): __________________
Obstructions: ________________________________________________________________
Markings: __________________________________________________________________
(3) TAXIWAY (Name): ____________________ Ref Point: _________________________

Width (main surface): ___________________ Width (shoulder): ___________________
Asphalt, Concrete or other: ______________________________________________________
Obstructions: ________________________________________________________________
Markings: ___________________________________________________________________
(4) TAXIWAY (Name): __________________ Ref Point: _________________________

Width (main surface): ____________________ Width (shoulder): _____________________
Obstructions: ________________________________________________________________
210 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Markings: ____________________________________________________________
(5) TAXIWAY (Name): ________________ Ref Point: ______________________

Width (main surface) __________________ Width (shoulder): _________________
Asphalt, Concrete or other: _______________________________________________
Load Bearing Capability/Capacity (LCN or PCN): _____________________________
Obstructions: __________________________________________________________
Markings: _____________________________________________________________
(6) TAXIWAY (Name): __________________ Ref Point: ____________________

Width (main surface): __________________ Width (shoulder): ___________________
Asphalt, Concrete or other: ________________________________________________
Load Bearing Capability/Capacity (LCN or PCN): ______________________________
Obstructions: ___________________________________________________________
Markings: ______________________________________________________________
(7) TAXIWAY (Name): __________________ Ref Point: ______________________

Width (main surface): ___________________ Width (shoulder): ______________
Asphalt, Concrete or other: _________________________________________________
Obstructions: ___________________________________________________________
Markings: _____________________________________________________________
(8) TAXIWAY (Name) : ________________ Ref Point: _______________________

Width (main surface): __________________ Width (shoulder): _________________
Obstructions: ___________________________________________________________
Markings: _____________________________________________________________
(9) TAXIWAY (Name): _______________ Ref Point: ________________________

Width (main surface): ______________ Width (shoulder): ______________________
Asphalt, Concrete or other: _________________________________________________
Obstructions: ____________________________________________________________
Markings: _______________________________________________________________
(10) TAXIWAY (Name): ______________ Ref Point: ________________________

Width (main surface): _________________ Width (shoulder): ___________________
Asphalt, Concrete or other: __________________________________________________
Load Bearing Capability/Capacity (LCN or PCN): _______________________________
Obstructions: _____________________________________________________________
Markings: _______________________________________________________________
J. APRONS, HARDSTANDS, REVETMENTS, OTHER PARKING (Location, number, type,

dimensions, surface, condition, weight bearing capacity, accessibility and clearance limitations. For
revetments, give embankment height, structure, size of entrance, is revetment covered.)
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 211
(1) APRON (Name): _______________ Ref Point: _______________________

Dimensions: Width: _________________ Length: _________________________
Shoulder: ___________________________________________________________
Asphalt, Concrete or other: ______________________________________________
Load Bearing Capability/Capacity (LCN or PCN): ____________________________
Obstructions: _________________________________________________________
Grounding Points: _____________________________________________________
Lighting: ____________________________________________________________
Other Data: __________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
Revetments: _________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
(2) APRON (Name): _______________ Ref Point: __________________________

Dimensions: Width ______________ Length: ____________________________
Shoulder: _____________________________________________________________
Asphalt, Concrete or other: _______________________________________________
Load Bearing Capability/Capacity (LCN or PCN): ____________________________
Obstructions: _________________________________________________________
Lighting: ____________________________________________________________
Other Data: __________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
Revetments: _________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
(3) APRON (Name): _________________ Ref Point: _____________________

Dimensions: Width: _________________ Length: _______________________
Shoulder: __________________________________________________________
Asphalt, Concrete or other: ____________________________________________
Load Bearing Capability/Capacity (LCN or PCN): __________________________
Obstructions: _________________________________________________________
Lighting: ____________________________________________________________
Other Data: __________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
Revetments: _________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
(4) APRON (Name): _________________ Ref Point: _________________________

Dimensions: Width: __________________ Length: ___________________________
Shoulder: _____________________________________________________________
Obstructions: ___________________________________________________________
212 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Grounding Points: _______________________________________________________

Lighting: ______________________________________________________________
Other Data: ____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Revetments: ___________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
(5) APRON (Name): __________________ Ref Point: ________________________

Dimensions: Width: ___________________ Length: __________________________
Shoulder:______________________________________________________________
Obstructions: __________________________________________________________
Grounding Points: ______________________________________________________
Lighting: _____________________________________________________________
Other Data: ___________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Revetments: ___________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
(6) APRON (Name): _________________ Ref Point: _________________________

Dimensions: Width: __________________ Length: ___________________________
Shoulder: _______________________________________________________________
Asphalt, Concrete or other: __________________________________________________
Load Bearing Capability/Capacity (LCN or PCN): ________________________________
Obstructions: _____________________________________________________________
Grounding Points: _________________________________________________________
Lighting: ________________________________________________________________
Other Data: ______________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
Revetments: ______________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
K. AIRCRAFT SHELTERS (List size, type, interior dimensions, door size).

____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
L. APPROACH OBSTRUCTIONS (On aerodrome or near vicinity; give location, description, height
above ground and sea level, lighted or unlighted; i.e., towers, buildings, hills. Describe approach
terrain, especially on final approach.)
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 213
M. NAVIGATIONAL AND LANDING AIDS.
(1) NAVIGATIONAL AIDS (Types, hours of operation, English spoken, location.)

______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
(2) OTHER DATA: Submit layout plan; visual and instrument approach diagram; and graphics:
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
10. LIGHTING:
A. RUNWAY (For each runway, include high or low intensity lighting, the dimming capability, and
if flush mounted or elevated; centerline; runway flood; runway strip; portable electric, goose necks;
emergency; auxiliary power for lighting; and times of operation or are lights on request. If available,
list backup power.)
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
B. APPROACH (Indicate type runway serviced, US standard, neon ladder, left row, etc.; state
intensity; list touchdown zone lighting, approach light beacon, sequence flashing, VASI, REIL and
VAPI.)
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
C. OTHER (Types of lighting, including taxiway, beacons, apron flood, threshold, obstruction,
boundary, lighted wind indicator, hangar area, flares—all variations and details pertaining to lighting
systems should be covered.)
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
11. OTHER DATA ON AIRFIELD:
A. VISUAL IDENTIFICATION (Location of markers, wind indicators, control tower and rotating
beacon.)
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
214 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
____________________________________________________________________________
B. OPERATING AND USING AGENCIES (Occupying military units, commercial air carriers and
organizational units having airfield maintenance responsibility. List separately those activities that
are categorized only as users. Give number and type of aircraft that have or are presently using this
facility.)
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
C. CURRENT AND FUTURE CONSTRUCTION (Provide detailed information on proposed

expansion plans and improvements program in progress; give status and proposed completion
date(s).)
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
MAINTENANCE AND ACCESSORIES
11. HANGARS:
A. HANGAR (number/name): _______________________________________________________
DIMENSIONS IN FEET: ___________________________________________________________
(1) Floor space: ___________________________________________________________________
(2) Doors (Height and Width): _______________________________________________________
ENVIRONMENTALLY CONTROLLED (Yes or No)
MATERIAL AND TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION (Double bay, open end, steel, concrete, wood, sheet
metal)
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
LOCATION FROM REFERENCE POINT OR NEAREST RAMP:

______________________________________________________________________________
B. HANGAR (number/name): _______________________________________________________

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 215
(1) Floor space: ___________________________________________________________________
metal.):
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
LOCATION FROM REFERENCE POINT OR NEAREST

RAMP:___________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
C. HANGAR (number/name): ________________________________________________________
(1) Floor space: ___________________________________________________________________
metal.):________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
LOCATION FROM REFERENCE POINT OR NEAREST RAMP:

_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
13. GROUND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT (Give model, capacity and quantity of portable line
equipment such as AC/DC generators, auxiliary power units, aircraft heaters, aircraft air
conditioners, air compressors, hydraulic test stands, light carts and other powered aerospace ground
equipment.):
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
216 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
14. ENGINE TESTING (Describe engine or aircraft tie-down points, test stand and blast fences, also
note thrust load capabilities.):
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
15. HAZARDOUS CARGO PAD (describe size and location.):

_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
16. HOT BRAKE PAD (Describe where aircraft with hot brakes rest while waiting for the brakes to
cool.):
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
17. ORDNANCE STORAGE (Type munitions, type storage, e.g., bunker, underground, above
ground, open field, etc. Indicate quantity of storage facilities, number and dimensions of buildings,
security.):
A. BUNKER (Name): _____________________ Ref Point: _________________________

Dimensions: Width: ______________________ Length: ___________________________
Height: _______________________________________________________________________
Earth Bank, Concrete or Other: ____________________________________________________
Capacity: _______________________________________________________________________
Distance to Loading Pad: __________________________________________________________
Lighting: _______________________________________________________________________
Other Data: _____________________________________________________________________
B. BUNKER (Name): __________________ Ref Point: __________________________

Dimensions: Width: ___________________ Length: ____________________________
Height: ________________________________________________________________________
Earth Bank, Concrete or Other: _____________________________________________________
Capacity: _______________________________________________________________________
Lighting: _______________________________________________________________________
Other Data: _____________________________________________________________________
C. BUNKER (Name): _________________ Ref Point: __________________________

Dimensions: Width: __________________ Length: ____________________________
Height: _____________________________________________________________________
Earth Bank, Concrete or Other: ____________________________________________________
Capacity: ______________________________________________________________________
Lighting: _______________________________________________________________________
Other Data: _____________________________________________________________________
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 217
D. BUNKER (Name): __________________ Ref Point: _________________________

Dimensions: Width: ___________________ Length: ___________________________
Height: _____________________________________________________________________
Earth Bank, Concrete or Other ____________________________________________________
Capacity: ____________________________________________________________________
Distance to Loading Pad: ________________________________________________________
Lighting: ____________________________________________________________________
Other Data: __________________________________________________________________
E. BUNKER (Name): ___________________ Ref Point: _________________________

Dimensions: Width: ____________________ Length: ___________________________
Height: _____________________________________________________________________
Earth Bank, Concrete or Other: ___________________________________________________
Capacity: ____________________________________________________________________
Distance to Loading Pad: ________________________________________________________
Lighting: ____________________________________________________________________
Other Data: __________________________________________________________________
PETROLEUMS, OILS and LUBRICANTS (POL)
18. FUEL:
A. ON BASE (Give types and grades of military and commercial aviation fuels, normal stock level
for each grade fuel listed. For commercial facilities indicate by whom owned and operated; what fuel
additives are used. By product, list type of storage, e.g., steel tanks, above ground, underground,
drum, etc. Indicate location, capacity each and/or total storage capacity).
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
B. OFF BASE STORAGE (data as above, if available from airport authorities. Also describe how
this fuel gets to the airfield.)
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
C. FUEL DISPENSING METHOD (List refueling units by products, number, type. Describe hydrant
and pumping system, location from RP, number, rated capacity of each hydrant (GPM) and pits,
number and type hose carts or trucks, number and type nozzles. Give number of fill stands and rate
(GPM) for each grade of fuel; indicate who owns and operates.)
________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
218 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
19. OIL AND LUBRICANTS:
A. ON BASE (Stocks and grades maintained for reciprocating jet and turbine, list types of containers
by product, capacity, stock level and resupply method).
________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
B. OFF BASE STORAGE (data as above, if available from airport authorities.)

________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
C. TRANSPORT (describe method of movement):

_______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
20. SPECIAL PURPOSE EQUIPMENT:
A. AIRCRAFT SUPPORT (tugs, ladder trucks, etc.):

______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
B. CRASH AND FIRE EQUIPMENT (Number, type and class of units, condition, location on field
or nearby, hours of availability. State in gallons the capacity of fire trucks. Indicate the availability of
water hydrants, special water tanks, portable extinguisher and extinguishing agents and fire
suppression helicopters.)
(1) Water Dispensing Aircraft: _____________________________________________________
(2) P-19: _____________________________________________________________________
(3) P-10: _____________________________________________________________________
(4) P-18: _____________________________________________________________________
(5) Other Water Tankers: _________________________________________________________
(6) P-20: _____________________________________________________________________

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 219
(7) Foreign Vehicles: ____________________________________________________________
(8) Other USAF Vehicles: _________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
(9) Command & Control Vehicle(s): _________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________
(10) 150 Pound Flightline Fire Bottles: ________________________________________________
(11) K-12 Saws: ________________________________________________________________
(12) Jaws of Life: _______________________________________________________________
(13) Scott Air Packs: _____________________________________________________________
(14) Ability to fill air tanks (Scott Air Packs): ___________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
(15) Types and availability of agents: _________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
C. WRECKAGE REMOVAL EQUIPMENT (Number, type, e.g., wreckers, hoists, cranes, crash
dollies and other equipment, condition.)
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
D. OTHER SPECIAL PURPOSE VEHICLES (e.g., sand removal, tractors, runway cleaners, graders,
etc., condition.)
(1) Backhoes: _____________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
(2) Dozers: ______________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
(3) Dump Trucks: _________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
(4) Excavators: ___________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
220 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
(5) Farm Tractors: _________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
(6) Flatbeds: _____________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
(7) Forklifts: __________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________
(8) Graders: ___________________________________________________________________
(9) Kick Broom Sweepers: ________________________________________________________
(10) Loaders: __________________________________________________________________
(11) Paint Machines: ____________________________________________________________
(12) Rollers: ___________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
(13) Sewage Servicing/Fleet Servicing: ______________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________
(14) Trailer Tractors: ____________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
(15) Trenchers: _________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
(16) Vacuum Sweepers: __________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
(17) Water Trucks/Tankers: _______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
(18) Snow Removal Equipment: ____________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
E. CBRN DETECTION, WARNING AND REPORTING SYSTEMS (availability and types of

equipment, condition, how activated):
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 221
21. BASE SERVICES/BASE INFRASTRUCTURE:
A. PERSONNEL ACCOMMODATIONS (Give number of permanent or temporary buildings,

dimensions and conditions. Give normal and maximum capacity for all Airmen. State percentage of
space utilization on base only).
________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
B. LATRINES (number and location for both the living and working areas):
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
C. SHOWERS (number, condition and proximity to living area): __________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
D. MESSING FACILITIES (Give normal and maximum messing capacity for all Airmen.
Availability of mess hall, dining rooms, field kitchens, etc., condition and accessibility).
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
E. LAUNDRY SERVICES: _______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
F. MORTUARY SERVICES: _____________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
G. STORAGE (Give number, dimensions and conditions of warehouses, sheds, etc. Location and
size of open storage areas, refrigerated storage areas. Indicate percentage in use.)
_________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
222 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
H. MEDICAL/DENTAL (Indicate name, type and location of all medical facilities available, normal
bed capacity for each hospital. Indicate all medical staffing, i.e., doctors, dentists, nurses, etc.
Indicate number of ambulances available).
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
I. WATER SUPPLY (Source of water, e.g., well, water shed, brought in by can, tank car. Quantity,
normal and maximum gallons per 24 hours storage capacity, e.g., storage tank, reservoirs, potability.
Indicate the location and amount of emergency water supply. Also indicate if water is treated
(chlorine, fluoride, etc.) and if the water has been tested, list test results):
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
J. AVAILABLE BUILDINGS (Consider location, type, total floor space, number of personnel
currently working within, expansion in contingency or emergency situations.)
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
(1) Building Number or Name: _____________________________________________________

Floor Space: ___________________________________________________________________
Description of current use: _________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Lighting (Yes/No) Electrical Outlets (Yes/No)
Voltage: Cycles/Hertz: __________________
Latrines (type and quantity): _______________________________________________________
Drinking Water Available: ________________________________________________________
Environmentally Controlled (Yes/No): ______________________________________________

Floor Space: ___________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Voltage: ________________________ Cycles/Hertz: __________________
Environmentally Controlled (Yes/No) _______________________________________________
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 223

Floor Space: ___________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
(4) Building Number or Name: ____________________________________________________

Floor Space: ___________________________________________________________________
Description of current use: ________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Latrines (type and quantity): __________________________________________________________
Drinking Water Available: ___________________________________________________________
Environmentally Controlled (Yes/No): ________________________________________________

Floor Space: ____________________________________________________________________
Latrines (type and quantity): ________________________________________________________
Drinking Water Available: _________________________________________________________
Environmentally Controlled (Yes/No): _______________________________________________

Floor Space: ____________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
(7) Building Number or Name: ____________________________________________________

Floor Space: ___________________________________________________________________
Description of current use: ________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
224 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012


______________________________________________________________________________
Floor Space: ___________________________________________________________________
Description of current use: _______________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
K. ELECTRICAL POWER SOURCES (Note location, reliability, type (A/C or D/C), capacity in
kilowatts or kilovolt ampere, cycles, single or three phase, voltage (110/220 or 220/440). Indicate
type of emergency equipment, output and reliability.)
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
L. SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL (Indicate method, source, capacity, frequency.)

______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
M. SEWAGE (On-base capability, capacity, type of treatment; commercial capability, capacity, type
of treatment.) _______________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
N. INSECT/RODENT CONTROL (Source, capability.) ________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 225
O. AIR PASSENGER TERMINAL (Give specific terminal information to include dimensions,

internal layout, maximum capacity, installed baggage handling system, location and security.)
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
P. RAILROADS AND HIGHWAYS (Number of sidings and/or spurs on base and what facilities are
serviced. Access roads supporting airfield along with type surface, width, condition, and capacity of
highway and bridges.) __________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Q. TELEPHONES (Manual, automatic; number of switchboard lines, number of terminal points of

direct line circuits. Hot line available?)
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
R. RADIOS (Types, frequencies, etc.) _______________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
S. OTHER COMMUNICATIONS (Area broadcasting systems/loudspeakers, local radio or television

systems and locations.) ____________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
22. SUPPLIES AND/OR ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT:
A. ON SITE AVAILABLE SUPPLIES OR EQUIPMENT (Prepositioned, stored locally, or loaned

by the hosts.) ___________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
B. OFF SITE AVAILABLE MATERIALS (List sources for electrical, plumbing, carpentry,
construction supplies, etc., and their proximity to the site.)
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
C. SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS NEEDED (To be sent with the deploying unit and/or
headquarters element.) ____________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
226 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
D. CONTRACT SUPPLIED OR SERVICES AVAILABLE ______________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
E. LOCAL CONSTRUCTION COMPANIES _________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 227
Attachment 4
CONVERSION FACTORS
Below is a small sampling of common U.S. and metric conversion factors. In addition, several
internet sites provide free use of conversion applications and calculators. Some of the more
popular ones include: http://www.onlineconversion.com; http://www.metricconversion.ws; and
http://www.infoplease.com/pages/unitconversion.html .
Table A4.1. Common U.S. to Metric Conversion Factors

Length
U.S. Unit Metric Equivalent
Inch 2.5400 Centimeters
Inch 25.4001 Millimeters
Feet 0.3048 Meters
Mile 1.6093 Kilometers
Area
Square inch 6.4516 Square centimeters
Square feet 0.0929 Square meters
Pressure
Kilogram-force per
Pounds per square inch 0.0700
square centimeters
Volume
Gallon (liquid) 3.7854 Liters
Gallon (dry) 4.4048 Liters
Cubic feet 0.0283 Cubic meters
Cubic inch 16.3870 Cubic centimeters
Mass (Weight)
Pound 0.4536 Kilograms
Temperature
Degrees 100 (F) 37.7777 Degrees (C)
Angle
Degrees (angular) 17.7778 Mils
228 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A4.2. Common Metric to U.S. Conversion Factors

Length
Metric Unit U.S. Equivalent
Centimeter 0.3937 Inches
Millimeter 0.0393 Inches
Meter 3.2808 Feet
Kilometer 0.6213 Miles
Area
Square centimeter 0.1550 Square inches
Square meter 10.7639 Square feet
Pressure
Kilogram-force per
14.2233 Pounds per square inch
square centimeter
Volume
Liter 0.2642 Gallons (liquid)
Liter 0.2270 Gallons (dry)
Cubic meter 35.3146 Cubic feet
Cubic centimeter 0.0610 Cubic inches
Mass (Weight)
Kilogram 2.2046 Pounds
Temperature
Degrees 0 (C) 32.0 Degrees (F)
Angle
Mil 0.0562 Degrees (angular)
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 229
Attachment 5
FOREIGN WEIGHTS AND MEASURES
Table A5.1. List of Foreign Weights and Measures
Denominations Where Used U.S. Equivalents

Almude Portugal 4.422 gals.
Ardeb Sudan 5.6188 bushels
Are Metric 0.02471 acre
Arr't'l or li'ra Portugal 1.0119 lbs.
Arroba Argentine Republic 25.32 lbs.
Arroba Brazil 32.38 lbs.
Arroba Cuba 25.36 lbs.
Arroba Paraguay 25.32 lbs.
Arroba Venezuela 25.40 lbs
Cuba, Spain and
Arroba (liquid) 4.263 gals.
Venezuela
Arshine Russia 28 in.
Arshine (sq.) Russia 5.44 ft.2
Artel Morocco 1.12 lbs.
Baril Argentine Republic 20.077 gals.

Baril Mexico 20.0787 gals.
Barrel Malta (customs) 11.2 gals.
Berkovets Russia 361.128 lbs.
Bongkal Fed. Malay States 832 grains
Bouw Sumatra 7,096.5 meters2
Bu Japan 0.12 inch
Bushel British Empire 1.03205 U.S. bu.
Caffiso Malta 5.40 gals.

Candy India (Bombay) 569 lbs.
Candy India (Madras) 500 lbs.
Cantar Egypt 99.05 lbs.
Cantar Morocco 112 lbs.
Cantar Turkey 124.45 lbs.
175 lbs.
Cantaro Malta
230 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012

Cast, Metric Metric 3.086 grains
Catti China 1.333 1/3 lbs.
Catti Japan 1.32 lbs.
Catty Java, Malacca 1.36 lbs.
Catty Thailand 1.32 lbs.
Catty Sumatra 2.12 lbs.
Centaro Central America 4.2631 gals.
Centner Brunswick 117.5 lbs.
Centner Bremen 127.5 lbs.
Centner Denmark, Norway 110.23 lbs.
Centner Russia 113.44 lbs.
Centner Sweden 93.7 lbs
Chetvert Russia 5.957 bu.
Ch’ih China 12.60 in.
Ch'ih (metric) China 1 meter
Cho Japan 2.451 acres
Comb England 4.1282 bu.
Coyan Thailand 2.645.5 lbs.
Cuadra Argentine Republic 4.2 acres
Cuadra Paraguay 94.70 yds.
Cuadra (sq.) Paraguay 1.85 acres
Cuadra Uruguay 1.82 acres
Cubic meter Metric 35.3 cu. ft.
Cwt. (hund. weight ) British 112 lbs.
Dessiatine Russia 2.6997 acres

Drachma (new) Greece 15.43 gr., or 1 gram
Fanega (dry) Ecuador, Salvador 1.5745 bu.

Fanega Chile 2.75268 bu.
Fanega Guatemala, Spain 1.53 bu.
2.57716 bu.
Fanega Mexico
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 231

Fanega (doublé) Uruguay 7.776 bu.
Fanega (single) Uruguay 3.888 bu.
Fanega Venezuela 3.334 bu.
Fanega (liquid) Spain 16 gals.
Feddan Egypt 1.04 acres
Frall (rais's) Spain 50 lbs.
Frasco Argentine Republic 2.5098 liq.qts.
Frasco Mexico 2.5 liq. qts.
Frasila Zanzibar 35 lbs.
Fuder Luxemburg 264.18 gals.
Funt Russia 0.9028 lb.
Gallon British Empire 1.20094 U.S. gals.

Garnice Poland 1.0567 gal.
Gram Metric 15.432 grains
Hectare Metric 2.471 acres

Hectolitre: Dry Metric 2.838 bu.
Hectolitre: Liquid Metric 26.418 gals
Jarib Iran 2.471 acres

Joch Austria (Germany) 1.422 acres
Joch Hungary 1.067 acres
Ken Japan 5.97 feet

Kilogram (kilo) Metric 2.2046 lbs.
Kilometre Metric 0.62137 mile
Klafter Austria (Germany) 2.074 yds.
Koku Japan 5.119 bu.
Kwamme Japan 8.2673 lbs.
232 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012

Last Belgium (Netherlands) 85.135 bu.
Last England 82.56 bu.
2 metric tons (4,409
Last Germany
+ lbs)
Last Russia 112.29 bu.
Last Scotland, Ireland 82.564 bu.
League (land) Paraguay 4.633 acres
Li China 1,890 ft
Libra (lb.) Argentine Republic 1.0128 lbs.
Libra Central America 1.014 lbs.
Libra Chile 1.014 lbs.
Libra Cuba 1.0143 lbs.
Libra Mexico 1.01467 lbs.
Libra Peru 1.0143 lbs.
Libra Uruguay 1.0143 lbs.
Libra Venezuela 1.0143 lbs.
Litre Metric 1.0567 liq. qts.
Litre Metric 0.90810 dry qts.
Livre (lb.) Greece 1.1 lbs
Load, timber England 50 cu. ft.
165 cu. ft., or 1,980
Lumber (std.) Europe
ft.b.m
Manzana Nicaragua 1.742 acres

Manzana Costa Rica, Salvador 1.727 acres
Marc Bolivia 0.507 lb.
Maund India 82 2/7 lbs.
Metre Metric 39.37 inches
Mil Denmark 4.68 miles
Mil (geographic) Denmark 4.61 miles
Milla Nicaragua 1.1594 miles
Milla Honduras 1.1493 miles
Mina (old) Greece 2.202 lbs.
0.63 acre
Morgen Germany
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 233

Oke Egypt 2.8052 lbs
Oke (Ocque) Greece 2.82 lbs.
Oke Turkey 2.828 lbs.
Pic Egypt 22.82 inches

Picul Borneo, Celebes 135.64 lbs.
Picul China 133 1/3 lbs.
Picul Java 136.16 lbs.
Picul Philippines 139.44 lbs.
Pie Argentine Republic 0.94708 ft.
Pie Spain 0.91416 ft.
Pik Turkey 27.9 inches
Pood Russia 36.113 lbs.
Pund (lb) Denmark 1.102 lbs.
Quart British Empire 1.20094 liq. qt.

Quart British Emp 1.03205 dry qt.
Quarter Great Britain 8.256 bu.
Quintal Argentine Republic 101.28 lbs.
Quintal Brazil 120.54 lbs.
Quintal Castle, Peru 101.43 lbs.
Quintal Chile 101.41 lbs.
Quintal Mexico 101.47 lbs.
Quintal Metric 220.46 lbs.
Rottle Israel 6.35 lbs.
Sack (flour) England 280 lbs.

Sangene Russia 7 feet
Salm Malta 8.2 bu.
Se Japan 0.02451 acre
22-35 lbs.
Seer India
234 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012

Shaku Japan 11.9303 inches
Sho Japan 1.91 liq. qts.
Skalpund Sweden 0.937 lbs.
Stone British 14 lbs.
Sun Japan 1.193 inches
Tael Kuping China 575.64 grains (troy)

Tan Japan 2.05 pecks
Tchvtert Russia 5.96 bu.
To Japan 2.05 pecks
Ton Space measure 40 cu ft.
Tonde cereals Denmark 3.9480 bu.
Tonde Land Denmark 1.36 acres
Tonne France 2204.62 lbs.
Tsubo Japan 35.58 ft.2
Tsun China 1.26 inches
Tunna (wheat) Sweden 4.5 bu.
Tunnland Sweden 1.22 acres
Vara Argentine Republic 34.0944 inches

Vara Costa Rita, Salvador 32.913 inches
Vara Guatemala 32.909 inches
Vara Honduras 32.953 inches
Vara Nicaragua 33.057 inches
Vara Chile and Peru 32.913 inches
Vara Cuba 33.386 inches
Vara Mexico 32.992 inches
Vedro Russia 2.707 gals.
Verst Russia 0.663 mile
Vloka Poland 41.50 acres
Wey Scotland and Ireland 41.282 bu

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 235
Attachment 6
CIVIL ENGINEER CONTINGENCY PLANNING FACTORS
A6.1. Introduction. This attachment outlines the basic planning factors for the many potential
CE contingency tasks (see Table A6.1). It lists the manpower, major materials and equipment
required for each and provides typical completion time frames.
A6.2. Column Definitions and Explanations. The planning factors are based on several
considerations. Many are derived from field experience, others are extracted from technical
orders and some are estimates. The following paragraphs describe the column headings in Table
A6.1
A6.2.1. Task. Only tasks which represent an activity are shown. Knowledge-only tasks are
not included since they do not have a clearly delineated duration or end result.
A6.2.2. Air Force Specialty (AFS). AFSs identified in this column are those most closely
associated with the task. This could be from a peacetime perspective, a multi-skilling
perspective, or contingency-only perspective.
A6.2.3. Number of Personnel. This column identifies the number of personnel normally
required for a task to be completed within the planned timeframe.
A6.2.4. Standard. The standard estimates shown are either go/no-go or represent clock hours
(duration), not manhours. They also represent common working conditions, e.g., fair
weather vice snow storms or thundershowers. In many cases they portray completion of
generic tasks, relatively uncomplicated in nature, and therefore should not be viewed as the
"correct time" for completion of detailed, complex tasks using the same piece of equipment.
When viewed in this optimum environment, the times should generally be conservative and a
well-trained, fully equipped team or crew should be able to perform the tasks within the time
frames indicated.
A6.2.5. Major Material and Equipment Requirements. This column lists the primary
equipment and material items needed to perform each task. Obviously, some substitutions
can be made. In both training and contingency instances, variations are not only possible but
probable. For example, if a dozer is identified for construction of an evaporation lagoon or
building a protective berm, it should not be construed to mean that no other piece of
equipment can be used for these tasks. Additionally, not all materials or equipment items
were identified—most tasks will require a multitude of hand tools and minor supply and
consumable items.
A6.2.6. References. This column shows the primary references for the task.
Table A6.1. Air Force Civil Engineer Contingency Task Standards.
CREW MATERIAL/
TASK AFS STANDARD REFERENCE(S)
SIZE EQUIPMENT
CBRN Defense
Preposition M8/M9 Paper 3EXXX 1 Go/No Go M8/M9 Paper T.O. 11H2-14-5-1, T.O. 11H2-2-21
Demonstrate Contamination Detection
3EXXX 1 10 sec M8/M9 Paper T.O. 11H2-14-5-1, T.O. 11H2-2-21
Procedures on M8/M9 Paper
Setup/Operate M256A1 Chemical Agent M256A1 Chemical Agent
3E9X1 2 Go/No Go T.O. 11H2-21-1, TM 3-6665-307-10
Detector Detector
Setup/Operate M22 Chemical Agent M8A1 Automatic
3E9X1 1 Go/No Go T.O. 11H2-23-1
Alarm Chemical Agent Alarm
Setup/Operate M90 Chemical Agent M90 Automatic Chemical
3E9X1 1 Go/No Go M90 Users Manual
Alarm Agent Alarm
Setup/Operate M291 Skin M291 Skin
3EXXX 1 Go/No Go T.O. 11D1-1-131
Decontamination Kit Decontamination Kit
M17A3/E32U-8
Setup/Operate M17A3/E32U-8
3E9X1 2 Go/No Go Decontamination TM 3-4230-218-12&P
Decontamination Apparatus
Apparatus
Don MCU-2 Protective Mask w/Hood 3EXXX 1 15 sec MCU-2 Mask and Hood T.O. 14P4-15-1
Don Chemical Protection Ground Crew
3EXXX 1 8 min Ground Crew Ensemble T.O. 14P3-1-141
Ensemble
Install Protective Mask Second Skin 3EXXX 1 Go/No Go MCU2/P, Second Skin AFMAN 10-2602, T.O. 14P4-15-1
Setup/Operate ADM 300A/B/C ADM 300 Multifunctional
3E9X1 Go/No Go T.O. 11H2-2-31
Multifunctional Survey Meter 2 Survey Meter
Setup/Operate CAM/ICAM 3E9X1 1 Go/No Go CAM/ICAM T.O. 11H2-20-1, T.O. 11H2-20-11
Expedient Methods - Beddown
Erect Temper Tent 3EXXX 6 2 Hrs Temper Tent AFH 10-222V2, T.O. 35E5-6-1
Erect Small Shelter System (SSS) 3EXXX 6 2 Hrs Small Shelter System AFH 10-222V2, T.O. 35E5-6-11
Erect Medium Shelter System (MSS) 3EXXX 6 4 Hrs Medium Shelter System AFH 10-222V2, T.O. 35E5-6-21
Cement Mixer, Tools,
Construct 16’ X 32’ X 4‖ Concrete Pad 3E2X1, 3E3X1 6 8 Hrs UFC 3-250-09FA, Field Experience
Forms, Concrete Materials
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 237
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
Construct 550-Person Bare Base 3EXXX 55 72 Hrs Tools and Equipment AFPAM 10-219V6
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
AFH 10-222V5, T.O. 35E4-1-141,
Connect Power to Tactical Shelters 3E0X1, 3E0X2 2 4 Hrs Cable and Connections
Field Experience
AFH 10-222V5, T.O. 35E4-1-141,
Connect Water to Tactical Shelters 3E4X1 2 4 hrs Pipes and Fittings
Field Experience
Setup/Maintain Remote Area Lighting Remote Area Lighting T.O. 35F5-5-22-1, AFH 10-222V5,
3E0X1, 3E0X2 2 2 Hrs
System (RALS) System/T.O./Tools Field Experience
AFH 10-222V5, T.O. 35F5-5-16-1,
Setup/Maintain Telescopic Floodlight Set 3E0X1, 3E0X2 1 30 Min Telescopic Floodlight Set
Field Experience
AFH 10-222V2, AFH 10-222V5, T.O.
Setup Power Plant for 550-Person Base 3E0X1, 3E0X2 6 8 Hrs 2-4 750 Kw Generators
35C2-3-474-1/4, Field Experience
BEAR Electrical AFH 10-222V5, AFH 10-222V10,
Setup BEAR Electrical Distribution
3E0X1, 3E0X2 7 148 Hrs Distribution System, FEL, T.O. 35C1-2-1-301, T.O. 35C1-2-1-
System for 550-Person Base
Forklift 331, Field Experience
Phase and Parallel Two 750kW
3E0X2 1 Go/No Go 750 Kw Generator AFH 10-222V5, Field Experience
Generators
AFH 10-222V5, AFH 10-222V10,
Setup 10K Gal Fuel Bladder 3E0X2 4 3 Hrs Fuel Bladder, Piping
T.O. 37A12-15-1, Field Experience
Install/Operate Preway Heater 3E1X1 1 1 Hr Preway Heater TM 5-4520-235-13, Field Experience
AFH 10-222V12,
Setup/Operate M-80 Boiler 3E1X1 2 30 Min M-80 Boiler
TM 10-4510-206-14
AFH 10-222V12,
Setup/Operate M149 Water Chiller 3E1X1 1 30 Min M149 Water Chiller
TM 10-4130-239-14
3E1X1, 3E2X1, 150CF Refrigeration Unit, TM 5-4110-240-13&P, Field
Setup 150 CF Refrigeration Unit 4 2 Hrs
3E0X1 FEL, Forklift Experience
3E1X1, 3E2X1, 1200CF Refrigeration AFH 10-222V2, T.O. 35E9-274-1/-4,
Setup 1,200 CF Refrigeration Unit 8 4 Hrs
3E0X1 Unit, FEL, Forklift Field Experience
AFH 10-222V12, T.O. 35E9-163-11,
Install/Operate BEAR A/C Unit 3E1X1 2 1 Hr A/C Unit, FEL, Forklift
T.O. 35E9-314-1, Field Experience
3E4X1, 3E2X1, ROWPU, Tanks, Pumps, AFH 10-222V9, T.O. 40W4-13-41
Setup/Operate ROWPU
3E0X1 5 4 Hrs Hoses, FEL/Fork Lift Field Experience
238 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
AFH 10-222V9, T.O. 40W4-13-41
Provide Power to ROWPU 3E0X1, 3E0X2 2 30 Min Cable, Connectors
Field Experience
3E4X1, 3E4X2, AFH 10-222V9, T.O. 40W4-13-41
Setup Onion Tank 4 1 Hr Onion Tank
3E4X3 Field Experience
Setup/Operate Water Plant for 550- 3E4X1, 3E4X3, ROWPUs, Tanks, Hoses, AFH 10-222V9, T.O. 40W4-13-41
6 18 Hrs
Person Base 3E0X1 Pumps, FEL/Fork Lift Field Experience
Perform Water Test Using M272 Water
3E4X1 1 Go/No Go M272 Test Kit AFH 10-222V9, Field Experience
Test Kit
Setup/Operate Water Distribution System 3E4X1, 3E4X2, AFH 10-222V5, T.O. 40W4-13-41
6 60 Hrs Water Distribution System
for 550-Person Base 3E4X3 Field Experience
Construct Expedient Grease Trap 3E4X1, 3E4X3 2 Go/No Go Barrel, #10 Cans, Piping AFH 10-222V1, AFH 10-222V4
Dozer,
Construct Sanitary Landfill 3E2X1 2 4 Hrs AFH 10-222V1, AFH 10-222V4
Excavator ( Lumber)
3E3X1, 3E4X1,
Setup BEAR Field Latrine 2 1 Hr BEAR Equipment AFH 10-222V2, T.O. 35E35-5-1
3E4X3
Setup/Maintain BEAR Shower/Shave AFH 10-222V2, T.O. 35E35-3-1,
3E4X1, 3E1X1 4 6 Hrs BEAR Shower/Shave Unit
Unit T.O. 35E35-4-1
Develop Pre-fire Plan for 550-Person
3E7X1 1 Go/No Go Planning Kit AFI 32-3001, AFPAM 10-219V3
Base
Plan Dispersed Layout 32EX, 3E5X1 4 Go/No Go Survey Kit, Stakes AFPAM 10-219V5, Field Experience
Plan Nondispersed Layout 32EX, 3E5X1 4 Go/No Go Survey Kit, Stakes AFPAM 10-219V5, Field Experience
Site and Stake Out Water and Electrical AFPAM 10-219V5, TM 10-4230-
32EX, 3E5X1 4 8 Hrs Survey Kit, Stakes
Distribution Systems 345-23P, Field Experience
Layout 10 Temper Tents, Limiting
3E5X1 2 Go/No Go Survey Kit, Stakes AFPAM 10-219V5, Field Experience
Shadows, Wind and Solar radiation
Prepare 550-Person Beddown Site for AFPAM 10-219V5, AFPAM 10-
3E2X1 1 15 Hrs Grader Dozer, FEL
Temporary Infrastructure 219V6, Field Experience
Clear Fire Breaks of Flammable
3E2X1 1 1 Hr Dozer AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Vegetation (4K SF)
Remove Obstacle From Clear Zone 3E2X1 1 30 Min Dozer, Excavator Field Experience
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 239
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
Construct 100 Yd Drainage Channel 3E2X1 1 30 Min Dozer, Grader FM 5-34, Field Experience
Dozer, Grader, Survey
Site and Clear Area For NAVAID 3E2X1,3E5X1 4 2 Hrs AFPAM 10-219V4, Field Experience
Equipment
Prepare Expedient Storage Area For AFMAN 91-201, DOD 6055.9-STD,
3E2X1, 3E8X1 2 Go/No Go Dozer, Grader
Explosives Field Experience
Setup/Operate BEAR Low-voltage
3E0X1, 3E0X2 2 30 Min BEAR Generator Set AFH 10-222V12, Field Experience
Generators
32EX, 3E5X1,
Operate BEAR Low-voltage Generators 1 5 Min BEAR Generator Set AFH 10-222V12, Field Experience
3E6X1
AFPAM 10-219V2, TM 5-1080-200-
Camouflage Foxhole 3EXXX 1 30 Min Camouflage Netting
13&P, Field Experience
AFPAM 10-219V2, TM 5-1080-200-
Erect Netting Over Vehicle 3EXXX 6 1 Hr Camouflage Netting
13&P, Field Experience
Erect Netting Over 20K Gal Storage 3E2X1, 3E3X1, AFPAM 10-219V2, TM 5-1080-200-
12 1 Hr Camouflage Netting
Bladder 3E9X1, 3E4XX 13&P, Field Experience
Expedient Methods – Construction
Construct Earth Berms For 10K Gal Fuel
3E2X1 1 4 Hrs Dozer, FEL, Bladder AFH 10-222V14, Field Experience
Bladder
Construct Earth Berm For 30’ X 30’ Backhoe Dozer, FEL,
3E2X1 2 4 Hrs AFH 10-222V14, Field Experience
Munitions Pad Dump Truck
Backhoe, Dozer, FEL,
Construct Oxidation Lagoon (11K SF) 3E2X1, 3E4X1 3 24 Hrs AFPAM 10-219V5, Field Experience
Dump Truck
Backhoe Dozer, FEL,
Build Evaporation Lagoon (33K SF) 3E2X1, 3E4X1 3 24 Hrs AFPAM 10-219V5, Field Experience
Dump Truck
Construct Straddle Trench Latrine
3E2X1, 3E4X3 3 2 Hrs Shovels/Backhoe AFH 10-222V4, Field Experience
(10’ X 2’)
Construct Ventilated Improved Pit Plywood, Screening,
3E3X1, 3E4X3 4 8 Hrs AFH 10-222V4, Field Experience
Latrine Lumber, Shovels, Backhoe
Construct Urine Soakage Pit 3E4X1, 3E4X3 2 2 Hrs Shovels, Backhoe, Gravel AFH 10-222V4, Field Experience
Waste Water Disposal
Pump Out Septic Tank 3E4X1 1 2 Hrs MIL-HDBK-1138, Field Experience
Vehicle
240 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
FEL, Dump Truck,
32EX, 3E2X1, AFJMAN 32-1088, FM 5-34, Field
Construct Expedient 20’ Timber Bridge 7 12 Hrs Grader, Timber, Power
3E3X1 Experience
Saws
32EX, 3E2X1, Matting, FEL, Backhoe, AFPAM 10-219V2, FM 5-34, Field
Design and Construct Expedient Culvert 4 4 Hrs
3E3X1 Fill Material Experience
Grader, Dump Trucks,
Tractor Mounted Tiller,
Design and Construct ¼ Mile, Two Lane
32EX, 3E2X1 6 10 Hrs FEL, Cement Spreader, FM 5-34, Field Experience
Soil Cement Road
Water Distributor,
Cement, Water
Asphalt Distributor,
Asphalt, Paver, Roller,
Construct ¼ Mile Asphalt Road 3E2X1 8 24 Hrs FM 5-34, Field Experience
Grader, Dump Trucks,
Handtools
Expedient Methods – Repair
Identify Surface UXO Features 3E5X1, 3E8X1 3 30 Min HMMWV, Binoculars T.O. 60A-1-1-2, Field Experience
Identify Crater and Runway UXO
3E5X1, 3E8X1 3 30 Min HMMWV, Grid Map AFPAM 10-219V4, Field Experience
Coordinates
Correctly Identify Bombs, Mines,
UXO Report Forms and
Rockets, and IEDs to the Unit Control 3EXXX 1 Go/No Go AFVA 32-4022
Comm System
Center
Properly Mark 100’ X 100’ UXO Area 3EXXX 2 Go/No Go Paint, String, Marker Signs TM 3-9905-001-10
Locate 5 UXOs on Runway 3E8X1, 3E5X1 4 15 Min HMMWV AFPAM 10-219V4
Locate Subsurface UXO (Camouflet) 3E8X1 4 30 Min HMMWV AFPAM 10-219V4
AFPAM 10-219V4, UFC 3-270-07
Special/General Purpose
Safe UXO Located on MOS 3E8X1 2 30 Min T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7
Tool Kits
Field Experience
Use Field Rigging and Hoisting to Rope, Block and Tackle,
3E8X1, 3E2X1 4 1 Hr T.O. 60A-1-1-5, Field Experience
Remove 500lb GP Bomb Dump Truck, FEL
UFC 3-270-04, AFJMAN 32-1040,
Setup/Operate Concrete Saw 3E2X1, 3E3X1 2 30 Min Concrete Saw
Users Manual, Field Experience
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 241
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
32EX, 3E1X1, AFPAM 10-219V4, UFC 3-270-07
3E2X1, 3E3X1 Crater Repair Set and
Repair Two Craters 18 2 Hrs, 30 Min T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7
3E4X1, 3E4X3 Specialized Vehicles
3E5X1 Field Experience
AFPAM 10-219V4, UFC 3-270-07
Crater Repair Set and
Repair Three Craters With 100 Spalls 3EXXX 3 Hrs, 30 Min T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7
Specialized Vehicles
Field Experience
AFPAM 10-219V4, UFC 3-270-07
Repair Six Craters With 200 Spalls 3EXXX 3 Hrs, 30 Min T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7
Specialized Vehicles
Field Experience
AFPAM 10-219V4, UFC 3-270-07
Repair 12 Craters With 400 Spalls 3EXXX T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7
3 Hrs, 30 Min Specialized Vehicles
Field Experience
AFPAM 10-219V4, UFC 3-270-07
3E2X1, 3E4X1 Vacuum Sweepers, Kick
Sweep and Clean MAOS 7 2 Hrs, 15 Min T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7
3E4X3, 3E6X1 Brooms, Graders
Field Experience
AFH 10-222V16, UFC 3-270-07
Paint Machine, Tow
Stripe 5,000’ MOS 3E3X1 2 1 Hr T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7
Vehicle, Runway Paint
Field Experience
Perform Maintenance on Crater to FEL, Vibratory Roller, AFPAM 10-219V4, UFC 3-270-07
Include Cover Removal, Fill Maintenance 3E2X1 10 30 Min Dump Truck, Grader, T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7, T.O
and Cover Installation Power Tools, Compressor 36C35-7-1, Field Experience
AFH 10-222V7, T.O. 35F5-3-17-1/-4,
Install/Operate EALS (50’x5000’ MOS) 3E0X1, 3E0X2 6 2 Hrs, 30 Min EALS, Tow Vehicle
Field Experience
Rapid MAAS Unidirectional Soil AFH 10-222V2, AFH 10-222V8,T.O.
3E2X1, 3E0X2 6 2 Hrs MAAS, Tools, Equipment
Installation 35E8-2-10-1/-4, Field Experience
AFH 10-222V8,T.O. 35E8-2-10-1/-4,
Recycle MAAS 3E0X2, 3E7X1 3 5 Min MAAS, Tools, Equipment
Field Experience
Install Lightweight Fairlead Beam Lightweight Fairlead AFH 10-222V8, T.O. 35E8-2-11-2,
3E0X2, 3E5X1 7 2 Hrs
(LWFB) Beam Field Experience
242 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
Install Mobile Runway Edge Sheave Mobile Runway Edge
3E0X2, 3E5X1 7 2 Hrs AFH 10-222V8, Field Experience
(MRES) Sheave
AM-2 Matting Patch Kit, AFPAM 10-219V4, UFC 3-270-07
3E1X1, 3E2X1,
Assemble AM-2 Patch (54’ X 77’6‖) 10 45 Min F/L, FEL, Tools, T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7
3E3X1, 3E4X1
Generator. Field Experience
3E2X1, 3E3X1,
Install AM-2 FOD Cover 10 45 Min F/L, FEL, Tools, T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7
3E4X1, 3E1X1
Generator Field Experience
Repair Damaged FOD Cover (10 Mats) 3E2X1, 3E3X1 4 2 Hrs F/L, FEL, Tools, T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7
Generator Field Experience
AFPAM 10-219V4, UFC 3-270-07
3E2X1, 3E5X1, FFM Patch Kit, F/L, FEL,
Install Folded Fiberglass Mat (54’ X 60’) 7 30 Min T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7
3E3X1, 3E4X3 Tools, Generator
Field Experience
Repair Single Crater Using Crushed 3E1X1, 3E2X1,
20 1 Hr, 45 Min F/L, FEL, Dump Truck, T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7
Stone and AM-2 Matting 3E3X1, 3E4X1
Tools, Generator Field Experience
AFPAM 10-219V4, UFC 3-270-07
Repair Single Crater Using Crushed 3E2X1, 3E3X1, FFM Patch Kit, F/L, FEL,
16 1 Hr, 45 Min T.O. 35E2-2-7, T.O. 35E2-3-1
Stone and Folded Fiberglass Mat 3E5X1 Tools, Generator
Polymer Material, Truck, AFPAM 10-219V4, UFC 3-270-07
Drill, Mixing bit, Concrete
Repair 12 Spalls w/Polymer Concrete 3E1X1, 3E2X1 4 18 Min T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7
Finishing tools, Wheel
barrow Field Experience
Quick Set Material, Truck, AFPAM 10-219V4, UFC 3-270-07
Drill, Mixing bit, Concrete
Repair 12 Spalls w/Quick Set Concrete 3E1X1, 3E2X1 4 18 Min T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7
Finishing tools, Wheel
barrow Field Experience
AFPAM 10-219V4, UFC 3-270-07
Select MOS Surface Including 50’ X 32EX, 3E5X1, MOS Templates, Grid
4 30 Min T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7
5000’ and Taxi Routes 3E6X1 Maps
Field Experience
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 243
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
UFC 3-270-07, AFH 10-222V16,
Layout 50’ X 5000’ MOS 3E3X1, 3E5X1 4 1 Hr Surveyor’s Kit, Cones T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7
Layout Minimum Airfield Operating 3E5X1, 3E1X1, T.O. 35E2-6-1, AFI 32-1042,
1 Hr MAOSMS Kit
Surface Marking System (MAOSMS) 3E3X1 AFH 10-222V16
UFC 3-270-07, AFH 10-222V16,
Layout 4000’ Taxi Routes 3E3X1, 3E5X1 4 30 Min Surveyor’s Kit, Cones T.O. 35E2-3-1, T.O. 35E2-2-7
32EX, 3E5X1,
Conduct RQC Calculations 2 30 Min Surveyor’s Kit, Cones AFPAM 10-219V4, T.O. 35E2-4-1
3E6X1
3E2X1, 3E3X1,
Conduct Line-of-Sight Crater Evaluation 3 Go/No Go Stanchion Kit AFPAM 10-219V4, T.O. 35E2-4-1
3E5X1
32EX, 3E0X1,
Accurately Assess/Report Facility/Utility
3E1X1, 3E3X1, 12 1 Hr Vehicles, Radios, Maps AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Damages
3E4X1, 3E4X2
32EX, 3E0X1,
Provide Damage Report Estimates 3E1X1, 3E3X1, 12 3 Hrs Vehicles, Radios, Maps AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
3E4X1, 3E4X2
Identify Isolation Points For Critically 3E0XX,
1 10 Min Vehicles, Radios, Maps AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Damaged Utilities 3E1X1, 3E4XX
Initiate Damage Reporting 3E2X 1 3 Hrs Vehicles, Radios, Maps AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
3E0X1, 3E1X1,
Isolate Critically Damaged Utilities 2 15 Min Utility Maps, Tools AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
3E4X1, 3E4X2
Install In-Line High Voltage Primary
3E0X1, 3E0X2 2 4 Hrs Splice Kit, Protective Gear AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Splice
Termination Kit,
Install High-Voltage Termination Kit 3E0X1, 3E0X2 2 4 Hrs AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Protective Gear
Climb and Descend 20 feet on Wooden Climbing Gear, Wooden
3E0X1 1 1 min AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Utility Pole Using Gaffs Pole
Install Grounding Set on Overhead Grounding Set, Grip-All
3E0X1 2 5 min AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Electrical Lines Stick
244 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
Repair High-Voltage Overhead Primary Protective Gear, Cable,
3E0X1, 3E0X2 3 2 Hrs AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Feeder Cable Come-Along, Line Truck
Generator, Cable, Tow
Install and Operate Emergency Generator 3E0X1, 3E0X2 2 2 Hrs AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Vehicle
Splice De-energized Airfield Lighting
3E0X1, 3E0X2 1 30 Min Airfield Cable Splice Kit AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Cable
Replace Runway Edge Light and Light Fixture, Isolation
3E0X1, 3E0X2 1 1 Hr AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Isolation Transformer Transformer
Bypass Damaged Airfield Lighting
3E0X1, 3E0X2 2 2 Hrs Control Cable AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Control Cable
Replace Constant Current Regulator in
3E0X1, 3E0X2 2 2 Hrs Regulator Cable AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Airfield Lighting Vault
Repair 6‖ Main Water Distribution Line 3E4X1, 3E4X2 3 2 Hrs Pipe, Clamps, Backhoe AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Isolate Broken 6‖ Main Water Line 3E4X1, 3E4X2 3 2 Hrs Backhoe, Pump, Tools AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Tap Kit, Nonsparking
Join 4‖ Feeder Pipe to Main POL Line 3E4X1, 3E4X2 2 2 Hrs AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Tools, Backhoe, Pumps
Tap Kit, Nonsparking
Join 6‖ Feeder to Main POL Line 3E4X1, 3E4X2 2 1 Hr AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Tools, Backhoe, Pumps
Repair 6‖ Sewage Pipe 3E4X1, 3E4X2 3 2 Hrs Backhoe, Pump, Tools AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Replace Sewage Lift Pump 3E4X1, 3E4X2 2 2 Hrs Pump AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Line Truck, Protective
Replace Pole-mounted Transformer 3E0X1, 3E0X2 3 3 Hrs AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Gear, Transformer
Replace Low-Voltage Service Entrance
3E0X1, 3E0X2 2 2 Hrs Cable AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Cable
Isolate Substation Circuit 3E0X1 1 15 Min All Protective Gear AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Replace Base Alert Siren 3E0X1, 3E0X2 2 2 Hrs Siren, Line Truck AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Install Emergency Light 3E0X1, 3E0X2 2 1 Hr Light Fixture AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Isolate Damaged Hot Water/Steam Pipe 3E1X1, 3E4X1 2 1 Hr Piping, Clamps AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Repair 8‖ Heating Line 3E1X1, 3E4X1 3 2 Hrs AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Isolate Damaged Chilled Water Line 3E1X1, 3E4X1 2 45 Min AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 245
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
Patch 40 SF Hole in Roof 3E3X1 2 1 Hr Plywood, Felt, Cold Patch AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Patch 40 SF Hole in Building Exterior 3E3X1 2 1 Hr Plywood, Lumber AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Replace Damaged Exterior Personnel
3E3X1 2 2 Hrs Exterior Door, Hardware AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Door
Replace Window Pane 3E3X1 1 1 Hr Tools, Glass, Supplies AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Replace 60’ of Damaged Electrical
3E0X1, 3E0X2 2 1 Hr Cable AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Feeder Cable
Repair Water Line (10’ of 2‖ Pipe) 3E4X1, 3E4X2 2 2 Hrs Pipe, Clamps AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Replace 10 LF of Fencing 3E2X1, 3E3X1 2 1 Hr Wire, Fencing Fabric AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Replace Entry Gate Rollers 3E2X1, 3E3X1 2 2 Hrs Rollers AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Buttress 150 SF Hole in Masonry Wall 3E3X1 3 7 Hrs Sandbags, Sand AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Fabricate/Install 20 LF of Temporary Accordion Ducting/Duct
Ductwork Board
Install Mobile Heating Unit 3E1X1 2 1 Hr Mobile Heating Unit AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Install Mobile Air Conditioner 3E1X1 2 1 Hr Portable Air Conditioner AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
3E5X1, 3E6X1,
Setup/Operate Precision Lightweight GPS PLGR, Topographical T.O. 31R4-2PSN11-1, T.O. 31R4-
3E7X1, 3E8X1, 1 Go/No Go
Receiver (PLGR) Map 2PSN11-31
3E9X1
3E5X1, 3E6X1,
Setup/Operate Defense Advanced GPS DAGR, Topographical T.O. 31R42PSN13-1, T.O. 31R4-
3E7X1, 3E8X1, 1 Go/No Go
Receiver (DAGR) Map 2PSN13-8-1
3E9X1
Explosive Ordnance
Determine UXO Hazard Distances 3E8X1 1 15 Min T.O. 60A-1-1-4, Field Experience
Construct Protective Measures 3E8X1 2 1 Hr Sandbags, Fill Material FM 21-16, Field Experience
TM 11-6665-365-12&P, Field
Operate Radiac Instruments 3E8X1 1 15 Min Radiac Instruments
Experience
Perform Render Safe Procedures on Training Weapon or
3E8X1 4 2 Hrs T.O. 60N-60-6, Field Experience
Nuclear Weapon (Simulation) Mockup
Package Nuclear Weapon or Components
3E8X1 2 1 Hr Nuclear Packaging Kit T.O 60N Series, Field Experience
For Disposal
246 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
Execute Standoff Munitions Disruption
3E8X1 2 2 Hrs .50-Cal/7.62 Rifle T.O. 60A-2-1-59, Field Experience
Techniques
Demonstrate Thermal (Nonexplosive)
3E8X1 2 1 Hr, 30 Min Thermite Grenades T.O. 60A-1-1-41, Field Experience
Techniques
Demonstrate Shape Charges, Other
3E8X1 2 1 Hr Shaped Charges T.O. 60A-2-1-51, Field Experience
Explosive Techniques
Demo Range, Mockups,
Immobilize Fuses 3E8X1 2 1 Hr T.O. 60A-2-1-60, Field Experience
Explosives, Tool Kits
Demo Range, Mockups, T.O. 60A-2-1-1, T.O. 60A-2-1-4,
Remove Fuses 3E8X1 2 1 Hr
Explosives, Tool Kits Field Experience
Demo Range, Mockups, T.O. 60A-2-1-3, T.O. 60A-2-1-3-2,
Disable Electrical Components 3E8X1 2 1 Hr
Explosives, Tool Kits T.O. 60A-2-1-20, Field Experience
Demo Range, Mockups, T.O. 60A-2-1-3, T.O. 60A-2-1-3-2,
Disrupt Firing Trains 3E8X1 2 1 Hr
Explosives, Tool Kits T.O. 60A-2-1-20, Field Experience
Use Shape Charges and Other Explosive Demo Range, Mockups,
3E8X1 2 1 Hr AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Techniques Explosives, Tool Kits
Fire Protection
Perform Aircrew Extraction From Wide
3E7X1 3 12 Min P-10 AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Body Aircraft
Perform Aircrew Extraction From
3E7X1 2 15 Min P-10 AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Tactical Aircraft
Fire Training Area; P-15,
Suppress Wide Body Aircraft Fire 3E7X1 14 5 Min P-23 (2 ea), P-20 (2 ea) or AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
P-23 (4 ea), P-20 (2 ea)
Fire Training Area, P-19
Suppress Tactical Aircraft Fire 3E7X1 10 3 Min AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
(3 ea), P-20
Demonstrate Capability To Suppress a P-8, P-12, P-18, P-19,
3E7X1 7 20 Min AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Structural Fire P-22
Vehicle Fire P-20, P-22, P-24
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 247
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
Tent City Fire P-22, P-24
Demonstrate Capability To Rescue
3E7X1 2 2 Min P-10, P-28 AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Individual From Fire Environment
Demonstrate Capability To Rescue Three
3E7X1 2 8 Min P-10, P-28 AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Individuals From Fire Environment
Demonstrate Capability To Rescue
3E7X1 2 30 Min P-10 and Jaws of Life AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Individual From Wrecked Vehicle
Demonstrate Capability to Suppress Bulk
3E7X1 10 20 Min P-18, P-19, P-22, P-24 AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Fuel Storage Fire
Expedient Methods - Destruction
3E0X1, 3E1X1,
Demolish 1K SF Structure 3E2X1, 3E3X1, 4 8 Hrs Dozer, FEL, Dump Truck AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
3E4X3, 2S0X1
Cut 12‖ I-Beam with Torch 3E2X1, 3E3X1 1 30 Min Cutting Torch AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
3E1X1, 3E2X1,
Load 20 CY of Material on Dump Truck 2 2 Hrs FEL, Dump Truck AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
3E3X1, 3E4X3
Load Damaged 10K Gal Fuel Tank on
3E2X1, 3E3X1 3 2 Hrs Crane, Lowboy AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Truck
Cut 200 LF of Damaged Concrete Concrete Saw, Water
Pavement Truck
3E2X1, 3E4X3, Towed Sweeper/Kick
Clean 20K SF Area with Sweeper 1 30 Min AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
3E6X1 Broom
Dozer, FEL, Dump
Demolish 30 Yds of Road 3E2X1, 3E3X1 4 4 Hrs Trucks, Jack Hammer, AFPAM 10-219V3, Field Experience
Compressor
Base Defense
Construct Hasty One-Man Fighting AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-222V3,
3EXXX 1 1 Hr Shovel, Natural Cover
Position AFH 10-222V14, Field Experience
Construct Deliberate Two-Man Fighting AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-222V3,
3EXXX 2 4 Hrs Shovels, Local Materials
Position AFH 10-222V14, Field Experience
248 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-222V3,
Construct 20 Yds Indirect Fire Position 3E2X1 1 15 Min Dozer
AFH 10-222V14, Field Experience
250 Sandbags, Fill AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-222V3,
Construct Sandbag Personnel Revetment 3EXXX 2 8 Hrs
Material AFH 10-222V14, Field Experience
Construct Sandbag Equipment/Vehicle 5,000 Sandbags, Fill AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-222V3,
3EXXX 12 24 Hrs
Revetment Material AFH 10-222V14, Field Experience
Concrete, Re-bar, Lumber, AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-222V3,
Construct Bitburg Revetment 3E3X1 3 8 Hrs
Cement Mixer AFH 10-222V14, Field Experience
FEL w/Atch, Bitburg AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-222V3,
Position Bitburg Revetment 3E2X1 1 15 Min
Revetment AFH 10-222V14, Field Experience
AFPAM 10-219V5, AFH 10-222V3,
Tape Measure, Survey
Site 252 LF of B-1 Revetment 3E5X1 1 5 Hrs AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-222V14,
Equipment/Kit
Field Experience
B-1 Revetment Kit, FEL, AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-222V3,
Erect Portion of B-1 Revetment 3E2X1, 3E3X1 8 1 Hrs Dump Truck, Fill Material, AFH 10-222V14, T.O. 35E4-170-2,
Plastic Sheeting Field Experience
B-1 Revetment Kit, FEL
AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-222V3,
w/Atch, Dump Truck,
Erect Full B-1 Revetment 3E2X1, 3E3X1 20 16 Hrs AFH 10-222V14, T.O. 35E4-170-2,
Crane, Fill Material,
Field Experience
Plastic Sheeting
Dozer, FEL, Dump
Construct 100 Linear Yds of 5’ High AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-222V3,
3E2X1 2 10 Hrs Trucks, Asphalt, Soil,
Earth Revetment AFH 10-222V14, Field Experience
Plastic Sheeting
AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-222V3,
Install Log Crib Obstacle (16’L x 4‖H) 3E3X1 4 6 Hrs Logs, Tools, Supplies
FEL w/Atch, Concrete AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-222V3,
Install Concrete Tumble Block (3 ea) 3E2X1, 3E3X1 2 30 Min
Tumble Blocks AFH 10-222V14, Field Experience
Beam, FEL w/Atch, AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-222V3,
Install Steel ―H‖ Beam (4’H) 3E2X1, 3E3X1 3 1 Hr
Concrete AFH 10-222V14, Field Experience
Barbed Wire, Stakes, AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-222V3,
Install 100 Yds of Tangle Foot Wire 3E2X1, 3E3X1 3 4 Hrs
Tools, Protective Gear AFH 10-222V14, Field Experience
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 249
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
CREW MATERIAL/
SIZE EQUIPMENT
Concertina Wire, Stakes,
AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-222V3,
Install 100 Yds of Concertina Wire 3E2X1, 3E3X1 3 2 Hrs Wire Cutters, Protective
Gear
Barbed Wire, Stakes,
AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-222V3,
Install 100 Yds of Barbed Wire 3E2X1, 3E3X1 3 4 Hrs Tools, Wire Cutters,
Protective Gear
Barbed Tape, Wire AFPAM 10-219V2, AFH 10-22V3,
Install 100 Yds of Razor Wire 3E2X1, 3E3X1 3 4 Hrs
Cutters, Protective Gear AFH 10-222V14, Field Experience
Deployment Support
Communications System,
Exercise Alerting Procedures 3EXXX Any 30 Min Key Personnel Recall AFPAM 10-219V2, Field Experience
Roster
Implement Recall Procedures 3EXXX Any 15 Min AFPAM 10-219V2, Field Experience
Recall Roster
Perform Personnel Processing 3EXXX Any 18 Hrs Processing Line AFPAM 10-219V2, Field Experience
Processing Line, Palletized
Complete Deployment Processing 3EXXX Any 24 Hrs AFPAM 10-219V2, Field Experience
Equipment
Exercise Mobility Recall 3EXXX Any 1 Hr Key Personnel Recall AFPAM 10-219V2, Field Experience
Roster
Processing Line, Palletized
Complete Mobilization Recall 3EXXX Any 28 Hrs AFPAM 10-219V2, Field Experience
Equipment
Attachment 7
CIVIL ENGINEER QUICK REFERENCE SHEETS
A7.1. Introduction. This attachment provides civil engineers with bare base planning
information and examples in a quick reference format. Table A7.1 lists each of the quick
references in this attachment.
Table A7.1. Listing of Quick References

Equipment
Table A7.1.1. BEAR Equipment UTCs.
Facility Planning and Layout
Table A7.1.2. Facility Group Dispersed Distances
Figure A7.1.1. Facility Layout Example (1100-Person)
Table A7.1.3. Typical Bare Base Facility Allocations
Standoff Distances and Separation for Expeditionary and Temporary
Table A7.1.4.
Structures
Figure A7.1.2. Separation Distances for Expeditionary and Temporary Structures
Construction Planning and Development
Table A7.1.5. Base Erection Schedule
Table A7.1.6. Typical Bare Base Development Priorities
Table A7.1.7. Design and Construction Matrix for Hardening Methods
Figure A7.1.3. Common Examples of Siting Revetments
Figure A7.1.4. Protecting a Building with Concrete Modular Revetments
Figure A7.1.5. Typical Burn Pit Layout Surrounded by a Soil Berm
Figure A7.1.6. Road Design Cross Section
Figure A7.1.7. Construction Diagram of Base Defense Berms and Ditches
Table A7.1.8. Construction Man-Hour Comparisons for Revetments
Table A7.1.9. Construction Estimates for Clearing Operations
Table A7.1.10. Estimated Vehicle Turning Radius for Road/Intersection Construction
Figure A7.1.8. Turning Diagram for 48-Foot Semi-Trailer
Figure A7.1.9. Turning Diagram for 45-Foot Passenger Bus
Airfield Planning and Layout
Table A7.1.11. Rotary-Wing Aircraft Dimensions, Separation, and Taxiway Widths
Table A7.1.12. Fixed-Wing Aircraft Dimensions
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 251
Figure A7.1.10. Runway End and Clear Zone Details

Table A7.1.13. Unmanned Aircraft Systems Dimensions
Figure A7.1.11. Fighter Aircraft Parked Diagonally
Figure A7.1.12. Typical Aircraft Parking Arrangement
Figure A7.1.13. Non-dispersed Aircraft and Revetments Layout
Figure A7.1.14. Dispersed Aircraft and Revetment Layout
Figure A7.1.15. Examples of Expedient Aircraft Revetments
Table A7.1.14. Minimum Operating Strip (MOS) Layout Tasks
Figure A7.1.16. Helipad Identification Markings
Figure A7.1.17. Hospital Helipad Identification Markings
Figure A7.1.18. Aircraft Parking Apron Static Ground Tie-Down
Figure A7.1.19. B-1 Revetment Layout
Electrical Design and Planning
Table A7.1.15. Power Poles Height, Class, Size, and Depth
Table A7.1.16. Power Pole Classes for Various Sized Transformers
Table A7.1.17. Pole Height and Depth
Table A7.1.18. Guy Anchor Suitability
Figure A7.1.20. National Electric Safety Code (NESC) Minimum Clearances
Table A7.1.19. KVA Load-Carrying Capacity of Wire
Table A7.1.20. Number of Wires Allowable in Various Sized Conduits
Figure A7.1.21. Wire Sizes, Types, and Uses
Table A7.1.21. Approximate Voltage Drops In Secondary Distribution Cables
Figure A7.1.22. Common Wire Splices
Table A7.1.22. Electrical Current Characteristics In SWA
Figure A7.1.23. Loop Power Distribution Layout
Figure A7.1.24. Radial Power Distribution Layout
Figure A7.1.25. Power Cables Underground Roadway Crossing
Figure A7.1.26. Basic Electrical Distribution System Schematic
Secondary Distribution Center (SDC) Placement for Non-Dispersed 24-
Figure A7.1.27.
Facility Grouping
General Plant Configuration w/Power Distribution Panels (PDC) by Base
Figure A7.1.28
Population
Water and Waste
Table A7.1.23. Water Use Planning Factors
Figure A7.1.29. Example Water Production Subsystem Layout
Figure A7.1.30. Total Wastewater Collection Layout (1100-Person Camp)
Figure A7.1.31. Partial Wastewater Collection Layout (1100-Person Camp)
Table A7.1.24. Size of Water Operations Area and Water Production Subsystems
Table A7.1.25. Calculate Quantity of Water Flowing in a Stream
Table A7.1.26. Convert Volume to Weight of Water
Table A7.1.27. Convert Pounds Per Square Inch to Vertical Feet of Water
Table A7.1.28. Convert Volume to Gallons of Water
Table A7.1.29. Convert Gallons of Water to Cubic Feet
Table A7.1.30. Calculate Volume of Rectangular Water Tank.
252 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A7.1.31. Calculate Volume of Cylindrical Water Tank

Table A7.1.32. Calculate Velocity of Water in Existing Channel
Figure A7.1.32. Diagram of Pipe Urinal with Soakage Pit
Figure A7.1.33. Expedient Straddle Trench Latrine Without Partitions
Figure A7.1.34. Common Grease Trap Concept/Layout
Table A7.1.33. Wastewater Volumes—Initial Beddown
Table A7.1.34. Basic Ice Requirements
Table A7.1.35. Evaporation Lagoon Size
Table A7.1.36. Ground Fuels Specifications and Properties
Figure A7.1.35. Typical Fuel Dike Layout (10K Bladder)
Table A7.1.37. Fuel Bladder Specifications
Figure A7.1.36. Typical Berm/Dike Layout For 50k and 210k Fuel Bladders
Figure A7.1.37. Primary and Secondary Dikes Around Fuel Bladder
Table A7.1.38. Cryogenics Fuel Specifications and Properties
Table A7.1.39. Fuel Reference Data.
Figure A7.1.38. Rock Identification
Figure A7.1.39. Rock Characteristics
Figure A7.1.40. Soil Characteristics
Figure A7.1.41. Soil Particle Size
Figure A7.1.42. Soil Classification Symbols
Figure A7.1.43. Grain Size Group
Figure A7.1.44. Hasty Field Identification of Soils (Part 1)
Figure A7.1.45. Hasty Field Identification of Soils (Part 2)
Table A7.1.40. Soil Stabilization Methods
Table A7.1.41. Recommended Dust Palliatives and Product Application
Figure A7.1.46. Recommended Slump for Various Types of Construction
Table A7.1.42. Contingency Airfield Pavement Smoothness Requirements
Table A7.1.43. CBR Ratings for Commonly Used Base Courses for Roads and Airfields
Table A7.1.44. Troubleshooting Guide for Portland Cement Concrete
Table A7.1.45. Pavement Surface Defects
Table A7.1.46. Troubleshooting Asphalt Concrete Pavement
Table A7.1.47. Common U.S. to Metric Conversions
Table A7.1.48. Fractions of an Inch
Table A7.1.49. Common Metric to U.S. Conversions
Table A7.1.50. Units of Centimeters
Table A7.1.51. Metric Equivalents (Distance)
Table A7.1.52. Metric Equivalents (Weight)
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 253
Table A7.2. BEAR Equipment UTCs

Surface
Air UTC ASSET
UTC
XFA14 Combat Air Forces Initial (8 Med/8 Small Shelters) XFS14
XFA16 Low Voltage Industrial (2 MEP-806's) XFS16
XFA17 Water Distribution Initial XFS17
XFA18 Water Distribution Follow-On XFS18
XFA19 Engineering Management (2 Small Shelters) XFS19
XFA21 Power Pro/CE Sup/Elect (3 Small Shelters) XFS21
XFA23 TF-2 Lightcart (2 TF-2's) XFS23
XFA3C Mobility Air Forces Initial (6 Med/8 Small Shelters) XFS3C
XFAAB 4K Dome (1 Shelter) XFSAB
XFAAC Field-Deployable Environmental Control Unit (FDECU), 12 Ea. XFSAC
XFAAD 8K Dome (1 Shelter) XFSAD
XFAAM AM2 Matting (6 Bundles) XFSAM
XFABL Billeting (12 Small Shelters) XFSBL
XFAC6 CAF Add-On (2 Medium/1 Small Shelter) XFSC6
XFACB CAF Follow-On (4 Small Shelters) XFSCB
XFACC Tactical Exchange (1 Small Shelter) XFSCC
XFACD Entomology (No Facility) XFSCD
XFACF Fire Ops/Crash Rescue (4 Small Shelters) XFSCF
XFACH Advanced Design Refrigerator, 300 CF (ADR-300), 1 XFSCH
XFACJ Large Area Maintenance Shelter (LAMS) 1 Ea. XFSCJ
XFACL Barrier Facility (1 Medium Shelter) XFSCL
XFACW Cold Weather (12 Heaters) XFSCW
XFACX CE Maintenance (1 Small Shelter) XFSCX
XFAEC CE Industrial (1 Small Shelter) XFSEC
XFAEG Power Distribution (2 Cable Reel Pallet Assembly) XFSEG
XFAGC Chaplain (1 Small Shelter) XFSGC
XFAHL High Line Dock (1 HLD) XFSHL
XFAKC Kitchen XFSKC
XFALC Shower/Shave/Latrine (2 Small Shelters) XFSLC
XFALS Self Help Laundry XFSLS
XFAMP Water Production, 1500-GPH Reverse Osmosis Water Purification Unit (ROWPU), 2 Ea. XFSMP
XFAMS Water Source Run XFSMS
XFAMU Munitions (1 Medium/1 Small Shelter) XFSMU
XFAMX Water Extension XFSMX
XFANC Camouflage Netting, 200 Ea. XFSNC
XFAND Water Production, 600-GPH ROWPU, 3 Ea. XFSND
XFAPH High Volt Power (2 MEP-12's; 2 10K Fuel Bladders; 1 Primary Switching Center; 1 Operating Remote Terminal XFSPH
XFAPL Low Voltage Housekeeping (5 MEP-806; 3 MEP-805's) XFSPL
XFAPS Postal (1 Medium Shelter; 1 FDECU) XFSPs
XFAR4 Mobile Aircraft Arresting System (MAAS), 1 Ea. XFSR4
XFARB Packing/Crating (No Facility) XFSRB
XFASC Combat Supply (4 Small Shelter) XFSSC
XFASD Secondary Distribution Center (SDC's), 2 Ea. XFSSD
XFATF Single-Pallet Expeditionary Kitchen (SPEK) Messing XFSTF
XFAVC Vehicle Maintenance/Operations (1 Small Shelter) XFSVC
XFAWC Admin (4 Small Shelters) XFSWC
XFAWR Concertina Wire (480 Rolls) XFSWR
XFAXN Mortuary (1 Small Shelter) XFSXN
XFAYC Expeditionary Airfield Lighting System (EALS), 1 Ea. XFSYC
XFAZC Remote Area Lighting System (RALS), 2 Ea. XFSZC
XFB1A Swift BEAR
254
Dispersed Distances (feet)

(Source : AFTTP 3-2.68 IP, Airfield Opening)
Aerial
Facility/Group Billeting MX Base Ops/ FES Munitions LOX POL Transportation Medical
Port
Billeting 1600 1600 1600 3160 1600 2640 900 200
MX 1600 1000 1600 3160 1600 2640 200 1600
Base Ops/FES 1600 1000 200 3160 1600 2640 1600 1600
Table A7.3. Facility Group Dispersed Distances
Aerial Port 1600 1600 200 3160 1600 2640 1600 1600
Munitions 3160 3160 3160 3160 3160 1800 3160 3160
LOX 1600 1600 1600 1600 3160 2640 1600 1600
POL 2640 2640 2640 2640 1800 2640 2640 2640
Transportation 900 200 1600 1600 3160 1600 2640 200
Medical 200 1600 1600 1600 3160 1600 2640 200

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 255
Figure A7.1. Facility Layout Example (1100-Person)
Table A7.4. Typical Bare Base Facility Allocations

Function Type Facility Support
Aviation Operations Small Shelters, Medium Shelters
Medium Shelters, Small Shelters,
Aviation Maintenance
Dome Shelters, Aircraft Hangars
Aircraft Maintenance Additive Aircraft Hangars
Munitions Maintenance Medium Shelters, Small Shelters
Small Shelters, Aircraft Hangars,
ADR
Medium Shelters
Supply Small Shelters, Dome Shelters
Transportation Small Shelters, Dome Shelters
Engineers Small Shelters, Medium Shelters
Aviation Admin, Aviation Supply, Aviation
Intelligence, Aviation Medical, Headquarters, Fuels,
OSI, Intelligence Additive, Weather, Combat Camera,
Small Shelters
Medical, Postal, Security Police, Information
Management, Personnel, Finance, Base Operations,
Contracting, and MWRS
256 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A7.5. Standoff Distances and Separation for Expeditionary and Temporary
Structures
Standoff Distance or Separation Requirements
Other Applicable
Structure Applicable Fabric Expeditionary Explosive
Location
Category Level of Covered and Weight
(1)
Protection Structures Temporary (TNT)
Structures(1)(2) (3)
Controlled 31 m 71 m
Billeting Low I
or Primary Gathering 31 m 71 m
Parking and Low I
Roadways
without a 24 m 47 m
Controlled Inhabited Structure Very Low I
(79 ft.) (154 ft.)
Perimeter
14 m 32 m
Parking and Billeting Low II
(46 ft.) (105 ft.)
Roadways
Primary Gathering 14 m 32 m
within a Low II
Controlled
Perimeter 10 m 23 m
(33 ft.) (75 ft.)
14 m 32 m
Billeting Low II
(46 ft.) (105 ft.)
Trash Primary Gathering 14 m 32 m
Low II
Containers Structure (46 ft.) (105 ft.)
10 m 23 m
(33 ft.) (75 ft.)
Separation between 18 m 18 m
Low III(5)
Structure Groups (59 ft.) (59 ft.)
Structure Separation between 9m 9m
Low III(5)
Separation(4) Structure Rows (30 ft.) (30 ft.)
Separation between 3.5 m 3.5 m
Very Low III(5)
Structures in a Row (12 ft.) (12 ft.)
Notes:
(1) See UFC 4-010-01 for a complete definition of these structure types.
(2) For container structures, see UFC 4-010-01.
(3) See UFC 4-010-02, for the specific explosive weights (kg/pounds of TNT) associated with designations –
I, II, III. UFC 4-010-02 is For Official Use Only (FOUO)
(4) Applies to Billeting and Primary Gathering Structures only. No minimum separation distances for other
inhabited structures.
(5) Explosive for building separation is an indirect fire (mortar) round at a standoff distance of half the
separation distance.
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 257
Figure A7.2. Separation Distances for Expeditionary and Temporary Structures

258 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A7.6. Base Erection Schedule

Time (D + X)
Major Task Definition
Requirement
Develop BEAR assets, locate NAVAIDS and lay out
Site Survey 1 – 5 Days
base.
Clear land, establish access to raw water, construct
Site Preparation 1 – 10 Days gravel roads, establish drainage and construct POL and
munitions revetments.
Airfield Lighting D + 2 Days Set up Expeditionary Airfield Lighting System (EALS).
Barriers D + 30 Days Install and maintain aircraft barriers.

Utility Lines and
D + 5 Days Stake facility locations.
Shelter Locations
Electrical Install high-voltage cables, connect PSC (or PDC) &
D + 10 Days
Distribution SDC and provide electric power to shelters.
Power Production D + 2 Days Set up MEP-12 generators/Interim BEAR Power Unit.
Water Treatment
D + 10 Days Lay water lines; develop water and waste program.
and Distribution
Civil Engineer Erect CE shops, office and billets. Provide technical
4 Days
Shelters assistance to other functional areas.
Static Grounds 4 Days Locate/establish static grounds.
Paint Striping D + 2 Days Mark taxiways and runways.
Table A7.7. Typical Bare Base Development Priorities

Priority Task
1 Operational requirements
2 Utility systems and services
3 Transportation network
4 Essential support facilities
5 Other support facilities
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 259
Table A7.8. Design and Construction Matrix for Hardening Methods
SPACE
METHOD EQUIPMENT LABOR MATERIALS
(TYPICAL)
Backhoe/Loader
Soil Berm Unskilled2,3 Soil4 >6 ft
Hand Shovel1
Truck/Trailer5
Hand Shovel Soil/Gravel
Sandbags Unskilled3 1-4 ft
Truck/Trailer5 Bags or other expedient
container6
Backhoe/Loader
Sand Grids Unskilled2,3 Soil/Gravel Grid Forms ~3 ft
Hand/Shovel1
Truck/Trailer5
Modular Precast Modular Units
Unskilled
Concrete Crane/Forklift Straps and bolts for 4-8 ft
Skilled2
Revetments connections
Sandbags7
Soil/Gravel/Rock
Backhoe/Loader
Rubble
Bin Hand Shovel1 Unskilled
Container 2-10 ft
Revetments Crane/Forklift Skilled2
Straps & bolts for
Truck/Trailer5
connections
Sandbags7
Unskilled Varies9
Sacrificial
Crane/Forklift Skilled2 Hardware for <1 ft
Panels
Engineering8 connections
1
Hand construction/shovel filling possible if heavy equipment unavailable.
2
Skilled labor required for operation of heavy equipment.
3
Engineering required for determination of allowable loads when placed overhead or against
non-hardened walls (berms only).
4
Requires facing to control erosion and blowing dust problems.
5
For transport of fill material if not available at site.
6
Acrylic fabric bags recommended for durability.
7
Sandbags should be used to protect corners of revetment array.
8
Engineering design required for thickness of panel, sizing of air space, and design of
structural attachment.
9
A variety of materials may be used, from plywood to asphalt to concrete to modern
composites.
260 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure A7.3. Common Examples of Siting Revetments
Figure A7.4. Protecting a Building with Concrete Modular Revetments

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 261
Figure A7.5. Typical Burn Pit Layout Surrounded by a Soil Berm
Figure A7.6. Road Design Cross Section

262 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure A7.7. Construction Diagram of Base Defense Berms and Ditches

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 263
Table A7.9. Construction Man-Hour Comparisons for Revetments

Construction
Revetment Type Size Man-Hours Per 100ft2
of Vertical Protection
Freestanding Berm 10 feet high by 3-foot crest 2.7
Bermed Wall 10 feet high by 3-foot crest 1.6
Sandbag Wall 10 feet high by 2.67 feet wide 90.0
A-1 Steel Bin Revetment 12 feet high by 5.25 feet wide 20.1
B-1 Steel Bin Revetment 16 feet high by 6.9 feet wide 22.6
Sandgrid 8 feet high by 3.17 feet wide 16.0
4-Meter Aircraft Revetment 13.7 feet high by 0.8 foot thick 0.9
Bitburg Revetment 6.58 feet high by 1 foot thick 0.9
Assumptions:
1. Berms will be built using a front-end loader
2. 4-Meter Aircraft and Bitburg Revetments are pre-positioned
3. Ten sandbags could be filled and stacked per man-hour
Table A7.10. Construction Estimates for Clearing Operations

Equipment (Hours Per Acre)
Equipment Light Medium Heavy
(12 Inches of Less*) (12 to 18 Inches*) (18 Inches*)
Bulldozer
Medium tractor 2.5 5.0 10.0
Heavy tractor 1.5 3.0 8.0
Shear blade
Medium tractor 0.4 0.8 1.3
Heavy tractor 0.3 0.5 0.8
*Maximum tree size.
Note. These clearing rates are average for tree counts of 50 trees per acre. Adverse conditions
(slopes, rocks, soft ground) can reduce these rate significantly.
264 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A7.11. Estimated Vehicle Turning Radius for Road/Intersection Construction
Design Vehicle Minimum Design Centerline1 Turning Minimum Inside

Types Turning Radius (ft) Radius (CTR) (ft) Radius (ft)
Passenger Car 24 21 14.4
Single Unit Truck 42 38 28.3
Intermediate Semi-trailer 40 36 19.3
Interstate Semi-trailer
45 41 7.9
(48 ft trailer)
Interstate Semi-trailer
45 41 4.4
(53ft trailer)
Intercity Bus (Motor
45 40.8 27.6
Coach)
Note 1: The turning radius assumed by a designer when investigating possible turning paths
and is set at the centerline of the front axle of a vehicle. If the minimum turning path is
assumed, the CTR approximately equals the minimum design turning radius minus one-half
the front width of the vehicle. (Ref. Geometric Design of Highways and Streets, American Association of
State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO))
Figure A7.8. Turning Diagram for 48-Foot Semi-Trailer

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 265
Figure A7.9. Turning Diagram for 45-Foot Passenger Bus
Table A7.12. Rotary-Wing Aircraft Dimensions, Separation, and Taxiway Widths

Minimum Distance Minimum Interior
Operating Operating
Rotary-Wing1 Between Centerline and Perimeter Taxi
Length Width
of Parked Aircraft2 Lane Width3
Type Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet
HH/MH-53 26.9 88.3 22.0 72.3 44.0 144.5 55.1 180.7
HH-1H 17.4 57.1 14.7 48.3 29.5 96.7 44.2 145.0
UH-1N57 17.5 57.3 14.6 48.0 29.3 96.0 43.9 144.0
UH/TH-1F/P 17.4 57.1 14.6 48.0 29.3 96.0 43.9 144.0
HH-60 19.8 64.9 16.4 53.7 32.7 107.4 40.9 134.2
CV-22 17.5 57.3 25.9 85.0 29.4 96.5 44.2 145.0
Notes:
1. Dimensions vary between different models and configurations of helicopters.
2. Distances represent two rotor diameters between center lines of parked aircraft.
3. Widths represent two and one-half rotor diameters for wheeled helicopters and three-rotor
diameters for skid-mounted helicopters.
(Ref: AFH 32-1084)
266 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A7.13. Fixed Wing Aircraft Dimensions
Aircraft1 Wingspan Length Height

Type Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet
B-1 22.7 to 41.7 77.8 to 136.7 46.0 150.7 10.3 33.6
B-52 56.4 185.0 47.8 156.6 12.4 40.8
C-5 67.9 222.7 75.6 247.8 19.9 65.1
C-9 28.5 93.4 36.4 119.3 8.4 27.5
MC-12 17.6 57.9 14.8 48.7 4.3 14.3
C-17 51.8 170 52.7 173 16.8 55.1
C-130 40.4 132.6 30.4 99.5 11.7 38.5
KC-135 39.9 130.8 41.5 136.2 12.7 41.7
KC-10 50.4 165.3 55.5 182.1 17.7 58.1
C-137 44.4 145.7 45.1 147.7 12.8 41.8
C-141B 48.8 160.0 51.3 168.4 12.0 39.3
E-3 44.4 145.7 46.6 152.9 12.9 42.2
E-4 59.7 195.7 70.7 231.8 19.6 64.3
A-10 17.5 57.5 16.2 53.3 4.5 14.9
F-5 8.5 28.0 15.8 51.7 4.0 13.2
F-15 13.0 42.8 19.4 63.8 5.9 19.2
F-16 10.0 32.8 14.5 47.6 5.0 16.4
F-22 13.6 44.5 18.9 62.1 5.1 16.6
F-35 10.7 35 15.4 51.1 4.6 15
Note 1: Dimensions vary between different models and configurations of aircraft.
Figure A7.10. Runway End and Clear Zone Details

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 267
Table A7.14. Unmanned Aircraft Systems Dimensions

Vertical
UAS Wingspan Length Height
Clearance
Type Feet Feet Inches Feet
RQ-4A Global Hawk 116.2 44.4 19.5 15.2
RQ-4B Global Hawk 130.9 47.6 20.65 15.4
MQ-9A Reaper 66 36.2 20 11.8
(1)
RQ-1B/MQ-1B Predator 48.7 27.0 5.3 6.9
MQ-1C ERMP Warrior 56.3 27.5(2) TBD 9.9. (Level) (3)
RQ-7B Shadow 200 14 11.33 TBD 3.2
Notes.
(1) 55.25 feet for MQ-1B Block 10 & 15.
(2) 29 feet with Alpha Probe attached.
(3) 10.32 feet for uneven surfaces, allow for an additional 5 inches.
(Ref: AFCESA ETL 09-1)
Figure A7.11. Fighter Aircraft Diagonal Parking Diagram

268 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure A7.12. Typical Aircraft Parking Arrangement

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 269
Figure A7.13. Non-dispersed Aircraft and Revetments Layout
Figure A7.14. Dispersed Aircraft and Revetments Layout

270 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure A7.15. Examples of Expedient Aircraft Revetments
Table A7.15. Minimum Operating Strip (MOS) Layout Tasks

MOS Layout Tasks
1 MOS Centerline
2 MOS Corners
3 Taxiway entrances or exits
4 ―T‖ Clear Zones
5 Mobile Aircraft Arresting System (MAAS)
6 Distance-To-Go (DTG) Markers
7 Precision Approach Path Indicators (PAPI)
8 Edge Markers
9 Taxiway holding lines, centerlines, and changes in direction
10 Emergency Airfield Lighting
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 271
Figure A7.16. Helipad Identification Markings

272 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure A7.17. Hospital Helipad Identification Markings
Figure A7.18. Aircraft Parking Apron Static Ground Tie-Down

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 273
Figure A7.19. B-1 Revetment Layout

274 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A7.16. Power Poles Height and Class

Minimum Height
Pole Minimum Class Normal Class
(feet)*
Line Pole 30 7 5
Corner Pole (guyed) 30 6 4
Corner Pole (unguyed) 30 2 2
Dead End Pole (guyed) 30 5 4
Dead End Pole (unguyed) 30 2 2
Transformer Poles 35 **
* Increase heights by 5 feet if telephone or signal wires are carried or likely to be installed.
** Refer to Table 5.9.
Table A7.17. Power Pole Classes for Various Sized Transformers

New Pole for
Existing Pole Maximum Transformer Size (kVA)
Transformer
Minimum Class Minimum Class One-Phase Three-Phase
6 7 5
5 6 15 5
4 5 50 37 ½
2 3 75 75
2 2 100 100
Table A7.18. Pole Height and Depth

Depth of Setting
Pole Height (feet)
(feet)
In Soil In Rock
20 5.0 3.0
25 5.5 3.5
30 5.5 4.0
35 6.0 4.0
40 6.0 4.0
45 6.5 4.5
50 7.0 4.5
55 7.5 5.0
60 8.0 5.0
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 275
Table A7.19. . Guy Anchor Suitability

General Soil
Type of Anchor No. Classification Description
Type
1 Solid bedrock
Dense clay; compact gravel; dense fine sand;
2
Rock Hard laminated rock; slate; schist; sandstone
Shale; broken bedrock; hardpan; compact clay-
3
gravel mixtures
4 Gravel; compact gravel and sand; claypan
Expanding Ordinary Medium-firm clay; loose sand gravel; compact
5
coarse sand
Soft-plastic clay; loose coarse sand; clay silt;
6
Swamp or as compact fine sand
Soft
Suitable 7 Fill; loose fine sand; wet clays; silt
8 Swamp; marsh; saturated silt; humus
Figure A7.20. Example National Electric Safety Code (NESC) Minimum Clearances
276 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A7.20. KVA Load-Carrying Capacity of Wire

Type of Circuit
Wire Size1 Maximum 3Ø 4W
1Ø 2W 1Ø 3W 3Ø 4W 1Ø 2W
(AWG)2 Amperes 2,400/4,160
120V 120/240V 127/220V 2,400V
V
(kVA) (kVA) (kVA) (kVA)
(kVA)
8 75 9 18 29 180 540
6 100 12 24 38 240 720
4 150 18 36 57 360 1,080
2 180 22 44 69 432 1,296
1/0 250 30 60 95 600 1,800
4/0 435 52 104 166 1,044 3,130
1
Overhead wires with weatherproof insulation or bare wires.
2
American Wire Gage
Table A7.21. Number of Wires Allowable in Various Sized Conduits
Wire NUMBER OF WIRES IN VARIOUS SIZED CONDUIT

Size 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
18 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4
16 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4
14 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1
12 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 1 1/4
10 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 1/4
8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 3/4 1 3/4 1 3/4
6 1/2 1 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 1/2 1 1/2 2 2 2
4 3/4 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 2 2 2 2 1/2
2 3/4 1 1/4 1 1/2 1 1/2 2 2 2 1/2 2 1/2 2 1/2
1 3/4 1 1/2 1 1/2 2 2 2 1/2 2 1/2 3 3
1/0 1 1 1/2 2 2 2 1/2 2 1/2 3 3 3
2/0 1 2 2 2 1/2 2 1/2 3 3 3 3 1/2
3/0 1 2 2 2 1/2 3 3 3 3 1/2 3 1/2
4/0 1 1/4 2 2 1/2 2 1/2 3 3 3 1/2 3 1/2 4
Note: Rubber-covered or weatherproof wire
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 277
Figure A7.21. Wire Sizes, Types and Uses

278 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A7.22. Approximate Voltage Drops In Secondary Distribution Cables
Approximate Voltage Drops In Secondary Distribution Cables

Cable Length and Approximate
Rated Amperage/Pins
Voltage Drop
15 ft 25 ft 50 ft 100 ft 200 ft 300 ft
200 amp/8 pin cables (3-ph) 1V 1.6V 3.2V 6.4V 12.8V 19.2V
100 amp/8 pin cables (3-ph) 0.4V 0.7V 1.4V 2.8V 5.6V 8.4V
Figure A7.22. Common Wire Splices

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 279
Table A7.23. Electrical Current Characteristics In SWA
Country Type of Frequency Number of Nominal Number of Frequency

Current Phases Voltage Wires Stability
Afghanistan A.C. 50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes

Egypt A.C. 50 1,3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Iran A.C. 50 1.3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Iraq A.C. 50 1.3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Israel A.C. 50 1.3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Jordan A.C. 50 1.3 220/380 2,3,4 Yes
Kuwait A.C. 50 1.3 240/415 2,4 Yes
110/190,
Lebanon A.C. 50 1.3 2,4 No
220/380
Libya A.C. 50 1.3 220/380 2,4 Yes
Oman A.C. 50 1.3 240/415 3,4 Yes
Pakistan A.C. 50 1.3 230/400 2,3,4 No
Saudi Arabia A.C. 60 1.3 127/220 2,3,4 Yes
Sudan A.C. 50 1.3 240/415 2,4 Yes
Syria A.C. 50 1.3 220/380 2,3,4 No
Turkey A.C. 50 1.3 220/380/154 2,3,4 Yes
Yemen A.C. 50 1.3 220/380 2,4 No
Figure A7.23. Loop Power Distribution Layout

280 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure A7.24. Radial Power Distribution Layout
Figure A7.25. Power Cables Underground Roadway Crossing

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 281
Figure A7.26. Basic Electrical Distribution System Schematic
Figure A7.27. Secondary Distribution Center (SDC) Placement for Non-Dispersed 24-
Facility Grouping
282 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure A7.28. General Plant Configuration w/Power Distribution Panels (PDC) by Base
Population
Table A7.24. Water Use Planning Factors

Functions Water Usage Factor (gal/person/day)
Using Fixed Water
Potable Water Using BEAR
Treatment Plant
Drinking 4.0 4.0
Personal Hygiene 3.0 4.0
Shower 5.0 15.0
Hospital 1.0 1.0
Heat Treatment 1.0 1.0
Using Fixed Water
Non-Potable Water Using BEAR
Treatment Plant
Laundry 2.0 14.0
Construction 2.0 2.0
Graves Registration 0.5 0.2
Vehicle Operations 0.5 1.8
Aircraft Operations 2.0 3.0
Firefighting 2.0 4.0
10% Loss Factor 3.0 5.0
Total 30.0 60.0

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 283
Figure A7.29. Example Water Production Subsystem Layout

284 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure A7.30. Total Wastewater Collection Layout (1100-Person Camp)

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 285
Figure A7.31. Partial Wastewater Collection Layout (1100-Person Camp)

286 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A7.25. Size of Water Operations Area and Water Production Subsystems
Total Gallons Tank Tank Farm Tank Farm

Camp 600 WPS3 1500 WPS4
Required Per Farm Area w/600 Area w/1500
Populace Quantity Quantity
Day1 Area2 WPS2,3 WPS2,4
550 16,500 50 x 130 160 x 230 140 x 230 1 1
1100 33,000 80 x 130 160 x 230 140 x 230 1 1
1650 49,500 160 x 130 250 x 230 140 x 230 2 1
2200 66,000 160 x 160 250 x 260 210 x 260 2 2
2750 82,500 160 x 190 340 x 290 280 x 290 3 2
3300 99,000 160 x 190 340 x 290 280 x 290 3 2
4400 132,000 200 x 220 430 x 320 350 x 320 4 3
Notes:
1. At a rate of 30 gallons per person per day (30 GPPPD).
2. Required area in feet (width x length).
3. Each 600 Water Production Subsystem (WPS) has 3 ROWPUs capable of producing 36,000
gallons per day (GPD).
4. Each 1500 Water Production Subsystem WPS has 2 ROWPUs capable of producing 60,000
gallons per day (GPD).
(Ref: T.O. 40W4-21-1)
Table A7.26. Calculate Quantity of Water Flowing in a Stream
Calculation of Quantity of Water Flowing in a Stream

Formula: Q = 6.4 x A x V
where Q = Quantity of water in gallons per minute
6.4 = Constant. There are 7.5 gallons of water per cubic foot. However,
because of error in stream measurement, 7.5 is reduced to 6.4.
V = Velocity of the stream in feet per minute. This figure is obtained by
noting the time it takes a twig or floating object to travel a known
distance.
A = Area of the stream in square feet. This figure is obtained by
multiplying the width of the stream by the depth of the stream.
Illustrative Problem: A stream has an average depth of 2 feet and a width of 16 feet. A
twig floats 13.3 feet per minute. How many gallons per minute are flowing in the
stream?
Q = 6.4 x A x V
= 6.4 x 2 x 16 x 13.3
= 2,732.8 gallons per minute
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 287
Table A7.27. Convert Volume to Weight of Water
Conversion of Volume to Weight of Water

Formula: Weight of water in pounds = Cubic feet of water x 62.4
Illustrative Problem: What is the weight of water in a full tank with a volume of 470
cubic feet?
Weight of water = Cubic feet x 62.4

= 470 x 62.4
= 29, 328 pounds
(Ref: FM 10-52-1)
Table A7.28. Convert Pounds Per Square Inch to Vertical Feet of Water
Conversion of Pounds Per Square Inch to Vertical Feet of Water

Formula: Vertical feet of water = Pounds per square inch = 2.3
Illustrative Problem: How many vertical feet of water are in a tank that is 45 feet high?
A pressure gauge at the bottom of the tank reads 9 pounds per square inch.
Vertical feet of water = Pounds per square inch x 2.3

= 9 x 2.3
= 20.7
(Ref: FM 10-52-1)
Table A7.29. Convert Volume to Gallons of Water
Conversion of Volume to Gallons of Water

Formula: Gallons of water = Cubic feet of water x 7.5
Illustrative Problem: How many gallons of water are in a tank with 400 cubic feet of
water?
Gallons of water = Cubic feet of water x 7.5

= 400 x 7.5
= 3,000
(Ref: FM 10-52-1)
288 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A7.30. Convert Gallons of Water to Cubic Feet

Conversion of Gallons of Water to Cubic Feet
Formula: Cubic feet = Gallons of water
7.5
Illustrative Problem: How many cubic feet of tank space are needed to store 1,500
gallons of water?
Cubic feet = Gallons of water
7.5
= 1,500
7.5
= 200 (Ref: FM 10-52-1)
Table A7.31. Calculate Volume of Rectangular Water Tank

Calculation of Volume of Rectangular Water Tank
Formula for Rectangular Tank: V = L x W x H
where V = Volume in cubic feet
L = Length in feet
W = Width in feet
H = Height in feet
Illustrative Problem: What is the volume of a rectangular tank that is 10 feet long, 7 feet
wide, and 4 feet high?
V=LxWxH
= 10 x 7 x 4
= 280 cubic feet (Ref: FM 10-52-1)
Table A7.32. Calculate Volume of Cylindrical Water Tank
Calculation of Volume of Cylindrical Water Tank

Formular for Cylindrical Tank: V
where V = Volume in cubic feet
= 3.14 or 22/7, a constant
r = Radius (half of the diameter) of the tank
H = Height in feet
Illustrative Problem: What is the volume of a cylindrical tank that has a radius of 4 feet
and is 7 feet high?
V = r2H
= 3.14 x 42 x 7
= 3.14 x 16 x 7
= 351.68 cubic feet (Ref: FM 10-52-1)
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 289
Table A7.33. Calculate Velocity of Water in Existing Channel

290 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure A7.32. Diagram of Pipe Urinal with Soakage Pit
Figure A7.33. Expedient Straddle Trench Latrine Without Partitions

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 291
Figure A7.34. Common Grease Trap Concept/Layout
Table A7.34. Wastewater Volumes—Initial Beddown
Quantity Quantity To Be Comments

Purpose Disposed (GPPPD)
(GPD)
Drinking 4.0 2.0 1/2 of Drinking Water
Personal Hygiene 3.0 2.0 Portion of Personal Hygiene
Showers 5.0 5.0 100% Becomes Waste
Food Preparation 4.0 3.0 Only Kitchen Clean-Up
Considered
Vehicles 0.5 0.0 No Wastewater Expected
Hospital 1.0 1.0 100% Becomes Waste
Heat Treatment 1.0 0.0 No Wastewater Expected
Construction 2.0 0.0 No Wastewater Expected
Graves 0.5 0.0 No Wastewater Expected
Registration
Laundry 2.0 2.0 100% Becomes Waste
Aircraft Cleaning 2.0 0.0 No Wastewater Expected
Firefighting 2.0 0.0 No Wastewater Expected
Loss Factor (10%) 3.0 0.0 No Wastewater Expected
30.0 15.0
292 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A7.35. Basic Ice Requirements

Ice Requirements
Base Population
(pounds/day)
550 2,420
1,100 4,840
2,200 9,680
3,300 14,520
Table A7.36. Evaporation Lagoon Size

Wastewater Lagoon Area Required Number of Dimensions at
Base Size
(GPD) (SF) Lagoons 5’ Depth
550 8,250 100,000 9 120΄ x 120΄
1100 16,500 200,000 9 164΄ x 164΄
2200 33,000 400,000 9 226΄ x 226΄
3300 49,500 600,000 9 273΄ x 273΄
4400 66,000 800,000 9 313΄ x 313΄
5500 82,500 1,000,000 9 348΄ x 348΄
6600 99,000 1,200,000 9 380΄x 380΄
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 293
Table A7.37. Ground Fuels Specifications and Properties
MGX DF-1/FO-2 DFM DF-2

Density (lb/gal) 6.2 6.9 7.0 6.9
Flash Point (°F) -30 (approx) 100 140 125
Freeze Point (°F) -75 (approx) 41 (approx) 30 34 (approx)
API Gravity (max) 71 - - 42
API Gravity (min) 47 - - 33
MIL-F-
MIL-SPEC VV-G-190 ASTM D975 ASTM D975
16884
9130-00- 9130-00- 9140-00- 9140-00-
NSN
264-6128 286-5286 273-2377 286-5294
NATO/ASCC Symbol F46/F49/F50 F-54 F-76 F-54
Centane Number - 45 45 45
Cloud Point °F-max - -60 30 Spec by user
Pour Point °F-max - Spec by user 20 Spec by user
Viscosity min - 1.4cSt 1.8cSt 2.0cSt
Viscosity max - 3.0cSt 4.5cSt 4.3cSt
Sulfur % max 0.10 0.5 1.00 0.5
Operating Temp - -25 to 32 - -
Flash Point F-min - - 140 -
TO Reference 42B 1-1-1 42B 1-1-1 42B 1-1-1 42B 1-1-1
294 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure A7.35. Typical Fuel Dike Layout (10K Bladder)
Table A7.38. Fuel Bladder Specifications

Bladder Dimensions Weight
Full (Approximately)1 Empty Dry
Capacity (Approx.)2
Length Width Height Length Width
Ft In Ft In Ft In Ft In Ft In Pounds
500 13 5 9 0 5 8 5 1 4 4 250
3,000 12 6 12 6 4 0 14 0 14 0 210
10,000 20 6 20 6 4 0 22 0 22 0 375
20,000 26 6 22 6 5 2 28 0 24 0 680
50,000 66 0 22 6 5 5 68 2 28 1 1,500
50,000 62 8 22 7 5 2 65 0 24 6 1,026
210,000 68 5 68 5 6 5 70 0 70 0 5,000
3
210,000 72 5 73 4 5 6 74 4 73 2 4,217
1-After settling (height is greater on initial fill)
2-Tank only. no accessories
3-Tanks produced by MPC Containment Systems after October 2008
(Ref: T.O. 37A12-15-1)
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 295
Figure A7.36. Typical Berm/Dike Layout For 50k and 210k Fuel Bladders
Figure A7.37. Primary and Secondary Dikes Around Fuel Bladder

296 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A7.39. Cryogenics Fuel Specifications and Properties

DATA OXYGEN NITROGEN
Boiling Point -297 (F), -183 (C) -320 (F), -196 (C)
Freezing Point -361 (F), -218 (C) -346 (F), -210 (C)
Liquid Density 9.52lb/gal at -297 (F) 6.74lb/gal at -320 (C)
Liquid Density 1.14g/ml at -183 (C) 0.807g/ml at -196 (C)
Odor None None
Purity (% by vol) 99.6 min/no limit 99.5 min
TO Reference 42B6-1-1 42B7-3-1-1
Specification MIL-O-27210 MIL-P-27401
(Ref: AFPAM 23-221)
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 297
Table A7.40. Fuel Reference Data

Fuel Reference Data
(The alternate emergency fuel in a given category is listed in order of preference indicated by
alphabetical letters)
JP-4 Support Diesel Support Diesel Power Heating Plant
FUEL
Equipment Equipment Generation Boilers
1,2
JP-4 or Commercial Jet B Primary D D1,2 --
JP-5 Primary B3 B3 A4
JP-8 Primary B3 B3 A4
TS-1 (with US DOD fuel
Primary C C --
additives)
AVGAS Blended C1,5 -- -- --
1,5
Leaded MOGAS Blended C -- -- --
1,5
Unleaded MOGAS Blended B -- -- --
Fuel Oil Grades 1& 2 -- C C Primary
1,9
Diesel Fuel Marine (DFM) B C A A4
Commercial Jet A Primary B3 B3 A4
Commercial Jet A-1 Primary B3 B3 A4
Diesel Low Sulfur 1-D A1,6 Primary Primary A4
Diesel Low Sulfur 2-D A1,6 Primary Primary A4
B20 -- A B1 B1
Notes:
1. EMERGENCY ONLY.
2. Blended with 50% Diesel (DF-2 only) by volume. Aviation Fuel Grade JP-4 (or Jet B) should
be used only when no other fuels are available. JP-4 (or Jet B) and mixtures of JP-4 (or Jet B)
and other fuels are dangerous due to the extremely low flash point of the JP-4 (or Jet B). When
this fuel or fuel mixtures must be used in DAY TANKS or operating tanks located inside
buildings or structures, every precaution must be taken to protect the product from any ignition
source. Base Ground Safety Personnel must be consulted prior to implementing use of JP-4 in
diesel engines. Tanks containing this mixture should be temporarily marked - BLENDED
FUEL IN USE — DANGER.
3. Some units powered by diesel fuels are authorized to operate on JP-5/JP-8 as a primary or
alternate fuel. Refer to the applicable equipment manual for instructions.
4. Blending and burning alternate fuels with conventional boiler fuel must be coordinated with
civil engineering at command level. For detailed engineering data on blending, contact
AFCESA/CESM, 139 Barnes
Drive, Suite 1, Tyndall AFB, FL 32403-5319; COMM - (850) 283-6222, DSN - 523-6222.
5. Blended 50/50 with JP-4. Under no circumstances should this blend be premixed and stored.
Equipment utilizing this blend should be tagged - BLENDED FUEL IN USE.
6. Some mobile electric power units are authorized to operate on diesel fuels as an alternate
fuel. Refer to the applicable equipment manual for clarification. Contact the applicable AFMC
technical office if further clarification is required. (Ref. AFPAM 23-221)
298 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure A7.38. Rock Identification

Very fine-grained; splits along thin planes Slate
Foliated
Metallic reflection; splits into slabs and flakes or thin
Schist
semitransparent sheets
Contains streaks or bands of light and dark minerals; breaks
Gneiss
to bulky, angular fragments
Frothy Light colored; lightweight; easily crushed Pumice
Dark colored; cindery Scoria
Light colored; massive; extremely hard Quartz
Glass
Dark colored; may have some gas bubbles Obsidian

Very Fine-Grained
Earthy; clay odor;

Shale
platy
No acid reaction May have small pieces Tuff
Soft
of glass; low density

Sugary appearance Marble
Acid reaction
Stony
Dull and massive Limestone

Waxy; very hard; weathers Chert
to soft white
Hard
Dull; may contain some gas Light colored Felsite

bubbles or visible crystals Dark colored Basalt
Sandy; mostly one mineral Gritty sandpaper feel Sandstone
(quartz) Sugary; not gritty Quartzite
Sandy; mostly one mineral Gritty sandpaper feel Sandstone
(quartz) Sugary; not gritty Quartzite
Coarse-Grained
Hard
Mixed minerals; salt-and- Light colored Granite

pepper appearance Dark colored Gabbro-diorite
Fragmental; appearance of
Conglomerate
broken concrete
Fragmental; may contain
Low density Tuff
small pieces of glass
Soft
Sugary appearance Marble

Acid reaction
Shell fragments Limestone
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 299
Figure A7.39. Rock Characteristics
(Ref: FM 5-430-00-1)
Figure A7.40. Soil Characteristics

300 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure A7.41. . Soil Particle Size
Figure A7.42. Soil Classification Symbols
(Ref: FM 5-472)
Figure A7.43. Grain Size Group

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 301
Figure A7.44. Hasty Field Identification of Soils (Part 1)

302 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Figure A7.45. Hasty Field Identification of Soils (Part 2)

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 303
Table A7.41. Soil Stabilization Methods
Soil Stabilization Methods Most Suitable for Specific Applications

Purpose Soil Type Method
Subgrade Fine granular SA, SC, MB, C
Improved load carrying and stress
Coarse granular SA, SC, MB, C
distribution characteristics
Clays of low PI C, SC, CMS, LMS, SL
Clays of high PI SL, LMS
Reduce frost susceptibility Fine granular CMS, SA, SC, LF
Clays of low PI CMS, SC, SL, LMS
Waterproofing and improved runoff Clays of low PI CMS, SA, LMS, SL
Control of shrinkage and swell Clays of low PI CMS, SC, C, LMS, SL
Clays of high PI SL
Reduce resiliency Clays of high PI SL, LMS
Elastic silts or clays SC, CMS
Base course stabilization Fine granular SC, SA, LF, MB
Improvements of substandard
materials Clays of low PI SC, SL
Improved load carrying and stress Course granular SA, SC, MB, LF
distribution characteristics
Fine granular SC, SA, LF, MB
Reduction of pumping Fine granular SC, SA, LF, MB, membranes
Dust palliative CMS, SA, Oil or bituminous
Fine granular
surface spray, APSB
Plastic soils CMS, SL, LMS, APSB, DCA 70
LEGEND: Where the methods of treatment are:
APSB = Asphalt penetration surface binder MB = Mechanical blending
C = Compaction SA = Soil-asphalt
CMS = Cement modified soil SC = Soil-cement
DCA70 = Polyvinyl acetate emulsion SL = Soil-lime
LF = Lime fly ash PI =Plasticity Index
LMS = Lime modified soil
304 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A7.42. Recommended Dust Palliatives and Product Application

Primary Solution(s) Secondary Solution(s)
Application Product Application Dilution Application Product Application Dilution Application

Category Rate Ratio Type Category Rate Ratio Type
Fixed-
Synthetic Polymer
wing 0.4 gsy N/A Topical 1.2 gsy 3:1 Admix*
Fluid Emulsion
Airfields
Polymer Synthetic
Roads 0.8 gsy 3:1 Admix** 0.6 gsy N/A Topical
Emulsion Fluid
Synthetic Polymer
Helipads 0.4 gsy N/A Topical 1.2 gsy 3:1 Topical
Fluid Emulsion
Polymer
0.6 gsy 3:1 Topical
Base Synthetic Emulsion
0.4 gsy N/A Topical
Camps Fluid Polysac-
0.6 gsy 3:1 Topical
charide
* Depth of mixing should be a minimum of 4 inches (102 millimeters).
** Depth of mixing should be a minimum of 3 inches (76 millimeters).
(Ref: ETL 09-3)
Figure A7.46. Recommended Slump for Various Types of Construction

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 305
Table A7.43. Contingency Airfield Pavement Smoothness Requirements

Pavement Category Direction of Testing Tolerance
Longitudinal 3 mm (0.125 in)
Runways and taxiways
Transverse 6.5 mm (0.25 in)
All other airfield and Longitudinal 6.5 mm (0.25 in)
helicopter paved areas Transverse 6.5 mm (0.25 in)
Table A7.44. CBR Ratings for Commonly Used Base Courses for Roads and Airfields
Type CBR
Graded, crushed aggregate 100
Water-bound macadam 100
Dry-bound macadam 100
Bituminous base course, central plant hot mix 100
Lime rock 80
Bituminous macadam 80
*Stabilized aggregate (mechanically) 80
Soil cement 80
Sand shell or shell 80
*It is recommended that stabilized aggregate base-course material not

be used for tire pressures in excess of 100 psi.
(FM 5-430-00-1)
306 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A7.45. Troubleshooting Guide for Portland Cement Concrete

Problem Cause or Definition Action
False set Unusual stiffening of concrete far Do not add water
ahead of initial set with little Plasticity can be restored with additional
evolution of heat (rare) mixing
Notify cement supplier
Premature Improper use of accelerator Use retarders
hardening High concrete temperature Avoid Type III, lower concrete
temperature
Use pozzolans
Slump out of Change in water content or Check aggregate moisture contents and
specification aggregate gradation gradations
or varying Concrete temperature too high Check water being added at the plant
(stiffens with temperature Check if water has been added onsite
increase) Lower concrete temperature
Fluctuating air Pozzolan varying Check materials and construction
content Cement brand changed procedures
Sand gradation changed
Worn mixer blades
Overloading mixer
Excessive/variable mixing
Organic contamination
Interaction with admixtures such
as calcium chloride
Improper air entraining agent or
change in brand
Excessive High ambient temperatures Lower concrete temperature by chilling
concrete Hot cement water, cooling aggregate, paving at night
temperature
Failure to set Organic contamination Check water, aggregates, equipment for
Retarder not dispersed contamination
Better mixing to disperse retarder
Sticky mix Sand too fine Change sand gradation
Using wood float on air-entrained Use magnesium or aluminum floats
concrete
Honeycombing Inoperative vibrators Check vibrators
Inadequate vibration Improve material handling, mixing, and
Excessive vibrator spacing placing procedures to avoid segregation
Concrete segregation
Excessive edge Poor and/or nonuniform concrete Adjust mix design and construction
slump Improper equipment operation procedures
and/or unskilled labor
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 307
Smoothness Nonuniform concrete Improve mixing and construction

problems ―Stop-and-go‖ paver operation procedures
Too much or too little concrete in
front of paver
Popouts Unsound aggregates Check aggregates
Clay balls
Scaling Overfinishing Improve finishing technique
Premature freezing of concrete Protect concrete from freezing
Contraction Sawing too late Saw sooner
cracking Slab size too large Check slab dimensions
Raveling of Sawing too soon Wait longer to saw
saw cut
Plastic Excessive loss of moisture due to Lower concrete temperature
shrinkage temperature, humidity, wind, Use wing breaks and sun screens
cracking and/or curing procedures Pave at night
Improve curing procedure
Low-strength Improper sample preparation, Check sampling, materials, batching,
concrete curing, and testing mixing, construction, and curing
Excessive water/cement ratio procedures
Contamination
Batching errors
Improper mixing
Inadequate consolidation
Inadequate curing
Joint spalls Excessive hand finishing Improve construction practices
Adding concrete to fix low spots
Nonuniform concrete
Damage from equipment
(Ref: ETL 09-2)
308 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A7.46. Pavement Surface Defects

AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 309
310 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 311
Table A7.47. Troubleshooting Asphalt Concrete Pavement

Problem Symptom Test Potential Cause
Low asphalt content Dry appearance Extraction Mix design
Stiff mix Faulty scales or metering
Uncoated aggregate
Brown color
High asphalt content Shiny appearance Extraction Mix design
Mix slumps in truck Faulty scales and metering
Improper gradation Course appearance Sieve analysis Faulty scales
Fine appearance Cold feed setting
Dry appearance Segregation during handling
Shiny appearance Change in gradation delivered to
plant
Mix design
Grade Birdbaths Survey Not using stringline or stringline
not set properly
Smoothness Birdbaths and/or Straightedge Stopping and starting paver
rough ride Quick starts and stops with
rollers
Parking rollers on finished
surface
Underlying surface is uneven
Excessive manual operation of
thickness control on paver
Roller checking Hairline cracks Visual Mix too hot
Excessive rolling with steel
wheel roller
Too much tack coat
Dirty existing surface
Too many fines in mix
Improper bond to Hairline cracks Inspection of Too much tack
underlying layer cores Not enough tack
Dirty existing surface
Bad tack material
(Ref: ETL 09-2)
312 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A7.48. Common U.S. to Metric Conversions

Length
U.S. Unit Metric Equivalent
Inch 2.5400 Centimeters
Inch 25.4001 Millimeters
Feet 0.3048 Meters
Mile 1.6093 Kilometers
Area
Square inch 6.4516 Square centimeters
Square feet 0.0929 Square meters
Pressure
Kilogram-force per
Pounds per square inch 0.0700
square centimeters
Volume
Gallon (liquid) 3.7854 Liters
Gallon (dry) 4.4048 Liters
Cubic feet 0.0283 Cubic meters
Cubic inch 16.3870 Cubic centimeters
Mass (Weight)
Pound 0.4536 Kilograms
Temperature
Angle
Degrees (angular) 17.7778 Mils
Table A7.49. Fractions of an Inch

Inch 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2
Cm 0.16 0.32 0.48 0.64 0.79 0.95 1.11 1.27
Inch 9/16 5/8 11/16 3/4 13/16 7/8 15/16 1

Cm 1.43 1.59 1.75 1.91 2.06 2.22 2.38 2.54
AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012 313
Table A7.50. Common Metric to U.S. Conversions

Length
Metric Unit U.S. Equivalent
Centimeter 0.3937 Inches
Millimeter 0.0393 Inches
Meter 3.2808 Feet
Kilometer 0.6213 Miles
Area
Square centimeter 0.1550 Square inches
Square meter 10.7639 Square feet
Pressure
Kilogram-force per
14.2233 Pounds per square inch
square centimeter
Volume
Liter 0.2642 Gallons (liquid)
Liter 0.2270 Gallons (dry)
Cubic meter 35.3146 Cubic feet
Cubic centimeter 0.0610 Cubic inches
Mass (Weight)
Kilogram 2.2046 Pounds
Temperature
Angle
Mil 0.0562 Degrees (angular)
Table A7.51. Units of Centimeters

Cm 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00
Inch 0.04 0.08 0.12 0.16 0.20 0.24 0.28 0.31 0.35 0.39
314 AFPAM10-219V5 30 MARCH 2012
Table A7.52. Metric Equivalents (Distance)

One unit (below)
mm cm m km
equals
Millimeters (mm) 1 0.1 0.001 0.000001
Centimeters (cm) 10 1 0.01 0.00001
Meters (m) 1,000 100 1 0.001
Kilometers (km) 1,000,000 100,000 1,000 1
Table A7.53. Metric Equivalents (Weight)

One unit (below) equals g kg Metric ton
Grams (g) 1 0.001 0.000001
Kilograms (kg) 1,000 1 0.001
Metric tons 1,000,000 1,000 1

Afpam10 219 v5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Afpam10 219 v5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Afpam10 219 v5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Administrative Changes to AFPAM 10-219, Volume 5, Bare Base Conceptual Planning

OPR should be changed to: AFCEC/CX

BARE BASE CONCEPTUAL PLANNING

COMPLIANCE WITH THIS PUBLICATION IS MANDATORY

ACCESSIBILITY: Publications and forms are available on the e-Publishing website at

RELEASABILITY: There are no releasability restrictions on this publication

OPR: AFCESA/CEXX Certified by: AF/A7CX

This document is substantially revised and should be completely reviewed. Of particular

Chapter 1—INTRODUCTION TO BARE BASE PLANNING 11

Chapter 2—BARE BASE PLANNING GUIDELINES 21

Figure 2.9. Fuel Berm with Protective Liner Installed ............................................................. 32

Chapter 3—BARE BASE SITING AND CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES 46

Table 3.4. Task Schedule ........................................................................................................ 56

Chapter 4—SITE SPECIFIC PLANNING 60

Chapter 5—MANPOWER PLANNING 79

Chapter 6—AIRFIELD REQUIREMENTS 90

Chapter 7—ELECTRICAL UTILITY SYSTEMS 105

7.2. Overview. ............................................................................................................... 105

Chapter 8—WATER UTILITY SYSTEMS 116

Figure 8.6. Electric-Driven Pump ............................................................................................ 125

Chapter 9—WASTE UTILITY SYSTEMS 130

Table 9.5. Evaporation Lagoon Requirements ........................................................................ 146

Chapter 10—BEAR FACILITIES 152

Chapter 11—BARE BASE ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT 164

Chapter 12—MEDICAL FACILITIES 177

12.2. Overview. ............................................................................................................... 177

Attachment 1—GLOSSARY OF REFERENCES AND SUPPORTING INFORMATION 187

Attachment 2—ELECTRICAL CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS IN SOUTHWEST ASIA

Attachment 3—EXISTING FACILITIES AND RESOURCES CHECKLIST 207

Attachment 4—CONVERSION FACTORS 227

Attachment 5—FOREIGN WEIGHTS AND MEASURES 229

Attachment 6—CIVIL ENGINEER CONTINGENCY PLANNING FACTORS 235

Attachment 7—CIVIL ENGINEER QUICK REFERENCE SHEETS 250

INTRODUCTION TO BARE BASE PLANNING

Figure 1.1. Bare Base Facilities and Equipment

Figure 1.2. Air Force Civil Engineer Publications Hierarchy

Figure 1.3. Dozer Clearing an Airfield in World War II

Figure 1.4. Prime Power Generators Support Sustained Operations

Figure 1.6. Contract Augmentation and Support

contact the lead commands: Naval Facilities Engineering Command (NAVFAC)

BARE BASE PLANNING GUIDELINES

Figure 2.1. Elements of Bare Base Planning

2.2.5. General purpose vehicles are available from host nation.

Figure 2.2. AETF Force Module Construct

Figure 2.3. Transition from BEAR to BOB Asset Management

2.4.1.1. Capability-Based Planning and Force Presentation. AF planners recognized

Table 2.1. BOB Multi-Modal Configurations

Water Production, 1500-GPH Reverse Osmosis Water

Figure 2.4. Modular/Scalable UTC to Pax Flow Matrix (expanded capability)

Figure 2.5. BOB Scaled to Support 50-Person Humanitarian Relief Operation

Figure 2.6. BOB with Partial Host Base Support

Figure 2.7. Comparison of BEAR and BOB Asset Management

Figure 2.8. Servicing the Mobile Aircraft Arresting System

Figure 2.9. Fuel Berm with Protective Liner Installed

Figure 2.10. Civil Engineers Erect Medium Shelter System

2.6.4. Electrical Power.

Figure 2.11. Installing Airfield Lighting - Priority 1 Task

2.7.2.5. Showers. Install personnel showers and temporary wastewater drains.